9900 Operator Manual English - UM - 5397644-1EN - 1

GE Healthcare
GE OEC 9900 Operator Manual

Product Model: OEC 9900 Elite
Product Name: Mobile C-Arm X-ray System
5397644-1EN
Rev. 1
© 2012
GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Revision history
Revision history
Rev # Date Description of changes
1 06-2012 Production Release
CAUTION U.S. federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician, vet-
erinarian, or other designated licensed practitioner as appropriate for its clinical use.
IMPORTANT: SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. PLEASE READ THIS MANUAL BEFORE USING EQUIPMENT.
This manual may not be reproduced, in whole or in part, without the written permission of GE
Healthcare.
Other product and company names mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners.
The contents of this document are accurate at the time of publication. However, changes in design
and additional features can, at any time, be incorporated in the hardware and software and may
not be reflected in this version of the document. Contact GE Healthcare Technical Support for
clarification, if discrepancies arise.
All 9900 product documentation was originally drafted, approved, and supplied by the
manufacturer in English.
GE OEC Medical Systems, a General Electric company, going to market as GE Healthcare.
GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. GE Medical Systems SCS

384 Wright Brothers Drive 283 rue de la Minière
Salt Lake City, Utah 84116 U.S.A. 78530 Buc, France
801-328-9300 Telephone: (+33) 1 30 70 40 40
Fax: (+33) 1 30 70 44 40
ii
Medical device directive

This product conforms with the Medical Device Directive, Council Directive (MDD) 93/42/EEC when it
bears the following CE Mark of Conformity.
This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed as
unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. Contact an authorized representative
of the manufacturer for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment.
The separate collection symbol is affixed to a battery, or its packaging, to advise you that the
battery must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local or country laws. The letters below
the separate collection symbol indicate whether certain elements (Pb=Lead, Cd=Cadmium,
Hg=Mercury) are contained in the battery. To minimize potential effects on the environment and
human health, it is important that all marked batteries that you remove from the product are
properly recycled or disposed.
For information on how the battery may be safely removed from the device, please consult the
service manual or equipment instructions. Information on the potential effects on the environment
and human health of the substances used in batteries is available at this url:
http://www.gehealthcare.com/euen/weee-recycling/index.html.
iii
This page intentionally left blank.
iv
2. Table of contents
Revision history ii
Medical device directive iii
2. Table of contents v
1. Safety overview 1-1
1.1 Owner responsibilities 1-1
1.1.1 System compatibility 1-1
1.1.2 Operator qualifications 1-1
1.1.3 Continued compliance 1-1
1.1.4 Unauthorized modifications 1-1
1.2 GE OEC responsibilities 1-2
1.2.1 Intended use 1-2
1.2.2 Contraindications for use 1-2
1.2.3 X-ray equipment certification 1-2
1.2.4 After-sale operating and safety practices 1-2
1.3 General Safety 1-2
1.3.1 Safety hazard alerts 1-3
1.3.2 Improperly attached equipment 1-3
1.3.3 Electrical shock 1-3
1.3.4 Electrical fire 1-4
1.3.5 Explosion 1-4
1.3.6 Implosion 1-5
1.3.7 Equipment stability, transport, and positioning 1-5
1.3.8 Motorized mechanical movement 1-5
1.3.9 Ground fault 1-6
1.4 Radiation safety 1-6
1.4.1 Radiation protection 1-6
1.4.2 Ingress of fluids 1-7
1.4.3 Cooling efficiency 1-7
1.4.4 Burns 1-7
1.4.5 Performance criteria 1-7
1.4.6 Electromagnetic compatibility 1-7
1.4.7 Immunity tests 1-9
1.4.8 RF immunity tests 1-10
1.4.9 Separation distances 1-12
1.4.10 Equipment malfunction 1-12
1.4.11 External devices 1-13
1.4.12 Patient environment 1-13
1.5 Patient Privacy and Data Security 1-14
1.6 Compliance information - China 1-14
v
1.6.1 After-sales service agency (中国境内售后服务机构) 1-14

1.6.2 SFDA Certification Information 1-14
1.6.3 Pollution Control Information 1-15
2. System setup and positioning 2-1
2.1 Workstation overview 2-1
2.1.1 First time Workstation setup 2-1
2.1.2 Login - Logout 2-1
2.1.3 Set up software features 2-2
2.2 Workstation setup 2-10
2.2.1 Monitors 2-11
2.2.2 Workstation external connections 2-13
2.2.3 View External Video 2-15
2.2.4 Move the Workstation 2-16
2.3 C-Arm overview and setup 2-17
2.3.1 C-Arm identification 2-17
2.3.2 C-Arm components 2-18
2.3.3 Positioning 2-19
2.3.4 C-Arm steering handle 2-28
2.3.5 Skin spacer 2-28
2.3.6 Move the C-Arm 2-28
2.3.7 Draping 2-29
2.4 Motorized C-Arm 2-30
2.4.1 Motorized C-Arm setup 2-31
2.5 System startup, shutdown, and restart 2-33
2.5.1 Turn the system on 2-34
2.5.2 Turn the system off 2-41
2.5.3 Restart the system 2-43
2.5.4 Immediate Workstation shutdown 2-44
2.5.5 Power loss and system restart 2-45
2.5.6 System lockups 2-45
3. System operation 3-1
3.1 Workstation controls 3-1
3.1.1 Workstation keyboard 3-1
3.1.2 Image processing keys 3-3
3.1.3 Touchpad 3-8
3.1.4 Mouse/Touchpad/Audio configuration 3-9
3.1.5 Remote control 3-10
3.1.6 Function keys 3-11
3.1.7 Touchscreen controls 3-11
3.1.8 Multiple switch presses 3-12
3.1.9 Workstation Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 3-13
3.1.10 Extended exposure feature 3-13
vi
3.2 C-Arm controls 3-16

3.2.1 Radiation control 3-17
3.2.2 C-Arm sleep mode 3-24
3.3 Motorized C-Arm controls 3-24
3.3.1 Safety 3-24
3.3.2 Remote user interface 3-25
3.3.3 Buttons 3-25
3.3.4 C-Arm function buttons 3-28
3.3.5 Workstation Function Buttons 3-29
3.3.6 Motorized C-Arm movement and operation 3-31
3.3.7 Manual movement 3-34
4. Patient information and exams 4-1
4.1 Patient information screen 4-1
4.1.1 Select current patient 4-2
4.1.2 Change current patient 4-2
4.1.3 Enter patient information 4-3
4.1.4 Edit patient information 4-4
4.2 Scheduled exams 4-5
4.2.1 Set up the Scheduled Exams feature 4-5
4.2.2 Select a patient from Scheduled Exams 4-5
4.2.3 Update schedule - schedule filter 4-7
4.3 Saved exams 4-9
4.3.1 Access the Saved Exam images 4-9
4.3.2 Access Saved Exam patient information 4-11
5. Imaging 5-1
5.1 Modes of operation 5-1
5.1.1 Automatic and manual exposure control 5-1
5.1.2 Mode groups 5-1
5.1.3 Access modes 5-2
5.1.4 Mode screen in Fluoro imaging 5-2
5.1.5 Mode display 5-3
5.1.6 Status bar 5-3
5.1.7 X-ray switch mode setup for fluoro imaging 5-4
5.1.8 Mode pairs 5-4
5.1.9 Switching mode pairs 5-4
5.1.10 Set up imaging modes available during the exam 5-4
5.1.11 Imaging modes summary 5-5
5.1.12 Footswitches and modes 5-6
5.1.13 Visual and audible X-ray indication 5-6
5.2 Image save and auto save 5-7
5.3 X-ray switch setup 5-7
5.4 Anatomical profile 5-8
vii
5.5 Fluoro imaging 5-9

5.5.1 Fluoro mode 5-9
5.5.2 High Level Fluoro Imaging (HLF) 5-10
5.5.3 Digital spot 5-10
5.5.4 Pulsed X-ray 5-11
5.6 Vascular imaging 5-12
5.6.1 X-ray switch setup for vascular imaging 5-13
5.6.2 Mode screen in Vascular imaging 5-13
5.6.3 Change the vascular pulse rate 5-15
5.6.4 Subtraction imaging 5-17
5.6.5 Roadmap imaging 5-20
5.6.6 Digital pulse Cine 5-23
5.6.7 Create a digital pulse Cine image on vascular systems 5-24
5.6.8 Cine acquisition 5-25
5.7 Cardiac imaging 5-25
5.7.1 Cardiac fluoro pulse rates 5-26
5.7.2 Create a digital pulse Cine image on cardiac systems 5-28
5.8 Radiation display 5-29
5.8.1 Dosimetry display 5-29
5.8.2 Air kerma and air kerma rate 5-29
5.8.3 Dose-area product (DAP) 5-30
5.8.4 Exposure timer 5-31
5.8.5 Dosimetry on the X-ray image screen 5-31
5.8.6 Dose summary 5-31
6. Dynamic recording 6-1
6.1 Cine options 6-1
6.1.1 Activate the Cine disk 6-2
6.1.2 Acquire On/Off 6-3
6.2 Cine review 6-5
6.2.1 Review a Cine run 6-5
6.2.2 Select Cine runs from the Cine screen 6-7
6.2.3 Store frame 6-8
6.2.4 Set mask 6-8
6.2.5 Set cues 6-9
6.2.6 Viewing options 6-10
6.3 Mini Cine playback 6-13
7. Image annotation and measurement 7-1
7.1 Display Image Annotation Screen 7-1
7.2 Image markers 7-2
7.2.1 Place a marker 7-2
7.2.2 Delete markers 7-2
7.3 Image comments 7-3
viii
7.3.1 Place comments on an image 7-3

7.3.2 Delete comments from an image 7-3
7.4 Crop an image 7-4
7.4.1 Crop an image procedure 7-4
7.5 Calibration 7-5
7.5.1 Perform calibration 7-5
7.6 Measure an image 7-6
7.6.1 Measure a distance 7-6
7.6.2 Perform distance measurements 7-7
7.6.3 Measure a stenosis 7-7
7.6.4 Perform a stenosis measurement 7-8
7.6.5 Delete measurements 7-8
8. Image review, hardcopy, and archive 8-1
8.1 Image directory 8-1
8.1.1 Image directory screen 8-2
8.1.2 Damaged thumbnails in the image screen 8-3
8.1.3 Review Cine runs and subtracted Cine runs 8-4
8.2 Retrieve a saved exam 8-4
8.2.1 Retrieve a saved exam procedure 8-4
8.2.2 Image review 8-6
8.3 Copy to a new study 8-6
8.3.1 Copy to a new study procedure 8-7
8.4 Post-processing to optimize fluoroscopic images 8-8
8.4.1 Image adjustment procedure 8-8
8.4.2 Adjust brightness 8-9
8.4.3 Adjust contrast 8-10
8.4.4 Adjust enhancement 8-11
8.5 Review patient information and dose screen 8-12
8.5.1 Save dose summary information 8-13
8.5.2 Create a dose summary image for the current patient 8-14
8.5.3 Create a dose summary image for a saved patient 8-14
8.6 Create prints 8-14
8.6.1 Select a device 8-15
8.6.2 Select a layout 8-15
8.6.3 Print 8-16
8.6.4 Print dose summary 8-17
8.6.5 Print patient summary 8-17
8.6.6 Clear the copy queue 8-17
8.7 Archive images 8-17
8.7.1 Select a storage device 8-18
8.7.2 Configure the Copy To ... device 8-19
8.7.3 Save As... options 8-20
ix
8.7.4 Copy options 8-20

8.7.5 Copy to archive device 8-21
8.7.6 Clear the storage device queue 8-22
8.7.7 Copy from an archive device 8-22
8.7.8 Copy multiple patients to a single disc 8-24
8.8 View, annotate, and export images with DICOM 8-25
8.9 Portable DICOM viewer 8-28
8.9.1 Use the DICOM viewer 8-28
8.9.2 DICOM viewer control bar 8-29
9. Additional functions and options 9-1
9.1 DICOM setup and configuration 9-1
9.1.1 Network connection 9-1
9.1.2 Configure DICOM 9-2
9.1.3 Setup configurations 9-3
9.1.4 Network configuration 9-4
9.1.5 DICOM configuration 9-5
9.2 DICOM operation 9-16
9.2.1 Print DICOM images 9-16
9.2.2 Store/archive DICOM images 9-17
9.2.3 Copy from CD/DVD storage to DICOM 9-19
9.3 DICOM query retrieve option 9-19
9.3.1 DICOM retrieve 9-19
9.4 Medrad Mark V ProVis injector 9-24
9.4.1 Safety notice 9-24
9.4.2 Proper injector use 9-24
9.4.3 Intended use 9-24
9.4.4 Connect the injector to the Workstation 9-25
9.4.5 Auto inject synchronization 9-25
9.5 Radiographic film 9-26
9.5.1 Make a film exposure 9-26
9.6 Heat management 9-28
9.6.1 Performance improvements with heat management 9-28
9.6.2 Anode warm and hot thresholds 9-29
10. Labels and symbols 10-1
10.1 Labels 10-1
10.1.1 Pinch point labels 10-1
10.1.2 Additional Labels 10-3
10.2 Symbols 10-9
11. Maintenance and storage 11-1
11.1 Performance checks 11-1
11.1.1 Mechanical performance check 11-1
x
11.1.2 Electrical performance check 11-2

11.1.3 Fast stop performance check 11-2
11.1.4 Fluoro mode performance check 11-3
11.1.5 Film mode performance check 11-3
11.2 Cleaning 11-4
11.2.1 Approved Cleaning Agents 11-4
11.3 IR Remote Control 11-5
11.3.1 To replace the batteries 11-5
11.4 Planned Maintenance 11-6
11.4.1 Annual Maintenance 11-6
11.5 Storage and Shipment 11-7
11.5.1 Temporary storage (less than 60 days) 11-7
11.5.2 Long-term storage (60 days or longer) or shipment 11-7
11.5.3 Transport checklist 11-7
12. Troubleshooting and messages 12-1
12.1 Error recovery 12-1
12.1.1 Error recovery procedure 12-1
12.1.2 Image freeze 12-1
12.1.3 No X-ray 12-2
12.1.4 No boot 12-2
12.1.5 C-Arm unexpected power loss or restart 12-2
12.1.6 X-ray switch security error 12-2
12.2 Messages 12-3
13. Technical specifications and references 13-1
13.1 Classification type 13-2
13.2 Environmental conditions 13-2
13.3 X-ray source specifications 13-3
13.3.1 X-ray source assembly 13-3
13.3.2 Dose Area Product 13-4
13.3.3 Tube rating charts 13-5
13.3.4 Heating and cooling charts - tube housing 13-6
13.3.5 Heating and cooling chart - anode 13-7
13.4 Radiographic tables 13-8
13.4.1 Radiographic mA as a function of kV and mAs 13-8
13.4.2 Measurement basis for technique factors 13-8
13.5 Focal spot specifications 13-9
13.5.1 Focal spot (0.3) per IEC 60336 13-9
13.5.2 Focal spot (0.6) per IEC 60336 13-9
13.6 Scatter radiation 13-10
13.6.1 9 Inch (22.8 cm) image intensifier 13-10
13.6.2 12 Inch (30.5 cm) image intensifier 13-12
13.7 C-Arm specifications 13-13
xi
13.7.1 C-Arm camera output video signal 13-13

13.7.2 C-Arm collimation 13-13
13.7.3 C-Arm generator specifications 13-14
13.7.4 C-Arm generator operating parameters 13-15
13.8 Workstation specifications 13-15
13.8.1 Workstation video signal 13-15
13.8.2 Workstation external connections 13-16
13.8.3 CD/DVD-R/RW drive 13-17
13.9 Power requirements 13-17
13.9.1 C-Arm interconnect cable 13-18
13.9.2 I/O interfaces 13-19
13.9.3 Connector output voltages 13-19
13.10 Dimensions 13-20
13.10.1 9 inch standard C-Arm 13-20
13.10.2 12 inch standard C-Arm 13-21
13.10.3 9 inch super C-Arm 13-22
13.10.4 9 inch Motorized C-Arm 13-23
13.10.5 12 inch Motorized C-Arm 13-24
13.10.6 Workstation 13-25
13.10.7 Film cassette 13-25
13.11 Communication Center contact information 13-26
13.11.1 Ordering disposable and accessory items 13-26
13.11.2 Service contact information 13-26
13.11.3 Optional equipment 13-27
13.11.4 Replacement items 13-27
13.12 Material safety data sheets 13-27
Index I-1
xii
1. Safety overview
1. Safety overview
This manual describes operation about your GE OEC 9900 Elite and C-Arm. It is intended for qualified
medical personnel who have been trained in the use of medical imaging equipment. It is not
designed to replace or substitute for certified training in the radiological or medical field.
Functional capabilities and operation of the equipment are described here which can be used in a
variety of diagnostic, therapeutic and surgical applications.
l Owner responsibilities
l GE OEC responsibilities
l General Safety
l Radiation safety
l Patient Privacy and Data Security
l Compliance information - China
1.1 Owner responsibilities

The owner has the responsibility to ensure system compatibility, operator qualifications and the
continued compliance of equipment and operating specifications. Systems should only be used in
designated use areas with approved AC receptacles. Unauthorized changes or modifications to any
part of the system could have hazardous consequences. Changes or modifications must not be
made unless specifically authorized by GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc.
1.1.1 System compatibility

Damage may result to the system if incompatible components are connected. Read your operator
manual thoroughly prior to connecting components that you are not certain are compatible.
1.1.2 Operator qualifications

It is the responsibility of the owner to ensure that only properly trained, qualified personnel who
have obtained credentials from the appropriate authorities operate the system.
1.1.3 Continued compliance

The owner is responsible for verifying continued compliance with all applicable regulations and
standards. Consult local, state, federal and/or international agencies regarding specific
requirements and regulations applicable to the use of this type of medical electronic equipment.
1.1.4 Unauthorized modifications

When properly assembled this equipment meets US Federal regulations and International
standards. Unauthorized modifications to the equipment may impact adherence to these standards
and make the equipment unsafe to operate. Never make any modifications or adjustments to the
1-1
1. Safety overview
equipment unless directed by a qualified GE OEC representative.
1.2 GE OEC responsibilities

GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. certifies each system and X-ray source assembly. After-sale operating
practices and safety are the responsibility of the owner/operator.
1.2.1 Intended use

The GE OEC 9900 Elite mobile fluoroscopy system is designed to provide fluoroscopic and spot-film
images of the patient during diagnostic, surgical, and interventional procedures. Examples of clinical
application may include cholangiography, endoscopy, urologic, orthopedic, neurologic, vascular,
cardiac, critical care and emergency room procedures.
1.2.2 Contraindications for use

Appropriate contraindications are included in the dangers, warnings, and cautions throughout this
manual.
1.2.3 X-ray equipment certification

The US configuration for this device conforms to all applicable standards of 21 CFR subchapter J for
Radiation Health when assembled according to manufacturer's instructions. The unit may be
configured to meet destination country regulations when shipped outside the US. If returned to the
US, the unit must be reconfigured to comply with 21 CFR Subchapter J before putting into use. To do
so, contact your local GE OEC Service representative.
1.2.4 After-sale operating and safety practices

GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability for after-sale operating and
safety practices; nor can it be responsible for personal injury or damage resulting from misuse of its
systems.
1.3 General Safety

Potential hazards exist in the use of medical electronic devices and X-ray systems. Operators using
the equipment should understand the safety issues, emergency procedures, and the operating
instructions provided.
Questions and comments regarding safety should be addressed to the GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc.
service organization nearest them. Unresolved problems should be referred to:
Vice President, Quality
GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc.
384 Wright Brothers Drive
Salt Lake City, Utah 84116
(801) 328-9300
1-2
1. Safety overview
GE OEC Medical Systems has designated the following entity to act as the authorized European
Union (EU) representative in matters dealing with the Medical Devices Directive under Annexes I and
II:
GE Medical Systems SCS
283 rue de la Minière
78530 Buc, France
Telephone: (+33) 1 30 70 40 40
Fax: (+33) 1 30 70 44 40
The following pages describe hazardous and potentially hazardous conditions, and how to
adequately protect yourself and others from possible injury.
1.3.1 Safety hazard alerts

There are three hazard classifications, which are denoted and prioritized by the alert words:
Table 1-1: Hazard alert definitions
Alert Circumstances for Use

DANGER Danger indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
WARNING Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may
result in moderate to minor injury, equipment damage or loss of data.
1.3.2 Improperly attached equipment

If your equipment accommodates a film cassette holder or some other piece of equipment that can
be attached or removed, follow these guidelines:
Use only equipment supplied by GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc.
WARNING: Attach the equipment properly. Incorrectly attached equipment could fall, caus-
ing injury to the patient or operator.
NOTE: See 13.10 Dimensions on page 13-20 for the correct dimensions of items that may be used in
conjunction with this product, such as radiographic film cassettes.
1.3.3 Electrical shock

Observe the following safety procedures to avoid electric shock or serious injury to operators and
1-3
1. Safety overview
patients and to avoid system malfunction.

l Make all electrical connections to equipment while outside the patient environment. Do not
touch a connector and the patient at the same time.
l Do not bypass, jumper or otherwise disable the safety interlocks.
l Do not remove any of the assembly covers. Only trained service representatives should
perform repairs.
l Do not place food or beverage containers on any part of the equipment. If spilled they can
cause short circuits.
l Always remove power to the equipment before cleaning. See 11.2 Cleaning on page 11-4 for
details on cleaning the system.
l Only qualified service engineers are allowed to service or repair a system.
WARNING: Electrical circuits inside the equipment may use voltages which are capable of
causing serious injury or death from electric shock. To avoid this hazard, never
remove any of the cabinet covers.
1.3.4 Electrical fire

In the event of electrical fire on or near the system, perform the following emergency procedure:
NOTE: Any emergency procedure developed by the owner, for the area in which the system is used,
should include these safety measures.
l Remove electrical power to the system by placing the power switch in the off position.
l If your Workstation is equipped with an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), press the UPS Off
button on the back of the Workstation
l Unplug the power cord from the AC receptacle.
l Evacuate personnel from the area.
l Only use a fire extinguisher that is approved for use on electrical fires.
l Call your local fire department for help if necessary.
WARNING: The use of the wrong type of fire extinguisher presents electrical shock and burn
hazards. To avoid these hazards, a fire extinguisher which meets applicable reg-
ulations and standards must be available in the room where the equipment is
being used. Remember that equipment that is equipped with batteries is a
source of electrical current, even when AC power is disconnected.
1.3.5 Explosion
If your system complies with the requirements of IEC 60601-1 regarding Anesthetic Proof (AP)
equipment, an AP label will be located on the equipment. An AP label means that under normal
conditions certain components may be operated safely in close proximity to flammable gases.
If an abnormal condition occurs, such as the room fills with flammable gas, take steps to prevent the
1-4
1. Safety overview
gas from coming in contact with non-AP rated components within the equipment. Follow these
guidelines:
l Do not turn the system off or unplug it from the AC receptacle.
l Do not operate any other electrically powered equipment.
l Evacuate all personnel from the area and ventilate with fresh air. Avoid operating any
automated (electrically operated) doors or windows.
l Contact your local fire department as soon as possible.
1.3.6 Implosion
Do not locate objects so that they might fall and strike the image intensifier face and cause it to
implode. Use caution when working around the image intensifier. The coating on the glass can also
produce toxic dust and fumes. If an image intensifier implodes:
l Remove power immediately.
l Evacuate the area.
l Contact an appropriate staff member that is familiar with hazardous material disposal.
1.3.7 Equipment stability, transport, and positioning

If your system is mounted on wheels and casters and it is moved or operated improperly it could roll
out of control. Follow these guidelines:
l Two people should maintain control of the equipment when moving up or down an incline.
l Place all mechanical assemblies in their most compact (transport) position and lock brake
handles prior to moving the equipment.
l Always lock the monitor assembly during transport.
l Use the handles designed for moving the equipment and mechanical assemblies.
l Never attempt to move the system up or down steps.
l Do not operate the equipment on unlevel floors.
l Do not lock the wheel brakes and leave the equipment unattended on unlevel floors or
inclines.
l Always apply the wheel locks when the system is in its final position.
l Do not move the equipment if the casters or wheels are not functioning properly.
l Mechanical shocks to the equipment while disk drives are accessing information may cause
damage to the disk drive.
1.3.8 Motorized mechanical movement

If your equipment has motorized mechanical assemblies follow these guidelines:
l Always observe mechanical assemblies when operating the motor to avoid pinching or
collision with a person or object.
1-5
1. Safety overview
l Use care when working around equipment to avoid unintentional motor actuation. Do not
carelessly place objects on the equipment or bump or lean against the equipment.
l Observe and prevent articles of clothing from getting caught in moving parts.
1.3.9 Ground fault

If the operating room has a ground fault alarm and the alarm is actuated:
l Do not operate the system.
l Call a qualified service technician.
1.4 Radiation safety

1.4.1 Radiation protection
WARNING: This equipment either produces or is used in the vicinity of ionizing radiation.
Risks and dangers are inherent in the operation of this equipment, and exposure
to radiation can have both short-term deterministic and long-term stochastic
effects, including skin injury, hair loss, and increased risk of cancer. To minimize
these effects, observe proper safety practices during operation, including the
following:
l Designate areas suitable for safe operation and service of the equipment,
and ensure that the equipment is only used in those areas.
l Ensure that all personnel wear appropriate protective clothing and
radiation monitoring devices while using the equipment.
l Remain alert for visual indicators and audible alarms that are activated
when ionizing radiation is being produced by equipment in the work area.
Source-to-skin distance
International regulations specify that a minimum source-skin distance be maintained, except for
specific surgical applications. Some medical imaging equipment may have a skin spacer attached in
order to meet this requirement.
The system maintains a minimum source to skin distance of 30 cm when the skin spacer is attached.
The skin spacer may be removed for special procedures. When the skin spacer is removed, the
system maintains a minimum source to skin distance of 20 cm.
WARNING: Removing the skin spacer may result in increased radiation exposure to the
patient. The rate of exposure increases exponentially as the anatomy is
positioned closer to the X-ray tube. The skin spacer should only be removed on
the instructions of a physician. The spacer should be reattached to the
collimator assembly immediately following the procedure.
1-6
1. Safety overview
CAUTION The patient should be positioned as far away from the X-ray source as possible in
order to keep the absorbed dose to the patient as low as reasonably achievable.
CAUTION Additional objects in the beam, such as tables and patient supports, may cause the
imaging system to increase the amount of radiation, in order to obtain an optimal
image. Prevent additional exposure by removing unnecessary objects from the path
of the beam.
1.4.2 Ingress of fluids

WARNING: The X-ray system is not rated for water-tight operation. If liquids drip into the
equipment, disconnect the power cord and do not operate the system until it can
be cleaned and inspected by a qualified service engineer.
Excessive amounts of fluids such as antiseptics, cleaning solutions or bodily fluids may damage
internal components if they are allowed inside the equipment. Use drapes, if necessary, to protect
equipment when performing procedures and do not apply excessive amounts of fluid when
cleaning.
1.4.3 Cooling efficiency

Draping some parts of the X-ray equipment may restrict airflow to components that provide heat
sinking and to vents designed to cool the equipment. Drape equipment and cover vents only when
exposure to excessive fluids is unavoidable and extended use of the equipment is not required.
1.4.4 Burns
WARNING: Extended use of imaging equipment may cause components such as X-ray tubes
to reach temperatures capable of inflicting burns. Use care when positioning
equipment to avoid placing hot components in close proximity to patients and
personnel. An anesthetized or unconscious patient is incapable of sensing and
reacting to a hot component.
1.4.5 Performance criteria

The system is designed to perform its intended function during normal operation. In the presence of
electromagnetic interference some degradation of displayed live video may occur but the system
will return to normal operation when the interference is eliminated. Any loss of function will be
readily apparent to the operator and will not cause a safety hazard. Electromagnetic interference
will not cause permanent damage to the system.
1.4.6 Electromagnetic compatibility

GE OEC 9900 Elite Mobile C-Arms are suitable to be used in the electromagnetic environment, as per
the limits and recommendations described in the tables hereafter:
1-7
1. Safety overview
l Emission Compliance level and limits (Table 1-2).

l Immunity Compliance level and recommendations to help the equipment keep its clinical
utility (Table 1-2, Table 1-3and Table 1-4).
All GE OEC 9900 Elite C-Arms generate and use radio frequency energy and must be installed and
used according to the manufacturer’s instructions in order to avoid receiving radio frequency
interference. If this equipment generates or receives interference do the following to correct the
problem:
l Verify that the equipment is the cause by turning the system on and off.
l In the event of unintended motor actuation, immediately remove power to the equipment.
l In the event of unintended X-ray actuation, immediately remove power to the equipment.
l Reorient the equipment until the interference stops.
l Relocate the equipment with respect to other equipment in the room.
l Plug the equipment into a different outlet so that the equipment and the receiver are on
different branch circuits.
l Use only input/output (I/O) cables supplied by GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc.
Mobile imaging equipment has the potential to emit electromagnetic radiation that may interfere
with the safe operation of other medical equipment. Conversely, other medical equipment, including
RF communications equipment, may emit electromagnetic radiation that interferes with the mobile
imaging system.
NOTE: All cables that are used to connect to the D-Sub connector I/O ports of the Workstation must
be shielded cables or cables supplied by GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc.
Emission
GE OEC 9900 Elite Mobile C-Arms are suitable for use in the electromagnetic environment specified
below. The purchaser or user of the GE OEC 9900 Elite should assure that it is used in an
electromagnetic environment as described below:
Table 1-2: Electromagnetic tests and compliance
Emissions Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment
Radio-Frequency Group 1 The GE OEC 9900 Elite uses RF energy only for its internal func-
Emissions CISPR11 tion. Therefore, the RF emission is very low and not likely to
cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment.
Class A The GE OEC 9900 Elite is suitable for use in all establishments
other than domestic and those directly connected to the low
voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for
domestic purposes.
1-8
1. Safety overview
Emissions Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment

Harmonic Class A The GE OEC 9900 Elite is suitable for use in all establishments
emissions other than domestic and those directly connected to the low
IEC 61000- 3-2 voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for
domestic purposes.
Voltage Complies The GE OEC 9900 Elite is suitable for use in all establishments
fluctuations/ flicker other than domestic and those directly connected to the low
emissions voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for
IEC 61000- 3-3 domestic purposes.
1.4.7 Immunity tests

ESD, transient/burst, surge, voltage variation, and power frequency immunity tests
GE OEC 9900 Elite Mobile C-Arms are suitable for use in the specified electromagnetic environment.
The purchaser or user of the GE OEC 9900 Elite should assure that it is used in an electromagnetic
environment as described below:
Table 1-3: Electromagnetic environments
Immunity test IEC 60601-1-2 Compliance level Electromagnetic environment
test level
Electrostatic 6 kV contact 6 kV contact Floors are wood, concrete, or ceramic
discharge (ESD) 8 kV air 8 kV air tile, or floors are covered with syn-
IEC 61000-4-2 thetic material and the relative humid-
ity is at least 30%.
Electrical fast 2 kV for power 2 kV for power Mains power quality is that of a typical
transient/burst supply lines supply lines commercial and/or hospital envi-
IEC 61000-4-4 1 kV for input/ 1 kV for input/ ronment.
output lines output lines
Surge IEC 1 kV differential 1 kV differential Mains power quality is that of a typical
61000-4-5 mode mode commercial and/or hospital envi-
2 kV common 2 kV common ronment.
mode mode
1-9
1. Safety overview
Immunity test IEC 60601-1-2 Compliance level Electromagnetic environment

test level
Voltage dips, <5% U (>95% dip <5% U (>95% dip in Mains power quality is that of a typical
T T
short inter- in U ) for 0.5 cycle U ) for 0.5 cycle commercial and/or hospital envi-
T T
ruptions and ronment. If the user of the GE OEC
voltage var- 40% U (60% dip in 40% U (60% dip in 9900 Elite requires continued oper-
T T
iations on U ) for 5 cycles U ) for 5 cycles ation during power mains inter-
T T
power supply ruptions, it is recommended that the
input lines IEC 70% U (30% dip in 70% U (30% dip in GE OEC 9900 Elite be powered from an
T T
61000-4-11 U ) for 25 cycles U ) for 25 cycle uninterruptible power supply or a bat-
T T
tery.
<5% U (>95% <5% U (>95%
T T
dip in U ) for 5 s dip in U ) for 5 s
T T
Power 3 A/m 3 A/m At this disturbance amplitude level the
frequency monitor image might present some
(50/60 Hz) slight flicker. For image quality improve-
magnetic field ment, the monitor might be removed
IEC 61000-4-8 from the low frequency magnetic field
source vicinity.
1.4.8 RF immunity tests

GE OEC 9900 Elite Mobile C-Arms are suitable for use in the specified electromagnetic environment.
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be used no closer to any part of the GE
OEC 9900 Elite, including cables, than the recommended separation distance calculated from the
equation appropriate for the frequency of the transmitter.
The purchaser or user of the GE OEC 9900 Elite should assure that it is used in an electromagnetic
environment as described below:
Table 1-4: Immunity tests and compliance levels
Immunity IEC 60601-1-2 Compliance Electromagnetic
test test level level environment
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 150 kHz to 3 Vrms At this disturbance amplitude the system is
IEC 61000-4-6 80 MHz fully operational.
1-10
1. Safety overview
Immunity IEC 60601-1-2 Compliance Electromagnetic

test test level level environment
Radiated RF 3 V/m 80 kHz to 3 V/m At this field strength, the monitor image might
IEC 61000-4-3 2.5 GHz present some slight flicker. For image quality
improvement, the monitor might be removed
from the electric field source vicinity.
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as
determined by an electromagnetic site survey,
a are less than the compliance level in each
frequency range.b
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
equipment marked with the following symbol:
a Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for cellular telephones and land mobile
radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast, and TV broadcast cannot be estimated accurately. To
assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should
be performed. If the measured field strength exceeds the RF compliance level above, observe the GE OEC
9900 Elite to verify normal operation in each use location. If abnormal performance is observed, additional
measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the GE OEC 9900 Elite.
b Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths are less than 3 V/m.
NOTE: These are guidelines. Actual conditions may vary.
1-11
1. Safety overview
1.4.9 Separation distances

Recommended distances for portable and mobile RF communications equipment
Table 1-5: Separation distances
Frequency of Transmitter 150 KHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
Equation d=1.2 d=1.2 d=2.3
Rated Power of Transmitter DISTANCE (meters) DISTANCE (meters) DISTANCE (meters)
(watts)
10 mW 0.12 0.12 0.23
100 mW 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a power not listed above, the distance (d) in meters (m) can be estimated
using the equation in the corresponding column, where P is the power rating of the transmitter in
watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE: These are guidelines. Actual conditions may vary.
Limitations management
Using the recommendation distance from Table 1-5: Separation distances on page 1-12, between
150 KHz and 2.5 GHz, some slight disturbances might be recorded at image level; the disturbed
image can’t be confused with a medical pathology, and the equipment keeps its medical utility.
Degraded electromagnetic compatibility

The use of accessories, transducers, and cables other than those specified may result in degraded
electromagnetic compatibility of the equipment and/or system.
System use in the vicinity of other equipments

The GE OEC 9900 Elite should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment; if adjacent
or stacked use is necessary, the GE OEC 9900 Elite should be observed to verify normal operation in
the configuration in which it will be used.
Static magnetic field limits

In order to avoid interference on the GE OEC 9900 Elite system, static field limits from the
surrounding environment are specified. Static field is specified less than <1 Gauss in Examination
room.
1.4.10 Equipment malfunction

If either the hospital or equipment circuit breakers trip, an equipment malfunction may be indicated.
1-12
1. Safety overview
Do not attempt to operate the equipment until a qualified service engineer has checked it.
If any of the equipment controls fail to respond as indicated in this manual, you should:
1. Remove power to the equipment by placing the power switch in the off position and
unplugging the power cord from the AC receptacle.
2. Notify a qualified service engineer.
3. Do not operate the equipment until the service technician advises that it is operating
properly.
1.4.11 External devices

To ensure patient safety, only connect external equipment that has been approved by GE OEC
Medical Systems, Inc. All equipment attached to the external interface connections must meet the
requirements of IEC 60601-1 when operated within the patient environment. When used outside of
the patient environment, each externally connected device must comply with the relevant IEC/ISO
requirements for that device. In any case, the combination of all externally connected equipment
shall not cause the leakage current of any device used within the patient environment to exceed the
limits stated in IEC 60601.
1.4.12 Patient environment

Within the United States
Within the US, the Patient Environment is defined by NFPA 99. In areas in which patients are
normally cared for, the patient environment is the space with surfaces likely to be contacted by the
patient or an attendant who can touch the patient.
This encloses a space within the room 6 ft. beyond the perimeter of the bed (examination table,
dental chair, treatment booth, and so on) in its intended location, and extending vertically 7.5 ft.
above the floor.
Figure 1-1: US patient environment
Outside the US
Outside the US, the patient environment is defined by IEC 60601-1-1. In areas in which patients are
normally cared for, the patient environment is the space with surfaces likely to be contacted by the
patient or an attendant who can touch the patient.
This encloses a space within the room 1.5 m beyond the perimeter of the bed (examination table,
dental chair, treatment booth, and so on) in its intended location, and extending vertically 2.5 m
1-13
1. Safety overview
above the floor.
Figure 1-2: Patient environment outside US
1.5 Patient Privacy and Data Security

If a system is to be left operating while unattended, or operated around unauthorized persons, such
as in an emergency room, enable the following HIPAA security measures to protect patient privacy.
l Set up a system password to prevent unauthorized access of patient data. See Set up security
on page 2-5 for how to set up and 2.1.2 Login - Logout on page 2-1 for how to use this
function.
l Use the Blank key to clear the screens and prevent unauthorized persons from seeing patient
data. See BLANK on page 3-8 for how to use this function.
l Place the system in Standby mode. The operator should remove the key from the keyswitch
and keep the key with them at all times to prevent unauthorized motion and X-rays. See
Standby or X-rays off on page 3-23 for how to use this function.
NOTE: All names appearing in example screens are fictitious. Any resemblance to real people, living
or dead is purely coincidental.
1.6 Compliance information - China

The following information is included for Systems used in China.
1.6.1 After-sales service agency (中国境内售后服务机构 )

Name：GE Medical Systems Trade & Development (Shanghai) Co.,Ltd.
公司名称：通用电气医疗系统贸易发展 ( 上海) 有限公司
Address：B part, Warehouse No.4, #777 BingKe Road, Wai Gaoqiao Free Trade Zone, Shanghai,
China
地址：上海市外高桥保税区冰克路 777 号 4# 仓库 B 部分
Telephone：800-810-8188
电话：800-810-8188
1.6.2 SFDA Certification Information

SFDA certificate No.: SFDA(I)20092302990
1-14
1. Safety overview
SFDA注册证号：国食药监械( 进) 字2009第2302990号
PRS No.: YZB/USA 2001-2009
标准号：YZB/USA 2001-2009
1.6.3 Pollution Control Information

根据SJ/T11364-2006 《电子信息产品污染控制标识要求》特提供如下有关污染控制方面的
信息。
The following product pollution control information is provided according to SJ/T11364-2006
Marking for Control of Pollution caused by Electronic Information Products.
电子信息产品污染控制标志说明
Explanation of Pollution Control Label
该标志表明本产品含有超过中国标准SJ/T11363-2006 《电子信息产品中有毒
有害物质的限量要求》中限量的有毒有害物质。标志中的数字为本产品的环
保使用期，表明本产品在正常使用的条件下，有毒有害物质不会发生外泄或
突变，用户使用本产品不会对环境造成严重污染或对其人身、财产造成严重
损害的期限。单位为年。
为保证所申明的环保使用期限，应按产品手册中所规定的环境条件和方法进行正常使用，并
严格遵守产品维修手册中规定的定期维修和保养要求。
产品中的消耗件和某些零部件可能有其单独的环保使用期限标志，并且其环保使用期限有可
能比整个产品本身的环保使用期限短。
应到期按产品维修程序更换那些消耗件和零部件，以保证所申明的整个产品的环保使用期
限。
本产品在使用寿命结束时不可作为普通生活垃圾处理，应被单独收集妥善处理。
This symbol indicates the product contains hazardous materials in excess of the limits established
by the Chinese standard SJ/T11363-2006 Requirements for Concentration Limits for Certain
Hazardous Substances in Electronic Information Products. The number in the symbol is the
Environment-friendly Use Period (EFUP), which indicates the period during which the toxic or
hazardous substances or elements contained in electronic information products will not leak or
mutate under normal operating conditions so that the use of such electronic information products
will not result in any severe environmental pollution, any bodily injury or damage to any assets. The
unit of the period is “Year.”
In order to maintain the declared EFUP, the product shall be operated normally according to the
instructions and environmental conditions as defined in the product manual, and periodic
maintenance schedules specified in Product Maintenance Procedures shall be followed strictly.
Consumables or certain parts may have their own label with an EFUP value less than the product.
Periodic replacement of those consumables or parts to maintain the declared EFUP shall be done in
accordance with the Product Maintenance Procedures.
This product must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste, and must be collected
separately and handled properly after decommissioning.
1-15
1. Safety overview
GE OEC 9900 Elite Workstation / GE OEC 9900 Elite C-Arm

产品中有毒有害物质或元素的名称及含量
Table of hazardous substances’ name and concentration.
部件名称有毒有害物质或元素
(Component (Hazardous substances’ name)
Name)
铅汞镉六价铬多溴联苯多溴二苯醚
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (CrP6+) (PBB) (PBDE)
C形臂
X X X X X X
(Mainframe)
工作站
X X X X X X
(Workstation)
电池
X X X X X X
(Battery)
O: 表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限量
要求以下
X: 表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定
的限量要求
(企业可在此处，根据实际情况对上表中打“×”的技术原因进行进一步说明。)
l 此表所列数据为发布时所能获得的最佳信息
l 为保证所申明的环保使用期限，应按产品手册中所规定的环境条件进行使用
l 产品的消耗件和零件可能有其单独的环保使用期限标签，并且其环保使用期限有可能
比产品本身的环保使用期限短。应定期按产品维修手册更换那些消耗件和零件，以保
证所申明的整个产品的环保使用期限
O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials
for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous
materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
l Data listed in the table represents best information available at the time of publication
l Product to be operated under Environmental Conditions as defined in the Product Manual to maintain
the declared EFUP
1-16
2. System setup and positioning

This chapter covers the basic mechanical and software setup for the GE OEC 9900 Elite System,
including both the Workstation and the C-Arm, as well as special considerations for the Mechanical
MD (Motor-Driven) C-Arm.
l Workstation overview
l Workstation setup
l C-Arm overview and setup
l Motorized C-Arm
l System startup, shutdown, and restart
2.1 Workstation overview

This section describes the Workstation's parts and how to position and move the Workstation.
2.1.1 First time Workstation setup

The first time the Workstation is set up or after an extended time in storage, the batteries in the UPS
need several hours to charge before the UPS can be completely effective in case of an unexpected
power loss.
Charging of the UPS batteries begins automatically when the Workstation is plugged in and does
not affect operation of the Workstation.
If the Workstation is connected to a compatible C-Arm, the C-Arm could require several hours to
charge its batteries after the system is plugged in initially or after an extended period in storage.
NOTE: For more information on C-Arm charge times and requirements, refer to the information on
powering on and battery charging in 2.5.1 Turn the system on on page 2-34 .
2.1.2 Login - Logout

The Workstation can be configured to require users to log in with a password before they can use
any Workstation functions. See Set up security on page 2-5 for information on configuring the
Workstation for password protection.
1. If the Workstation is configured for password protection, a Login screen similar to the
following displays when the system starts up or when the system is accessed after the screen
saver has displayed.
2-1
Figure 2-1: Login screen

2. Enter the password assigned to the Workstation and touch OK. The Workstation completes
start up or closes the screen saver and is ready for use.
NOTE: Until the correct password is entered and accepted by the Workstation, X-rays and all
switches and remotes are disabled.
When you have finished using the Workstation, press the Logout key, , or simply shut down the
Workstation. When you press the Logout key a confirmation dialog box displays. Touch OK to log
out or Cancel to return to work on the Workstation.
NOTE: If the Workstation is not configured to use a password, the Logout key is disabled.
2.1.3 Set up software features

This section explains how to use the Setup function to tailor the setup of Workstation operation to
your specific requirements. Use the Setup function for configuring how decimals display, enabling
auto features, setting defaults, time and date, and alarm tones, and so on.
Some features are not available on all systems.
Setup screen
To access Set up features, press the Setup key, , on the Workstation keyboard.
2-2
Figure 2-2: Setup Screen

Use the buttons on this screen to set up the Workstation options. Touch the button for the function
(s) you want to configure. Touch OK on the individual setup screens to return to the Setup screen.
Touch Exit on the Setup screen to close Setup and return to your previous screen.
Set up the Workstation

Use the Setup Workstation screen to:
l Enter the hospital name.
l Select dose unit display (R or mGy).
l Select decimal display (US or International).
l Select default right footswitch behavior (HLF or Digital Spot).
l Enable/disable automatic swap feature.
l Enable/disable automatic save feature.
l Enable/disable auto Cine playback.
l Toggle mini Cine playback.
l Set the screensaver delay time.
Touch Workstation… to display the Setup Workstation screen.
2-3
Figure 2-3: Setup Workstation
NOTE: The Auto Cine Playback option in the Customize Workstation menu displays only on
systems equipped with a Cine disk.
Set up time and date

Use the Setup Time / Date screen to enter the current date and time, and to specify the format of
the date display.
1. Touch Time/Date... on the Setup screen. A screen similar to the following displays
Figure 2-4: Setup Time/Date Screen

2. Enter the current time in hours, minutes and seconds, using the keyboard, and then touch the
Set.
3. Enter the current date in numeric characters for month, day, and year and then touch Set.
4. Select either MM/DD/YYYY or DD:MM:YYYY to choose a format for the date display.
NOTE: System default is MM/DD/YYYY.
2-4
Set up DICOM
Use the Setup DICOM screen to set up DICOM features such as Query/Retrieve, and DICOM servers.
See 9.1.5 DICOM configuration on page 9-5 for information on setting up and using DICOM on the
Workstation.
Touch DICOM… on the Setup screen to display the Setup DICOM screen.
Default Imaging Profile screen

Use the Default Imaging Profile screen to select the imaging profile that will be active when the
Workstation is started and when a new exam is started. For more information on Imaging Profiles,
see 5.4 Anatomical profile on page 5-8.
Figure 2-5: Default Imaging Profile Screen

Touch Default Profile… on the Setup screen to display the Default Imaging Profile screen.
Service screen
The Service screen is used by trained GE OEC technicians only. Do not touch Service... on the Setup
screen.
Service Only Anatomical Profile

CAUTION If the Service Only Anatomical Profile icon appears in your Anatomical Profiles
screen, do not use it for imaging. The Service Only profile is for use by authorized
service personnel and does not produce images useful for diagnosis or patient
care. Call your service representative to have the Service Only profile disabled.
Set up security
Use the Setup Security screen to set up the Workstation for HIPAA compliance. Use the Setup
Security screen to require users to log in to the Workstation using a password, change the
password, and to delete all patient information from the Workstation.
Touch Security… on the Setup screen. A screen similar to the following displays.
2-5
Figure 2-6: Setup Security Screen
Set up password
An X in the check box next to Requires Users to Login causes a login screen to appear when the
Workstation is started. The user must enter a password before proceeding to use the Workstation.
Use Password to set or change the password for the Workstation.
1. Touch Password on the Setup Security screen. A screen similar to the following displays.
Figure 2-7: Setup Password Screen

2. If you are changing an existing password, enter the previous password in the Old Password
box. If you are setting up the password for the first time, enter the default password,
GEOECWS, in the Old Password box.
3. Enter the new password in the New Password box.
4. Retype the new password in the Retype Password box.
5. Touch OK to return to the Setup Security screen.
2-6
NOTE: You must retype the password exactly or an error message displays and you will be
prompted to retype the password again.
Delete All
CAUTION The Delete All function deletes all patient information from the Workstation. Images
are not deleted, but all patient information related to images is deleted. You must
restart the system after a Delete All.
1. Touch Delete All on the Setup Security screen to delete all patient information on the
Workstation.
2. A confirmation dialog box displays. Touch OK to delete all patient information.
3. A progress dialog box displays as all patient information is deleted from the Workstation.
When the delete is completed, a message stating that X-rays have been disabled displays.
4. Touch OK to clear the message and then restart the system by pressing the power switch to
turn off the system. Wait 10 seconds after the system shuts down and then turn the system
back on with the power switch. When the system reboots, all patient information on the
system is gone.
Configure network
Use the Network Config screen to set up the parameters necessary for the Workstation to connect
to an Ethernet network such as DICOM. See 9.1.5 DICOM configuration on page 9-5 for information
on setting up the Workstation for use on a network.
Touch Network Config… on the Setup screen to display the Network Configuration screen.
Set up mouse, touchpad, audio

Use the Mouse/Touchpad/Audio screen to configure the mouse functions, touchpad operation, and
audio alerts. See 3.1.4 Mouse/Touchpad/Audio configuration on page 3-9 for information on setting
up the touchpad and audio components of the Workstation.
Touch Touchpad/Audio… on the Setup screen to display the Touchpad, Audio Configuration
screen.
Set up patient information

Use the Setup Patient Information screen to define which data entry boxes are active on the
Patient Information screen and what information displays on images.
When an X displays in the box next to a patient information category, it indicates that the box is
active on the Patient Information screen. By default, all boxes are active. Data can be entered only
in active boxes. Patient information entered in active boxes displays on left monitor images.
Touch Patient Information... on the Setup screen. A screen similar to the following displays.
2-7
Figure 2-8: Setup Patient Information Screen

To make a data-entry box inactive, clear the check box next to it. The X is removed, and the box is
inactivated.
The accession number and comment line are user-selectable lines that can be disabled using the
Setup Patient Information screen. Once disabled, these lines do not display on the left monitor or
with saved images. Set the Setup Patient Information screen options before beginning an exam.
Accession numbers
You may select whether the Patient ID or the Accession Number displays on the Saved Exams and
Scheduled Exams screens.
Use the Setup Patient Information screen to select either Patient ID or Accession number. This is the
information that displays in the exam lists for viewing and selecting exams.
Version screen
The Version screen displays information about the Workstation and Workstation software. This
information could be requested should you call Customer Service.
Touch Version… on the Setup screen to display a Versions screen similar to the following.
Figure 2-9: Versions screen
2-8
C-Arm screen
Use the C-Arm screen to:
l Adjust the generator alarm tone.
l Set the default boot-up and new patient position for:
Camera rotation
Collimator rotation
Collimator iris
Collimator leaves
Magnification (field size)
Touch C-Arm... on the Setup screen to display the C-Arm screen.
Figure 2-10: C-Arm Screen

Adjust alarm tone
Touch Test to play the generator alarm. Use Pitch Up and Pitch Down to adjust the pitch of the
alarm.
Set defaults
To set the default position for camera rotation, collimator rotation, collimator iris and leaf position
and magnification:
l Touch Home to return the camera and collimator to the home position, open the collimator
iris and/or leaves to a fully open position, and return magnification to normal.
l Touch Retain Last to keep the current settings for the next patient exam or at start-up.
2-9
2.2 Workstation setup

CAUTION The GE OEC Workstation should only be used in conjunction with a compatible and
appropriately configured GE OEC C-Arm or as a stand-alone system. Damage may
occur if you connect the Workstation to an incompatible C-Arm or other equipment.
This Workstation is compatible only with series 9900 products. If the Workstation is
connected to an incompatible C-Arm or other equipment, a message displays and
Workstation will not operate.
If the Workstation is used as an independent Workstation to review or navigate on previously

captured images, plug it into an active, compatible AC receptacle and turn the Workstation on.
If the Workstation is to be used with a compatible C-Arm, follow the instructions in System startup
and shutdown section to connect the Interconnect Cable from the Workstation to the C-Arm. Then
turn the entire system on and check it for proper operation.
The following illustration and list show the location of Workstation components you will use during
the setup and positioning of a mobile system.
1- Monitor handle (one each side)

2- Power switch (green illuminated button)
3- Workstation handle and cable hanger
(one each side)
4- Power cord
5- Brake pedal
6- Interconnect cable
7- DVD R/RW
8- Monitor latch
Figure 2-11: Workstation components.

The Workstation back panel has a green indicator light that illuminates when the Workstation
receives AC line power from an active electrical outlet.
Circuit breakers are located below the green indicator light and on the right side of the back panel.
See 2.5.1 Turn the system on on page 2-34 for more details on each circuit breaker.
2-10
1- UPS off switch

2- Green indicator light (illuminated button)
3- Circuit breakers
Figure 2-12: Workstation back panel.
Brake pedal
The Workstation brake pedal has three positions that control wheel movement. The pedal is located
on the left side of the Workstation. The pedal positions are:
1. The wheels close to the pedal roll in a straight line, and the wheels opposite pivot freely. Place
the brake pedal in this position to move the Workstation long distances.
2. All wheels pivot freely. Place the brake pedal in this position to easily maneuver the
Workstation during final positioning.
3. None of the wheels can roll or pivot.
Figure 2-13: The Workstation brake pedal
2.2.1 Monitors
The GE OEC 9900 Elite monitors can be configured to compensate for ambient room light adjusting
for maximum visibility. Contact service to enable ambient light compensation.
The Workstation monitors can be positioned for optimal viewing.
2-11
CAUTION Only use the monitor handles to position the monitors. Pulling on other parts of the
monitor assembly to position the monitors could damage the monitor assembly.
CAUTION Do not allow the bottom edge of the monitor assembly to strike the keyboard.
Permanent damage to the keyboard may result if the monitor assembly is dragged
across it or strikes it.
CAUTION Do not hang on, lean on, or load the monitor arm. Doing so may cause a tip
hazard.
CAUTION Do not position the monitors in a high traffic area.
CAUTION Do not drape cables over the monitors or monitor arm. Pulling a cable draped over
the monitor assembly could cause the monitors to move unexpectedly.
CAUTION Do not place sterile drapes over the monitors. Sterile drapes can cause the touch
screen to function erratically.
CAUTION Make sure hands and fingers are clear when latching the monitor to avoid
pinching.
1- Monitor handles
2- Monitor latch
Figure 2-14: Monitors from front, in latched position

To position the monitors:
1. Press down on the monitor latch to release the monitors.
2. Using the monitor handles on each side of the monitors, move the monitors to the desired
location.
When you have finished using the Workstation:
2-12
1. Using the monitor handles on each side of the monitors, move the monitors to face front,
pressing down into the monitor latch.
2. Press the latching bar into the monitor latch until it locks in place.
NOTE: The spring arm lock on the monitor arm, shown in Figure 2-15 and Figure 2-16, can be used
to lock the monitors into position. This is not part of normal operation and is not necessary to
maintain a stable monitor position.
Figure 2-15: Spring arm lock location on the monitor arm, in normal, unlocked position
Figure 2-16: Spring arm lock in locked (left) and unlocked (right) positions
2.2.2 Workstation external connections

These warnings apply to the connectors on the rear of the Workstation as well as any connectors
not in use on other medical devices, such as printers, that are connected to the Workstation.
WARNING: Do not touch connectors and patient simultaneously. Electric shock could occur.
2-13
WARNING: Connector covers must be in place when connectors are not in use to avoid
inadvertent contact with the connectors.
WARNING: Connect only medical devices that comply with UL/IEC 60601 Standards.
Contact GE Healthcare for a list of compliant devices.
Connecting a non-compliant device could cause injury to the operator, the
patient, or the equipment.
Figure 2-17: Workstation external connections

1 - Left Monitor Standard Video NTSC / EIA 170 or CCIR monochrome composite video out-
put (standard resolution).
2 - Left Monitor Fast Scan high resolution (1kx1k) monochrome composite video.
3 - Right Monitor Fast Scan high resolution (1kx1k) monochrome composite video.
4 - DVI-OUT/Right monitor video connector (DVI-I) that outputs right monitor video signal in
analog format (GE OEC 980X980).
5 - Room Control Connector (Input/Output - Switch/relay control for Injector, Room, Door -
see Figure 13-12: Input/Output relay connection on Workstation on page 13-16).
6 - DICOM /Ethernet network connector (RJ45).
7 - Field Service Port
Connect a device to a Workstation connector

WARNING: Connect only shielded cables or cables supplied by GE OEC Medical Systems.
When connecting accessories verify normal operation in the configuration the
accessory will be used.
1. Use a screwdriver to remove the cover from the desired connector. Keep the connector cover
for replacement when the device is disconnected from the system.
2. Connect the device to the connector.
2-14
3. When the device is disconnected from the system, replace the cover over the connector and
use a screw driver to tighten it into place. If a cover is missing, call service to obtain a
replacement.
NOTE: The Workstation can provide a signal to an approved injector through the Room Control
connector. This signal is sent when the injection icon displays during a procedure. A custom
cable must be constructed or obtained from an approved injector manufacturer or GE OEC
Medical Systems.
2.2.3 View External Video

The External Video provides a means of viewing an external video source (for example, an
Endoscope) on the right color monitor. Multiple connectors are provided in a compartment on the
rear bottom-left of the color LCD monitor. Connectors available are:
l DVI-D
l SDI
l S-Video
l VGA
l BNC
To connect and view an external video source follow these steps.
1. Remove the two knurled screws that secure the video connector panel on the rear of the
Workstation’s color LCD monitor.
Figure 2-18: Video panel retaining screws

2. Attach the video source cable to the desired connector in the video compartment.
CAUTION Position external video cables to avoid trip, catch, and snag hazards. The monitor arm
and assembly could move unexpectedly if external video cables are pulled.
2-15
1- Digital Video Interface (DVI-D)

2- Serial Digital Interface (SDI)
3- S-Video
4- Digital Video Interface (DVI-I) OEC Video
5- VGA – 15-pin D-sub
6- BNC
Figure 2-19: LCD monitor video connectors
NOTE: The DVI-I video connector (Item 4) provides video from the Workstation and should not be dis-
connected.
3. Press the Additional Applications key on the Workstation keyboard.

4. Start playing the external video source. The system must sense the presence of the external
video in order to switch.
5. Touch External Video on the touchscreen. The external video will be displayed on the right
monitor.
6. Press any function key on the Workstation keyboard to stop viewing external video.
CAUTION Clean the external connector area with dry cloths only. Do not use liquid cleaners on
this area.
2.2.4 Move the Workstation

CAUTION Familiarize yourself with the location and mechanical operation of all controls prior
to moving the system.
1. Verify that the Workstation is completely shut down.

2. Unplug the Workstation power cord. Disconnect the interconnect cable from the C-Arm. Coil
and secure the cables around the Workstation handles.
3. Disconnect any other external connections, DICOM, and so on.
4. Using the monitor handles, face the monitors to the front and lock them into the monitor
latch (see Figure 2-14: Monitors from front, in latched position on page 2-12). Make sure hands
and fingers are clear when latching the monitor to avoid pinching.
5. Unlock the wheelbrakes on the Workstation.
6. Guide the Workstation to its destination using the handles, as shown in Figure 2-20 .
7. When you reach your destination, apply the wheel brakes on the Workstation (see Figure 2-
13: The Workstation brake pedal on page 2-11).
2-16
CAUTION Two people should maintain control of the Workstation when moving up or down
an incline. Do not move the Workstation over inclines greater than 10°. Do not
move the Workstation up or down stairs or steps. Do not lock the Workstation in
place on an incline greater than 5°.
Figure 2-20: Moving the Workstation.
2.3 C-Arm overview and setup

This section describes the C-Arm's parts and how to move the C-Arm.
2.3.1 C-Arm identification

There are three C-Arm configurations available. The standard C-Arm has a 23 cm (9 inch) image
intensifier attached. A slightly larger C-Arm is used to support a 31 cm (12 inch) image intensifier and
the Super C-Arm is visibly larger than standard C-Arms.
1- Standard C-Arm with 23 cm

(9 inch) Image Intensifier
2- C-Arm with 31 cm
3- Super C-Arm with 23 cm
Figure 2-21: C-Arms
2-17
2.3.2 C-Arm components

Standard C-Arms
Component identification is virtually identical for C-Arms with 23 cm (9 inch) and 31 cm (12 inch)
image intensifiers. Therefore only the standard C-Arm with a 23 cm (9 inch) image intensifier is
illustrated. See 13.10 Dimensions on page 13-20 for dimensional differences.
The items listed below identify the location of components used during setup and positioning and
correspond to the circled items in the following figure.
1- Horizontal cross-arm handle
2- Horizontal cross-arm brake
handle
3- Vertical column lift switches
4- Control panel display
5- Wig-wag brake handle
6- L-Arm handle (top)
7- L-Arm rotation brake
8- Interface panel (left side cover)
9- Image intensifier handle
10 - C-Arm orbital rotation brake
11 - Flip-flop brake
12 - L-Arm handle (bottom)
13 - Rear wheel brake pedal
14 - High voltage (HV) cable
15 - Interconnect cable connector
16 - Steering handle (right side only)
Figure 2-22: Component identification for C-Arms
Super C-Arms
The Super C-Arm does not have an L-Arm. The items listed below identify only the components on a
Super C-Arm that differ from 23 or 31 cm (9 or 12 inch) C-Arms.
2-18
1- Radial rotation brake

2- Orbital rotation brake
Figure 2-23: Super C-Arm component identification
2.3.3 Positioning
Positioning controls are identical for systems with standard 23 cm (9 inch) and optional 31 cm
(12 inch) image intensifiers. The Super C-Arm does not have an L-Arm and radial rotation and orbital
rotation operate differently than on the 23 or 31 cm (9 or 12 inch) C-Arm configurations.
Radial rotation on a 23 cm (9 inch) or 31 cm (12 inch) system are accomplished by rotating the L-
Arm. Radial rotation on the Super C-Arm is accomplished by rotating the C-Arm about the horizontal
cross-arm. The Super C-Arm's orbital rotation and radial rotation controls (brakes) are therefore in
different locations than C-Arms with 23 or 31 cm (9 or 12 inch) image intensifiers.
See 13.10 Dimensions on page 13-20 for differences in dimensions and degrees of rotation among
23 cm (9 inch), 31 cm (12 inch), and Super C-Arm configurations.
C-Arm orbital rotation

The 23 or 31 cm (9 or 12 inch) C-Arm configuration provides 115° of orbital rotation (90° underscan
and 25° overscan). The back of the C-Arm is marked with a scale to aid in positioning.
2-19
Figure 2-24: C-Arm orbital rotation

C-Arm orbital rotation brake
CAUTION Pinch points exist between the C-Arm support assembly and the C-Arm. Do not place
fingers or allow clothing in between these assemblies when positioning the C-Arm.
To lock or unlock the orbital rotation brake, turn either of the brake handles located on
both sides of the C-Arm support assembly. A “lock” icon indicates the locked position.
CAUTION Grasp one of the C-Arm positioning handles to prevent uncontrolled C-Arm movement
whenever you release the brake.
Figure 2-25: Orbital rotation brake in the unlocked position
2-20
Super C-Arm orbital rotation

The Super C-Arm can be rotated a total of 148° (55° overscan and 93° underscan).
Figure 2-26: Super C-Arm Orbital Rotation

Super C-Arm orbital rotation brake
To lock or unlock the orbital rotation brake, turn either of the brake handles located on both sides of
the C-Arm support assembly. A “lock” icon indicates the locked position.
CAUTION Pinch points exist between the C-Arm support assembly and the C-Arm. Do not place
fingers or allow clothing in between these assemblies when positioning the C-Arm.
CAUTION Grasp one of the C-Arm positioning handles to prevent uncontrolled C-Arm movement
whenever you release the brake.
NOTE: When the orbital rotation brake is not applied, a nonadjustable constant friction bearing in
the C-Arm support minimizes C-Arm movement.
Figure 2-27: Super C-Arm orbital rotation brake in unlocked position
2-21
Flip-Flop rotation
This feature provides increased versatility in positioning the X-ray tube and image intensifier by
allowing them to reverse their positions laterally. The C-Arm pivots from 0 -180° in one direction and
from 0 - 90° in the opposite direction.
To Flip-Flop the C-Arm:
1. Unlock the Flip-Flop rotation brake and position the C-Arm in the desired position by rotating
the C-Arm around the pivot point.
2. When the C-Arm is in position, lock the brake.
Figure 2-28: Flip-flop (lateral) rotation

Flip-Flop rotation brake
The brake's locked and unlocked positions are indicated by lock and unlock icons. Turn the brake
handle to the unlock position to Flip-Flop the C-Arm.
CAUTION Guide the C-Arm carefully with both hands until the C-Arm is in the position you want
and then lock the brake.
Figure 2-29: Flip-Flop rotation brake
L-Arm rotation
The L-Arm on 23 or 31 cm (9 or 12 inch) C-Arm configurations rotates 180° in either direction (for a
total of 360°). An L-Arm rotation indicator, located on the back of the L-Arm, indicates the degree of
L-Arm rotation.
2-22
Figure 2-30: L-Arm rotation

L-Arm rotation brake
To position the L-Arm:
1. Release the L-Arm brake by moving the brake handle into the position identified by the unlock
icon.
2. Position the L-Arm.
3. Lock the L-Arm brake by placing the brake handle in the position identified by the lock icon.
Figure 2-31: L-Arm brake
2-23
Super C-Arm radial rotation

The Super C-Arm can be rotated radially a total of 380° on the C-Arm support axis.
Figure 2-32: Super C-Arm radial rotation

Super C-Arm radial rotation brake
CAUTION Guide the C-Arm carefully with both hands until the C-Arm is in the position you want
and then lock the brake.
1. Unlock the radial rotation brake.

2. Place the C-Arm in the desired position.
3. Lock the radial rotation brake.
Figure 2-33: Super C-Arm radial rotation brake
Vertical column operation

WARNING: When positioning the vertical column, observe moving assemblies to prevent
patient contact and ensure the safety of anyone near the C-Arm.
CAUTION When accessories (such as film cassettes) are attached to the C-Arm, releasing the
orbital or lateral rotational brake could cause the C-Arm to move.
2-24
Use the vertical column to raise or lower the C-Arm to the desired height. The vertical column
switches are found on the top of the C-Arm control panel housing. You can raise the C-Arm a
maximum of 46 cm (18 inches). Use the scale located on the vertical column to help position the C-
Arm at the appropriate height.
CAUTION A possible pinch point exists between the C-Arm and the tip of the front cover. Do
not place your foot on the tip of the front cover while operating the vertical column
or while positioning the C-Arm.
Figure 2-34: Elevating or lowering the vertical column
Vertical column switches

The vertical column motor is actuated by pressing the vertical column extension or retraction
switches located on top of the control panel housing.
Figure 2-35: Motorized vertical column switches

After the C-Arm is switched on, one of the vertical column switches must be pressed to initialize the
lift column. This initialization takes approximately five seconds, after which lift motion is enabled. If
the column does not move after the system is turned on, wait approximately 5 seconds after
releasing the key and then press the key again. This wait should give the lift motor time to initialize.
A 0.4 second delay is built into the up and down switch operations. If the vertical column switches
are pressed rapidly, the lift column may not move. If the column does not move after a switch press,
release the switch, wait a second, and then press the switch again to resume movement.
2-25
Horizontal cross-arm
The horizontal cross-arm extends a maximum of 20 cm (8 inches).
Figure 2-36: Positioning the horizontal cross-arm

Horizontal cross-arm brake
To position the cross-arm:
1. Release the cross-arm brake by placing the brake handle in the position identified by the
unlock icon.
2. Push or pull the cross-arm to the desired position. Use the centimeter scale located on the
cross-arm as an aid in positioning.
3. Lock the cross-arm brake by placing the brake handle in the position identified by the lock
icon.
NOTE: The cross-arm brake may be used to apply light tension, and allow some movement of the
cross-arm, while restricting free-drift.
Figure 2-37: The horizontal cross-arm brake
Wig-Wag
The mechanical assemblies attached to the horizontal cross-arm can "Wig-Wag," or move from
side-to-side. The total distance traveled from side-to-side depends on whether the horizontal cross-
arm is extended or retracted. Total distances traveled are listed in the following table for each
system:
2-26
Item Position 23 cm (9 inch) 31 cm (12 inch) Super C

1 extended 49.6 cm (19.5 inch) 52 cm (20.5 inch) 49.8 cm (19.6 inch)
2 retracted 42.4 cm (16.7 inch) 45 cm (17.7 inch) 42.7 cm (16.8 inch)
Figure 2-38: Wig-Wag motion for a 23 cm (9 inch) system

Wig-Wag brake
1. Release the Wig-Wag brake by placing the brake handle in the position indicated by the
unlock icon.
2. Move the horizontal cross-arm, C-Arm and L-Arm into position.
3. Lock the Wig-Wag brake by placing the brake handle in the position indicated by the lock
icon.
Figure 2-39: The Wig-Wag brake handle
C-Arm wheel brakes

The C-Arm brake pedals are located above the rear wheels on both sides of the C-Arm. The pedals
operate much like rocker switches.
The pedal positions are:

1 - Locks the rear wheel brakes.
2 - Unlocks the rear wheel brakes allowing the
wheels to rotate freely.
3 - Locks the rear wheel brakes.
Figure 2-40: C-Arm brake pedal positions
2-27
2.3.4 C-Arm steering handle

Use the right steering handle to turn the rear wheels from 0° to 90° to the right or left. Use this
feature to position the C-Arm during clinical applications or to negotiate sharp turns during
transport. The rear wheels turn at approximately the same angle as the right steering handle.
Figure 2-41: Right Steering Handle
CAUTION To avoid losing control of the C-Arm, always reduce transport speed before moving the
steering handle out of the 0° position.
CAUTION If the Wig-Wag brake is set to the extreme right, use caution not to injure your knuckles
when turning the steering handle 90° to the left.
NOTE: The rear wheels can be positioned in this manner whether the brakes are applied or not.
C-Arm steering handle operation is common to 23 cm (9 inch), 31 cm (12 inch) and Super
C-Arm systems.
2.3.5 Skin spacer

Attaching the skin spacer
Attach the skin spacer by pushing it onto the X-ray tube cover.
Removing the skin spacer

The skin spacer should only be removed on the instructions of a physician. The skin spacer should be
reattached to the collimator assembly immediately following the procedure.
2.3.6 Move the C-Arm

Familiarize yourself with the location and mechanical operation of all controls prior to moving the
C-Arm.
CAUTION Use the handles provided on the C-Arm to position mechanical assemblies. The
handles are provided for your safety.
1. Return all moving assemblies to their most compact positions. Lower the vertical column and
retract the cross-arm. On 23 or 31 cm (9 or 12 inch) systems orient the L-Arm vertically and
2-28
down.
2. Lock all movable mechanical assembly brakes: the C-Arm orbital rotation brake, the Flip- Flop
rotation brake, the Wig-Wag brake, the L-Arm brake and the horizontal cross-arm brake.
3. Remove all power from the Workstation.
4. Disconnect the interconnect cable from the C-Arm and coil and secure the cable around the
Workstation's handle/hangers.
5. Store the footswitch on the shelf located between the two C-Arm steering handles and store
the handswitch in the holster located on the C-Arm's left front cover.
6. Place the C-Arm's right steering handle in the 0° position and unlock the wheel brakes.
7. Guide the C-Arm by pushing with the steering handles, or by pulling with the image intensifier
positioning handles.
CAUTION Do not move the C-Arm over inclines greater than 10°. Do not move the C-Arm up or
down stairs or steps. Do not lock the C-Arm in place on an incline greater than 5°.
8. When you reach your destination place the C-Arm’s wheel brakes in the locked position.
Figure 2-42: Moving the C-Arm (standard 9 inch system shown).
2.3.7 Draping
If you are performing a procedure where draping is necessary, cover the C-Arm using a draping
system. A draping system can be purchased from GE OEC Medical Systems. To order any
consumables, see 13.11 Communication Center contact information on page 13-26 for more
information.
NOTE: Use of a footswitch cover is recommended during all medical procedures.
Draping the X-ray tube housing will inhibit air flow resulting in cooling inefficiencies. This may result
in the housing reaching its rated heat capacity sooner. You will receive messages indicating the
2-29
temperature of the housing. When the housing reaches its maximum rated heat capacity, X-rays
will be discontinued until the housing has cooled. See 12.2 Messages on page 12-3 for more
information.
Draping the X-ray tube cooling kit option

When the X-ray tube cooling kit is installed, a fan and vents are added to increase air flow to the
X-ray tube housing. Covering the vents in the high voltage cable cover with drapes will prevent the
fan from cooling the X-ray tube housing as designed. Drape the X-ray tube housing and cover the
vents only when exposure to fluids is unavoidable and the extended use of continuous X-rays is not
required.
2.4 Motorized C-Arm

This section describes the GE OEC 9900 EliteMD Motorized C-Arm's parts and the basic setup and
orientation of the motorized C-Arm.
NOTE: The GE OEC Motorized C-Arm is a specialized Super C. The 9 inch image intensifier version of
the C-Arm does not have an L-Arm.
The GE OEC 9900 EliteMD has a motorized orbital and rotational motion. The motorized C-Arm has a
range of motion similar to other C-Arms and includes a remote user interface (RUI) for initiating and
controlling motorized C-Arm movement. See 3.3.6 Motorized C-Arm movement and operation on
page 3-31 for complete range-of-motion details.
1- Contact Detection Assembly

2- Orbital Clutch
3- RUI connector
4- RUI
Figure 2-43: C-Arm and Remote User Interface (RUI)
2-30
2.4.1 Motorized C-Arm setup

NOTE: A GE OEC 9900 EliteMD C-Arm will not operate with a non-motorized GE OEC 9900 Elite
Workstation.
Before you begin using the system you must connect the RUI to the C-Arm, and then set the RUI on
the Workstation RUI rail or attach it to the patient table. You must then orient the system to the
patient so the motorized movement operates properly.
Connect the Remote User Interface

The RUI controls motorized motion. Before you begin using the system you must plug the RUI cable
into the RUI port on the key switch panel as shown.
Figure 2-44: Plugging in the RUI

After you plug the RUI cable into the RUI port on the C-Arm, place the RUI near the patient table. It is
best to attach the RUI to the patient’s surgical table rail if possible. First make sure the locking
handle on the bottom of the RUI mounting bracket is unlocked. Then slide the RUI onto the rail and
use the locking handle to secure the RUI into place.
Figure 2-45: Attaching the RUI to a Surgical Table
CAUTION Make sure you mount the RUI in a spot where it will not interfere with the movement
of the C-Arm as you work.
2-31
Orientation
Before you begin using the system with a patient you must orient the C-Arm and RUI to the patient
so that the motion controls on the RUI move the C-Arm as you expect.
WARNING: Failure to orient the C-Arm and RUI prior to use could result in injury to the
patient and/or operator and/or damage to the system.
The orientation buttons are located to the right of the RUI joystick as shown next.
Figure 2-46: Orientation Buttons are to the Right of the Joystick

Use the following steps to orient the C-Arm.
1. Imagine the patient lying face up on the table as shown in the following diagram. Position the
C-Arm gantry to the left of the patient with the image intensifier over the patient’s chest.
1- C-Arm
2- Workstation
3- Table
4- RUI and table controls (varies)
5- Footswitch (varies)
Figure 2-47: Typical Clinical Arrangement
2. Press the C-Arm orientation button (the top button) until the LED that matches the position of
the C-Arm with respect to the patient lights. In this case, this will be the top LED.
2-32
3. Press the RUI orientation button (the bottom button) until the LED that matches the position
of the RUI with respect to the patient lights. In this case, this will be the bottom LED.
4. Test the orientation by moving the joystick.
l Start with the image intensifier at the 0,0 position (vertical with no orbital or rotational
deflection). Squeeze the joystick and push it away from you. This should cause the C-Arm
to orbit away from you, and the angular display on the left monitor to read LAO with the
angular values increasing. This means the image intensifier is moving to the patient’s left.
Stop the movement after the C-Arm orbits a few degrees.
l Return the image intensifier to the 0,0 position. Squeeze the joystick and pull it toward you.
This should cause the C-Arm to orbit toward you, and the angular display on the left
monitor to read RAO with the angular values increasing. This means the image intensifier is
moving toward the patient’s right. Stop the movement after the C-Arm orbits a few
degrees.
l Return the image intensifier to the 0,0 position. Squeeze the joystick and push it to your
left. This should cause the C-Arm to rotate to your left, and the angular display on the left
monitor to read CRA with the angular values increasing. This means the image intensifier is
moving toward the patient’s head. Stop the motion after the C-Arm rotates a few degrees.
l Return the image intensifier to the 0,0 position. Squeeze the joystick and push it to your
right. This should cause the C-Arm to rotate to your right, and the angular display on the
left monitor to read CAU with the angular values increasing. This means the image
intensifier is moving toward the patient’s feet. After the C-Arm rotates a few degrees, return
the image intensifier to the 0,0 position.
1- Vertical showing 0° rotational

deflection
2- Vertical showing 0° orbital
deflection
Figure 2-48: Motorized C-Arm with 12 inch image intensifier at the 0,0 position
2.5 System startup, shutdown, and restart

If you are starting the system after a period of long-term storage it may be necessary to allow the
system to warm up or recharge the batteries before it can be used. The system clock will sense how
long the system has been in storage and display a message that describes the action required. See
2-33
12.2 Messages on page 12-3 for more information.
CAUTION At initial setup or when removing from storage, stabilize the System for 24 hours at
ambient temperature and humidity before applying power. Failure to observe this
caution will result in damage to equipment.
CAUTION The C-Arm should only be used in conjunction with a compatible and appropriately
configured GE OEC 9900 Elite Workstation. The GE OEC 9900 Elite C-Arm is not
compatible with Workstations sold as part of a 9800 system. Damage may result to
the system if incompatible components are connected.
CAUTION Data loss can occur if the system startup sequence is interrupted. Do not press the
power switch or unplug the Workstation until system startup is complete. System
startup is complete when the Login screen or the Patient Information screen displays
on the right monitor. Wait for the system startup sequence to complete before
pressing the power switch to shutdown the system. UPS protection is not active until
the system has completed the startup sequence.
Because the UPS is not active until the system startup sequence is completed, a power loss (pressing
the power switch, unplugging the system, and so on) during the startup sequence causes the
system to record that an improper shutdown has occurred. An improper shutdown results in a file
system check the next time the Workstation is started. See File system check on page 2-38 for more
information.
2.5.1 Turn the system on

The C-Arm must be connected to the Workstation and electrical power before it can be operated.
When a compatible C-Arm is connected to the GE OEC 9900 Elite Workstation, it draws its power
through the interconnect cable from the Workstation.
The C-Arm stores power in a local battery system. When the batteries are charging the charging
indicator on the C-Arm interface panel illuminates. The C-Arm batteries are charged whenever the C-
Arm is connected to the Workstation and the Workstation is plugged into a wall socket. The
Workstation does not have to be turned on for the C-Arm to begin charging the batteries.
If the system fails to start normally

The Workstation rear panel contains circuit breakers (four on most systems, three on 220 VAC
systems), designed to protect the system in the event of a power surge.
If the Workstation or C-Arm does not start up when the power is turned on, turn off the power and
visually inspect the circuit breakers on the Workstation rear panel (Figure 2-49). If any of the circuit
breaker buttons extends approximately ¼" (6 mm) as shown inFigure 2-50, or if the toggle handle is
positioned on "O" as shown in Figure 2-51, reset it by either pushing the button back in or setting the
toggle handle to "I", and then turn the system on.
2-34
Figure 2-49: Circuit breaker locations on Workstation rear panel.

On 220 VAC systems, the single main power circuit breaker located on the
left may be a push button type breaker or a toggle handle circuit breaker.
Figure 2-50: Workstation circuit breaker detail.
Figure 2-51: 220 VAC Workstation circuit breaker detail.

If one or more breakers continue to trip, discontinue use, unplug the system, and call for service.
The underside of the C-Arm contains a large circuit breaker, CB1, shown inFigure 2-52. CB1
disconnects the C-Arm batteries from the circuit, and is used when the system is shipped or
transported, or during rough handling.
2-35
Figure 2-52: C-Arm CB1

If CB1 is switched off when the system starts up, a Precharge Voltage Error message displays. To
reset CB1:
1. Turn off system power and allow the system to shut down.
2. Reach under the Mainframe at the location indicated in Figure 4 and push the circuit breaker
switch forward.
3. Turn the system on.
If the Precharge Voltage Error message recurs, call for service.
Normal system startup procedure

1. Insert the Workstation interconnect cable into the connector located on the right side cover
of the C-Arm by aligning the index marks (red dots) on the connector and pushing the
connector in until it locks in place.
CAUTION If the connector does not lock in place, unreliable system operation may result.
Figure 2-53: Connect the C-Arm to the Workstation
2-36
2. Connect the footswitch and/or handswitch to the sockets on the C-Arm interface panel
located on the left side cover. Verify that each connector locks in place.
1- When the keyswitch is placed in the on

position (clockwise; horizontal) the C-Arm is
fully operational. When the keyswitch is placed
in the standby position (counter clockwise;
vertical)
X-rays and vertical column movement are
disabled, but the C-Arm remains powered.
2- Battery charger indicator lamp illuminates
when the batteries are charging.
3- Handswitch connector socket.
4- Footswitch connector socket.
5- RUI socket
Figure 2-54: C-Arm interface panel (left: non-motorized systems; right: motorized systems)
3. Plug the Workstation power plug into a properly rated AC receptacle. See 13.9 Power
requirements on page 13-17 for information about power requirements.
NOTE: Once the Workstation power cable has been plugged into an AC receptacle, the battery
charger indicator on the C-Arm interface panel will illuminate indicating that the batteries are
charging.
4. Turn the key switch located on the C-Arm interface panel clockwise to enable X-rays and
motorized mechanical movement.
5. Press the green Workstation power switch (1) located on the front of the system.
Figure 2-55: Workstation power switch (1)

The switch lights up indicating that the power is turned on. Both the Workstation and the C-Arm will
begin their power up sequence.
NOTE: The C-Arm control panel will display a sequence of lighted segments indicating that it is
proceeding with the power up sequence.
2-37
The system has completed the power on sequence when the Workstation displays the Patient
Information screen on the right monitor and the C-Arm control panel displays the Auto Fluoro
technique.
The C-Arm controls will default to the following settings at power on:
Image Orientation: You may select either Retain Last or Reset to Home via the Work-
station's Customize Options. See Set defaults on page 2-9 for more infor-
mation.
Field Size: NORM
Collimation: The iris is fully opened. The leaf/leaves are opened and rotated 180° from
the stops.
Brightness/Contrast: Auto Brightness/Contrast is selected.
Generator: Auto Fluoro technique is selected along with the standard auto bright-
ness and contrast. Pulse and Film are off.
NOTE: If a problem is encountered during power up, the sequence of lights on the C-Arm control
panel will be interrupted or an error message may be displayed. See 12.2 Messages on page
12-3 for more information.
File system check

WARNING: Do not press the Workstation power switch before the system completes the
start up sequence. Pressing the power switch before start up has completed
could result in loss of data and system start up failures requiring a Service
Representative to restore the system.
NOTE: Depending on the version of the software on your Workstation the following screens may not
appear on the Workstation monitor. The system file check is still performed and may take up
to 5 minutes to complete. If the system fails to start after 5 minutes, the file check has failed
and you must call your Service Representative to restore the system.
A power loss (pressing the power switch, unplugging the system, and so on) during the startup
sequence causes the system to record that an improper shutdown has occurred. An improper
shutdown results in a file system check the next time the Workstation is started. When a file system
check is required, the Workstation begins the startup process and then displays a screen similar to
the following.
2-38
Figure 2-56: File System Check in progress

As the Workstation checks the file system, any problems encountered are repaired if possible. This
check can take up to five minutes to complete. Do not turn off the Workstation while a system file
check is in progress. When the file system check is completed successfully, a screen similar to the
following displays.
Figure 2-57: File System Check completed successfully

The system continues the startup sequence. System startup is complete when the Login or Patient
Information screen displays.
If the file system check fails, a screen similar to following displays.
2-39
Figure 2-58: File System Check failed

If a file system check fails, the system is no longer usable and you must call your Service
Representative to restore the system. Turn off the Workstation and call your Service Representative.
Startup checklist
Use the following checklist when preparing the GE OEC 9900 Elite system for use.
1. Place the C-Arm and Workstation in a position that leaves the various cables and connectors
easily accessible and from which the system can easily be moved into position for use.
2. Check the cables and connectors for breaks, wear, bent pins, or prongs, or any other
damage. Do not use worn or damaged cables.
3. Plug the interconnect cable from the Workstation into the interconnect socket on the C-Arm.
4. Plug handswitches and/or footswitches into the appropriate sockets on the C-Arm interface
panel.
5. If you are using a GE OEC 9900 EliteMD C-Arm, plug the Remote User Interface (RUI) into the
RUI connector on the C-Arm interface panel.
6. Plug the Workstation power cord into an appropriate wall socket.
CAUTION Cords and cables connected to the Workstation and C-Arm can become trip and/or
snag hazards in the work area. Make sure that all cords and cables are routed to
eliminate trip and/or snag hazards. Personnel working around the Workstation
and C-Arm should be aware of all cords and cables whenever they move around
the system or the system is moved.
7. Press the power switch on the Workstation to start the system. The switch lights up as the
system starts up. The C-Arm initializes at the same time.
8. When startup is complete, you will see a login screen if password protection is enabled. Enter
your password and touch OK.
2-40
NOTE: If the Workstation fails to start normally, turn the Workstation off and check all the cable
connections. Restart the Workstation. If the Workstation still fails to start, call for service.
9. Check C-Arm operation using the C-Arm control panel.
l Move the C-Arm through its complete range of motion both orbital and
rotational making sure that motion is smooth without binding or rough motion.
l If you are using a GE OEC 9900 EliteMD (motor driven) C-Arm, squeeze the
collision detector and verify that a collision message displays and that all
motion is stopped.
10. If you are using an RUI with a GE OEC 9900 EliteMD C-Arm, move the system into position for
use and orient the RUI to the C-Arm and the patient.
11. Check the imaging system.
l Put on appropriate personal protective equipment, lead apron, and so on.

l Make sure that no unprotected people are in the immediate vicinity and place a
radio opaque object in the X-ray field. Take a 1-second fluoro image.
l During the shot, make sure that the values for shot time, dose rate, and
cumulative dose displayed in the bottom right corner of the left monitor are
greater than 0.
l Check the image quality.
l Check image manipulation: rotation, flip vertical, flip horizontal.
l Open, close, and rotate the iris and leaf collimators.
l Check any other modes of operation, such as subtraction, that will be used
during the proposed clinical procedure.
12. If the system fails any of the checks, do not proceed with clinical use of the system. Call for
service.
13. If the system passes all of the checks, it is ready for clinical use.
14. Enter patient information and proceed.
2.5.2 Turn the system off

When the Workstation power button is in the off position, neither the Workstation nor the C-Arm will
operate.
CAUTION To prevent data loss, always wait 1 minute after performing any system function
before shutting down the system.
2-41
1. To shut the system down normally, press the power switch on the front of the system.
2. The power switch begins to blink as the system shuts down. A shut down message displays
on the right monitor. Shutdown time varies according to what the system was doing when
the power switch was pressed. The power switch continues to blink until the system has shut
down successfully and then turns off. Shut down should take 8 to 15 seconds.
CAUTION When you turn the system off, always wait at least 10 seconds before powering the
system back on. This wait time helps prevent operational problems.
CAUTION If the system fails to shut down normally, call for service.
NOTE: Once the system shut down message displays on the right monitor, the shut down cannot be
aborted. You must wait for the shut down to finish before you can restart the system.
NOTE: Because the system contains a UPS, shutting down using the power switch does not
completely remove power from the system. To remove power, shut down the system and
unplug the system from the wall socket after normal shutdown is complete.
CAUTION Never unplug the power cord until shutdown is complete and power is off.
NOTE: Remove all power from the system before moving the system or if a problem occurs which
prevents normal operation. All power should also be removed when periodic maintenance or
cleaning is performed.
WARNING: All power to the system has not been removed until the Workstation is
unplugged from the electrical outlet. To make sure power is disconnected,
verify that the green light on the lower left back panel of the Workstation is
off.
Shutdown checklist
Use this checklist when shutting down the GE OEC 9900 Elite system after use.
1. For the C-Arm, return all moving assemblies to their most compact positions. Lower the
vertical column and retract the cross-arm. On systems with an L-arm, orient the L-arm
vertically and down. For a motorized C-Arm, move the image intensifier to the 0,0 position
(vertical with no orbital or rotational deflection).
2. If password protection is enabled on the Workstation, press the Logout key to log out of
the Workstation.
2-42
3. Press the power switch on the front of the system. The power switch begins to blink as the
system shuts down. A shutdown message displays on the right monitor. Shutdown time
varies according to what the system was doing when the power switch was pressed. The
power switch continues to blink until the system has shut down successfully and then turns
off. Shutdown should take 8 to 15 seconds.
4. Disconnect the Workstation power cord from the AC outlet, coil it, and store it on the
Workstation.
5. If you are using an RUI with a GE OEC 9900 EliteMD C-Arm, disconnect the RUI cable from the
C-Arm connector panel and store the RUI and cable on the Workstation.
WARNING: If your C-Arm uses a Remote User Interface (RUI) make sure the RUI is
disconnected from the system before you move the C-Arm to another location.
Failure to disconnect the RUI can result in damage to the RUI and the RUI
connector.
6. Disconnect any switch cables from the C-Arm connector panel and store the cables and
switches on the C-Arm.
7. Disconnect the C-Arm interconnect cable, coil it, and store it on the Workstation.
Shutdown is complete.
2.5.3 Restart the system

1. Shut down the system normally, using the power switch on the front of the system.
A shutdown message displays on the right monitor and the power switch blinks as the system
shuts down. The power switch continues blinking until the system shuts down successfully
and then turns off.
2. After the system shuts down, wait 10 seconds and then press the power switch to restart the
system. The power switch lights up as the system starts up.
2-43
CAUTION Data loss or startup failures can result when restarting the Workstation if you do not wait
10 seconds after shutdown is complete before restarting the Workstation.
If the 10 second interval is not allowed before restart, the system may fail to restart
properly. Several error messages or other symptoms may occur during the restart
including a failure to communicate with the UPS, an inoperable right monitor touch
screen, or disabling of X-rays.
If these symptoms occur, allow the system to startup completely, displaying either the
Login or the Patient Information screen, and then press the power switch to allow the
system to shut down properly. Wait the required 10 seconds after shutdown and restart
the system using the power switch.
After any anomalous power event, such as a power surge, momentary power outage,
and so on, the system should be completely shut down and restarted to ensure that it is
in normal operating condition.
Should the system reboot automatically due to an anomalous power event, allow the
system to initialize fully, shut the system down, wait 10 seconds, and then restart .
2.5.4 Immediate Workstation shutdown

CAUTION Using the UPS power switch for immediate shutdown of the system does not allow
the Workstation to complete a controlled shutdown and may result in lost or
corrupted data and software. See File system check on page 2-38 for information
about problems encountered after an improper shutdown.
Under normal conditions the Workstation should always be shut down using the power switch on
the front of the Workstation. If a situation arises that requires the immediate shutdown of the
system or the normal shutdown does not complete properly, the Workstation is equipped with a
UPS power switch.
Figure 2-59: UPS Power Switch
2-44
Pressing the UPS power switch disconnects the Workstation from the internal UPS and turns the UPS
off. When the UPS is turned off, the Workstation immediately powers off and an alarm sounds for as
long as the system remains plugged in to a power source.
If you press the UPS power switch, the system will restart and the alarm will be silenced.
NOTE: When power is removed from the Workstation, power is also removed from any attached
compatible C-Arm.
2.5.5 Power loss and system restart

When the system loses AC power unexpectedly, by being accidentally unplugged or from some
other unexpected power loss, a message displays on the Workstation monitor informing the
operator that an AC power loss has occurred and that the Workstation will shutdown in 20 to 25
seconds. A countdown is shown on the monitor and, unless AC power is restored, the system begins
a normal shutdown at the end of the specified time.
If the Workstation was in operation at the time of the AC power loss, the power switch remains in
the on position. Press the power switch on the front of the system to turn the Workstation off.
2.5.6 System lockups

Should the system unexpectedly become unresponsive or lock up, restart the Workstation to return
the system to normal operating condition. See 2.5.3 Restart the system on page 2-43 for detailed
instructions for restarting the Workstation. If the system fails to respond or continues to lock up call
for service.
2-45
2-46
3. System operation
3. System operation
This chapter describes the system's operating controls, including the uninterrupted power supply
(UPS), the Workstation's touchscreen, keyboard, mouse / touchpad, keys, and remote control, and
the C-Arm control panel and switches. It also covers motorized C-Arm's movement and remote user
interface (RUI).
l Workstation controls
l C-Arm controls
l Motorized C-Arm controls
3.1 Workstation controls

Before using the Workstation, you should become familiar with the controls located on the following
components:
l Workstation keyboard
l Touchscreen
l Infrared (IR) Remote control (Optional)
3.1.1 Workstation keyboard

The Workstation keyboard controls include cursor movement, text-entry, image processing, and
function keys as well as a touchpad.
Two versions of the Workstation keyboard are available: English and international. The layout and
functionality of each keyboard is identical. Only labeling distinguishes English and international
versions of the keyboards.
Figure 3-1: Workstation text keyboard layout
Figure 3-2: Workstation icon keyboard layout
Cursor movement and text entry

The Workstation touchpad, cursor movement, text entry, and text modification keys allow you to
3-1
3. System operation
move the cursor, edit text, and make button selections from the touchscreen. Additionally, functions
can be accessed on the touchscreen simply by touching the displayed touchscreen function button.
You can also use the optional IR remote to navigate around the touchscreen and select touchscreen
functions.
CAUTION Do not use sharp or metal objects on the touchpad. A sharp or metal object can damage
the touchpad.
The touchpad is located on the right side of the keyboard. To select a button on the touchscreen
with the touchpad, use your finger on the touchpad to move the mouse cursor over the desired
button and then press the left touchpad button.
Touchscreen buttons can also be selected by using the tab key to move to a button. Once the
button is selected and highlighted, press ENTER.
NOTE: A touchscreen button possesses focus when its text label has a dotted border. Press ENTER to
activate the button with focus. A button is selected when it possesses the focus.
Cursor movement keys

Tab
Moves the cursor to the next text-entry box, and changes the focus to the
next touchscreen button in left-to-right, top-to-bottom order.
Enter
Moves the cursor to the next text-entry box. Also selects the touchscreen
button that possesses the focus.
Arrows
Used for fine positioning of image annotation and measurements on the
touchscreen.
Text entry keys

The text-entry keys allow you to enter and edit text.
Backspace
Deletes one character to the left of the cursor, or deletes a selected marker or
comment.
Delete
Deletes a selected marker or comment in the Image Annotation screen.
3-2
3. System operation
Caps Lock
Toggles between all upper case letters and mixed case letters. When engaged, the
Caps Lock LED, located above the Touch pad, illuminates and the keyboard types
only upper case letters. When disengaged, the keyboard types mixed case letters.
The default setting for Caps Lock is engaged.
Num Lock
CAUTION Do not use the Num Lock key. The keyboard does not function
correctly when Num Lock is activated.
Diacritic keys
Figure 3-3: Diacritic Keys on the Workstation Keyboard

Diacritic keys can be used in any language.
To use the Diacritic keys:
1. Press the diacritic key.
2. Press the letter key on the keyboard that will receive the diacritic mark.
NOTE: Press and hold the Shift key to access marks in the upper case or upper left positions on the
keys and press and hold the Alt key for marks on the upper right corner of the key.
3.1.2 Image processing keys

Image processing keys allow you to adjust images displayed on the left monitor.
Before applying image processing always save the image. If Auto Save is not enabled on the
Workstation, press the SAVE key, .
ENHANCE
Press or once to view the current level of enhancement. The current enhance level is
shown on the enhancement indicator bar displayed on the left monitor.
3-3
3. System operation
Figure 3-4: Enhance display

Changes to enhancement are indicated by a corresponding rise or fall in the non-shaded portion of
the indicator bar. The indicator bar disappears two seconds after the ENHANCE key is released. The
indicator bar disappears immediately when any X-ray switch is pressed.
Enhancement emphasizes edges in an image. You can select an enhancement level from 0 to 100 in
increments of 10.
Press to increase the amount of enhancement applied. Press to decrease amount of
enhancement applied. Pressing and holding the desired key, or repeated pressing, changes the
value.
NOTE: Enhancement can be applied to static and dynamic images. This function can be applied to
live and post-processed images.
NOISE FILTER (Averaging)

Press or once to view the current noise filtering level. The noise filter level is shown on
the noise filter indicator bar displayed on the left monitor.
3-4
3. System operation
Figure 3-5: Noise filter display

Changes to noise filtering are indicated by a corresponding rise or fall in the non-shaded portion of
the indicator bar. The indicator bar disappears two seconds after the OR key is released. The
indicator bar disappears immediately when any X-ray switch is pressed.
Press to increase the amount of noise filtering applied. Press to decrease the amount of noise
filtering applied. No bar showing on the indicator bar means minimal filtering is applied.
Averaging provides image noise reduction to create a smoother image. Noise filter can be applied
during live fluoro for all image modalities. Higher levels of noise filtering produce a smoother (or less
noisy) image, but may also cause more lag when imaging moving objects or anatomy. You may
choose from minimal, low, medium and high levels of filtering.
NOTE: Noise filtering is a real-time processing function and cannot be adjusted on static images. The
noise filtering level may be modified only during playback of 30 FPS (25 FPS on 50Hz
systems) cine runs.
ZOOM
Press the ZOOM key to activate the zoom function.
3-5
3. System operation
Magnified image - left monitor Zoom screen - right monitor
Figure 3-6: Zoom displays

The left monitor image is copied to the right monitor and the left image is displayed by default at
two times the magnification. A square box representing the region of interest is displayed on the
right monitor. Drag (touch and move) the box to move the region of interest.
Touch 4X to increase magnification to four times. Touch 1X to restore the image to original size.
Touch EXIT or press the ZOOM key to close the zoom screen. If the image is magnified when EXIT or
Zoom is selected, the left monitor image remains magnified until an X-ray switch is pressed or until
another image is recalled.
If the Workstation is equipped with a Cine disk, you can apply zoom to a single frame of a Cine run.
NEGATE
Negate reverses the display of light and dark values in an image. Press the NEGATE key to
activate the negate function.
Positive image Negated image
Figure 3-7: Negate displays

Negate is applied to the current image on the left monitor and to all subsequent images produced
until negate is disabled.
Until disabled, each time Fluoro is pressed on the footswitch or handswitch, the image will be
3-6
3. System operation
negated.
To disable negate, press the NEGATE key again.
NOTE: Negate can be applied to static and dynamic images.
CONTRAST and BRIGHTNESS

Press or once on either key to view the contrast (left key) and brightness (right
key) level display.
Figure 3-8: Contrast and brightness display

Press either key again to change the level of contrast or brightness. Press to increase. Press to
decrease. Short, quick presses of the key adjust the level one increment at a time. Pressing and
holding the key down adjusts it more rapidly.
Changes are indicated by a corresponding rise or fall in the shaded portion of the indicator bar.
Display of the indicator bar times-out two seconds after the or key is released or immediately
when any X-ray switch is pressed.
The current contrast or brightness level is shown in a range from 0-100 on the indicator bar
displayed on the left monitor and in a numeric value displayed on the lower right corner of the left
monitor image.
AUTO
Enables automatic adjustment of contrast and brightness on the left monitor image. When
enabled,the system automatically selects the optimum contrast and brightness values for
the left monitor image. If the LED next to the AUTO key is illuminated, Auto is enabled.
To enable automatic contrast/brightness, press the AUTO key. To disable automatic
contrast/brightness selection, press the AUTO key or contrast/brightness buttons. The Auto LED is
not illuminated when Auto is disabled. Pressing AUTO after manually adjusting the levels will
3-7
3. System operation
readjust the levels you have set.

You can enable AUTO from the C-Arm control panel or Workstation keyboard.
SWAP
Press the SWAP key to exchange images between the left and right monitor. When only
one image displays on the left monitor, SWAP will copy the image to the right monitor.
SAVE
Press the SAVE key to save the left monitor image on the system disk. Up to 63 static
images can be stored on the GSP system disk, and up to 1000 static images can be stored
on all other systems.
The image number is displayed on the bottom left corner of the left monitor screen. This number
corresponds with the image number in the image directory for the exam displayed.
When storage capacity has been reached, each new image is saved over the oldest image on the
disk.
BLANK
Press the BLANK key to "blank" the screens quickly if the screens are displaying
information which should not be seen by someone else. Press the BLANK key to clear both screens
completely. Press any key on the keyboard (except function keys such as HELP and Patient
Information) to re-display the screens' images.
3.1.3 Touchpad
CAUTION Do not use sharp or metal objects on the touchpad. A sharp or metal object can
damage the touchpad.
The touchpad controls the mouse pointer and can be used to select buttons on the touchscreen
monitor.
1- Touchpad
2- Left button
3- Non-Functional
Figure 3-9: Touchpad

Use your finger on the touchpad to move the mouse cursor over the desired control on the
3-8
3. System operation
touchscreen monitor. When the cursor is in position, either click the left button or tap lightly on the
touchpad to select and execute the control.
Touchpad sensitivity and button configuration can be set up on the Mouse/Touchpad/Audio
Configuration screen.
3.1.4 Mouse/Touchpad/Audio configuration

Press the Setup function key, , on the keyboard to display the Setup screen and then select the
Mouse/Touchpad/Audio Configuration option. A screen similar to the following displays.
Figure 3-10: Mouse/Audio Configuration Screen
NOTE: X-rays are disabled while this screen is active.
Mouse/touchpad configuration
l Use the Mouse/Touchpad Configuration to set the Mouse Acceleration speed and button
orientation for the touchpad.
l Change Mouse Acceleration to control the speed of the cursor as you drag it across the
screen. Increasing acceleration allows you to move the cursor from one side of the screen to
the other with less motion on the touchpad.
l Select Left Handed to swap the left and right buttons on the touchpad for use by a left-
handed operator.
Audio configuration
l Use the Audio configuration to adjust the volume of system alerts and to enable or disable the
shutdown sound and Keyboard clicks.
When you have finished configuring the Touchpad and Audio for the system, touch OK to accept the
changes and exit the screen.
3-9
3. System operation
3.1.5 Remote control

You may also use the optional infrared remote control to operate the touchscreen.
1- Exit key
2- Remote control screen key
3- Enter key
4- Cursor movement ring
Figure 3-11: Optional remote control.

The Remote Image Processing screen allows remote access to enhancement, noise filter, contrast /
brightness, negate and zoom functions. You may also save images displayed on the left monitor and
swap images between monitors.
Remote control screen

Press this key to display the Remote Image Processing screen.
Figure 3-12: Remote Image Processing screen

Press the arrows to move the cursor from button to button. The focus moves to the closest button in
the direction of the arrow press.
Once the focus is on desired touchscreen button, press the Enter key in the center of the ring to
activate the button function. To move an item with the focus, such as a zoom box or marker, use the
arrow keys. To remove the focus, press Enter again.
NOTE: The IR remote may be used to activate any touchscreen button.
3-10
3. System operation
3.1.6 Function keys

Use the function keys located on the top row of the keyboard to display touchscreen menus on the
right monitor.
PATIENT INFORMATION
Displays the Patient Information screen. Use this screen to enter patient information.
See 4.1 Patient information screen on page 4-1
IMAGE DIRECTORY
Displays the Image Directory screen. Image directory allows you to review, print, and
archive stored images and dose information. See 8.1 Image directory on page 8-1.
IMAGE ANNOTATION
Displays the Image Annotation screen. Image annotation allows you to place
markers, add comments, crop images, and perform measurements. See 7. Image
annotation and measurement on page 7-1.
ADDITIONAL APPLICATIONS
Displays the Additional Applications screen. This screen allows the user access
additional applications installed on the Workstation. See 9. Additional functions and
options on page 9-1.
SWITCH APPLICATIONS
Switches between the switch applications screen and Fluoro imaging.
SETUP
Displays the Customize screen. Use the Customize screen to configure system setup
options. See 2.1.3 Set up software features on page 2-2 and 9.1.3 Setup configurations
on page 9-3.
LOGOUT
Allows the user to log out of the system.
3.1.7 Touchscreen controls

The right monitor provides a touchscreen for interacting with the Workstation. Using the
touchscreen (and the keyboard for text-entry) you can:
l Enter and view patient information
l View and process images
l Configure the X-ray switches
l Set imaging parameters
l Annotate images
3-11
3. System operation
1- Touchscreen monitor
2- Touchpad
3- Active image monitor
Figure 3-13: Workstation Monitors

To select a touchscreen button, or a box for text-entry, firmly touch the desired object with your
finger or slide your finger on the touchpad to move the cursor to the desired object and select it by
clicking the left button on the touchpad.
Figure 3-14: Using the touchscreen
3.1.8 Multiple switch presses

CAUTION Simultaneously pressing the Fluoro , HLF , and Mode switches on a three
pedal footswitch causes a digital Cine shot to begin. Take precautions to avoid simul-
taneous pressing of these switches by keeping the footswitch area clear of objects that
could cause one or more of these switches to be pressed accidentally.
Occasionally, multiple switches are pressed during a single shot. Pressing of multiple switches during
a single shot is not recommended. However, the system accommodates multiple switch presses as
shown in the following table. Multiple switch presses can happen using the footswitches or
handswitches or X-ray switch on the C-Arm control panel housing, or by pressing a combination of
those switches. The switches are marked as follows:
Fluoro Switch on both foot and handswitches.
HLF Switch on both foot and handswitches.
3-12
3. System operation
Digital Cine Switch on a three pedal footswitch.
Fluoro Switch on C-Arm control panel housing.
l If a fluoro switch is pressed (on the footswitch, handswitch or C-Arm) while another fluoro
switch is being pressed, the fluoro shot will continue until both fluoro switches have been
released.
l If an HLF switch is pressed (on the footswitch or handswitch) while another HLF switch is
being pressed, the HLF shot will continue until both HLF switches have been released.
l If an HLF switch is pressed while a fluoro switch (or digital Cine pedal on a 3-pedal footswitch)
is being pressed, an HLF shot will not begin until the fluoro switch has been released.
l If a fluoro switch is pressed while an HLF switch (or digital Cine pedal on a 3-pedal footswitch)
is being pressed, a fluoro shot will not begin until the HLF switch has been released.
l If the digital Cine pedal is pressed (on a 3-pedal footswitch) while a fluoro or HLF switch is
being pressed, a digital Cine shot will begin.
3.1.9 Workstation Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

The Workstation contains an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). The UPS provides emergency
backup power to the Workstation in the event of an unexpected power loss. If power is
unexpectedly lost, the UPS allows the system time to save current images and to shutdown
normally.
UPS operation
The UPS is not active until the system startup sequence is complete. The startup sequence is
complete when the Login or Patient Information screen displays on the right hand monitor. A
power loss (pressing the power switch, unplugging the system, and so on) during the startup
sequence causes the system to record that an improper shutdown has occurred. An improper
shutdown results in a File system check the next time the Workstation is started. The file system
check can take up to 5 minutes to complete.
3.1.10 Extended exposure feature

The Extended Exposure feature is designed to provide a usable Last Image Hold (LIH) capture on
very short X-ray control switch activations. These are activations of insufficient duration to produce
a suitable LIH capture, typically less than 1 second. This feature extends only these very short
exposures, but only to the extent necessary to provide a suitable image capture.
The actual limit of exposure extension on very short exposures is dependent on two factors:
1. The time required to obtain the proper X-ray technique. This time is up to 1 second on the first
exposure of a particular view only. For subsequent exposures of the same view, this portion of
the delay is typically less than .25 second.
3-13
3. System operation
2. The Fluoro Noise Reduction (FNR) filter setting. Higher FNR settings will result in longer
extensions of the exposure. Default FNR setting results in approximately 0.7 seconds of
extension for processing.
The total exposure extension is limited unconditionally to 1.25 seconds.
WARNING: This feature can be disabled by a Field Engineer but could result in poor image
quality and increased exposure to patient.
Attempting to take very short exposures in quick succession may not operate as
expected. This could result in degraded image quality of the initial or subsequent
exposures.
With Extended Exposure disabled, X-rays may continue to be produced following
the release of a momentary X-ray switch press until the desired technique has
stabilized.
With Extended Exposure enabled, X-rays may continue to be produced until the
system finishes processing the image to produce a stabilized image.
CAUTION Taking very rapid and short exposures repeatedly over an extended period of time
may cause errors to occur. Avoid continuous tapping on the X-ray switch over long
periods of time.
Footswitch and handswitch

The X-ray footswitch and handswitch offer maximum flexibility and control over image generation.
Switches may be used to generate X-rays or change between the available imaging modes.
Features and imaging modes available are determined by what you purchased with your
Workstation.
Most systems come with a two-pedal footswitch and a four-button handswitch. Some earlier
models have a three-button handswitch without the SAVE key. Some systems offer a three-pedal
footswitch.
Footswitch model or mode mismatches
The basic two and three pedal footswitches used with the GE OEC 9900 EliteMD Workstation may
not operate as expected when paired with a Workstation model for which they were not intended.
The three pedal footswitch is intended for use with cardiac systems. When a three pedal footswitch
is attached to a non-cardiac system, it functions as a two pedal footswitch using the first two
switches and the mode switch. In this case, the third switch will cause a beep to sound when pressed
but will have no functionality with the system.
The two pedal footswitch is intended for use with non-cardiac systems. When a two pedal
footswitch is connected to a cardiac system, the functions usually assigned to the third pedal of a
three pedal footswitch (HLF and Cine) are unavailable unless they are configured for the second
switch using the Mode screen. For information on setting imaging modes see 5.1 Modes of operation
on page 5-1.
3-14
3. System operation
Figure 3-15: Two-pedal and three-pedal footswitches
l Press the left switch to generate standard fluoroscopic images or a roadmap.

l Press the switch labeled to produce high-level Fluoro (HLF) images, digital spot (DIG.
SPOT) images, Digital Cine images, or a subtraction.
l Use the Mode switch to change between standard fluoroscopy and vascular imaging
modes. The Mode switch is inactive on nonvascular systems.
l On three-pedal footswitches: Digital Cine enable automatically invokes Digital Cine HLF
operation at the preset rate.
Figure 3-16: Three and four button handswitch
CAUTION Do not stretch the handswitch cord further than 3.048 m (10 feet). This may result in
damage to the cord. If the cord is damaged and touches the floor, it is a safety
hazard. Call the Communications Center for assistance.
l Press the left switch to generate standard fluoroscopic images or a roadmap.

l Press the switch labeled to produce High-Level Fluoro (HLF) images, digital spot (DIG.
SPOT) images, Digital Cine images, or a subtraction.
l Use the Mode switch to change between standard fluoroscopy and vascular imaging
modes. The Mode switch is inactive in nonvascular systems.
l On four button handswitches, press the SAVE key on the handswitch to save an image
displayed on the left monitor.
Switching mode pairs

Press the Mode switch to change between Standard Fluoroscopy and Vascular modes. This switch is
inactive in non-vascular and non-cardiac systems.
The mode switch is also located on the C-Arm control panel and Workstation keyboard. For more
information on setting up imaging modes available, see 5.1 Modes of operation on page 5-1.
3-15
3. System operation
Figure 3-17: Mode switch on handswitch and footswitches
3.2 C-Arm controls

This section describes the system's operating controls, including the C-Arm control panel and
switches. Before you begin imaging, familiarize yourself with the following controls:
l Control Panel Housing Controls
l Footswitch
l Handswitch
C-Arm control panel display

The LED panel on the C-Arm Control Panel displays the X-ray technique, status errors, and warning
messages related to C-Arm operation and X-ray generation.
The information displayed changes based on the current system operation.
Figure 3-18: Display During Normal Fluoroscopy Showing kVp (left),

Accumulated Fluoro Exposure Time (center), and mA (right).
Figure 3-19: Display During Film Mode Showing kVp (left) and mAs (right).
Figure 3-20: Display Showing a System Message.

See 12.2 Messages on page 12-3 for more information on C-Arm and system messages and their
meanings.
3-16
3. System operation
3.2.1 Radiation control

Control panel housing
The C-Arm control panel, fast stop switches and X-ray On switch are all located on the C-Arm
control panel housing.
NOTE: For instructions for using the vertical column motor switches, see Vertical column operation
on page 2-24.
1- Control panel display

2- Control panel
3- Fast Stop switches (one on each side)
4- X-ray On switch
5- Vertical column motor switches
Figure 3-21: Control locations on the Control Panel Housing
Control Panel
The C-Arm control panel allows you to adjust how images are generated and displayed. Two
different panels are available: text or icon. The keys on the control panel are grouped according to
their function. These groups of keys allow you to:
l Orient the image.
l Operate frequently used Workstation functions remotely.
l Select the image intensifier field size.
l Control the semitransparent leaf/leaves or iris collimator.
l Adjust contrast/brightness levels.
l Control generator functions.
l Reset the Fluoro alarm and timer.
Figure 3-22: Control Panel
Image Orientation
Use these keys to rotate or reverse the image produced once X-rays have been generated and live
3-17
3. System operation
video is present on the left Workstation monitor.

Image rotation and image reversal are not available to be used with Cine playback, on a recalled or
swapped image, or when image annotation has been applied. Rotation and reversal are best used
with the most recent image held.
Rotate Image
Press the left portion of the key to rotate the image counterclockwise. Press the right
portion of the key to rotate the image clockwise.
A camera icon will display and move to indicate which part of the image will be rotated
to the top. Once camera movement has ceased, the image will display rotated.
This feature is used with the most recent shot in order to aid setting optimal camera
orientation for the next live shot. The "last image hold" is used for a source image while
rotation and flip are applied.
Reverse Image
Use these keys to change the orientation of the image displayed on the Workstation's
left monitor.
Press the left key to reverse the image left to right, and press the right key to reverse the
image top to bottom.
Remote Workstation Operation

SAVE
The save function can be used during a live X-ray or afterward to save the last image
displayed on the left monitor. While generating X-rays, press the SAVE key to save one
frame of the live X-ray to the Workstation's hard-drive without interrupting live X-rays.
After you have completed the exposure, press the SAVE key to save the last image
displayed on the left monitor to the Workstation hard-drive.
SWAP
Use this function while generating live X-rays or after X-rays have been terminated.
While generating live X-rays - press the SWAP
key to copy one frame of the live X-ray and move
it to the right monitor. Pressing SWAP again will
discard the previously swapped image and
replace it with the new image.
After X-rays have been terminated -the last
frame of the exposure is retained on the left
monitor (last image hold). Press the SWAP key to
swap the images displayed on the left and right
monitors.
3-18
3. System operation
If the right monitor is blank, press the SWAP key

to copy the image on the left monitor to the right
monitor.
MODE
Use the MODE key to toggle between the standard fluoroscopy mode and the vascular
imaging mode when the C-Arm is connected to a Vascular or Cardiac Workstation. On
nonvascular systems an audible beep will sound to signify that this function is not
available.
Image Intensifier Field Size

FIELD SIZE
Selects the X-ray field size. Available field sizes are dependent on the size of the tri-mode
image intensifier installed: 23 cm (9 inch) or 31 cm (12 inch).
Press this key to select the desired X-ray field size. The illuminated LED indicates which
field size is selected:
Text Icon Field Size (9 inch I.I.) Field Size (12 inch I.I.)
NORM 23 cm (9 inch) 31 cm (12 inch)
MAG 1 15 cm (6 inch) 23 cm (9 inch)
MAG 2 11 cm (4.5 inch) 15 cm (6 inch)
Collimator Control
The X-ray beam may be collimated by using either the iris collimator or the semitransparent leaf
collimator. The collimator leaves and iris can be positioned prior to generating X-rays. This feature
helps reduce exposure to X-rays while collimating.
Press the keys until the leaves or iris are in the position you desire and then press any X-ray switch.
Collimator Leaf Rotation
Press the left portion of this key to rotate the collimator leaf/leaves counterclockwise,
and press the right portion to rotate them clockwise.
Collimator Leaf Open/Close
Press the top portion of this key to open the semitransparent collimator leaf/leaves, and
press the bottom portion of the key to close them.
A graphic icon showing one or two lines displays when you press this key. It indicates
the position and orientation of the collimator leaf or leaves.
NOTE: Your C-Arm may be equipped with one or two semitransparent collimator
leaves. If your collimator has one leaf the graphic icon will display only one
line instead of two.
3-19
3. System operation
Iris Collimator Open/Close

Press the top portion of this key to open the collimator iris or press the bottom portion
of the key to close it.
A graphic icon showing a circle displays when you press this key. It indicates the
position and orientation of the iris.
Contrast/Brightness/Metal Rejection
Manual Brightness and Contrast
Press this key to changes to manual contrast/brightness mode. This allows you to
adjust autohistogram levels, which can be used to reduce the appearance of metal in
the image.
To use this feature:
1. Check the AutoHisto LED on the C-Arm. AutoHisto is enabled if the LED is a
constant light.
2. With AutoHisto enabled, press the Contrast/Brightness key on the C-Arm panel.
3. The Smart Metal default level bar will display on the left monitor image on the
Workstation.
4. The AutoHisto LED will blink, indicating that smart metal values are applied to the
image.
5. Adjust the level of metal rejection by pressing the up or down arrow as desired.
6. To exit Smart Metal mode, press the AutoHisto key. The LED will be off, indicating
the system is in manual contrast/ brightness mode.
7. Press the AutoHisto key to return to AutoHisto mode.
Auto Brightness and Contrast
Press this key to enable the system to automatically select the optimum amount of
contrast and brightness. Deselecting auto contrast/brightness turns off the LED. The
current level of contrast/brightness remains in effect until adjusted manually or until
auto contrast/ brightness is selected again.
Generator Control
kVp
Press this key to manually adjust kVp and override auto technique setting. Press the top
portion of the key to increase kVp or press the bottom portion of the key to decrease
kVp.
mA/mAs
Press this key to manually adjust mA/mAs for fluoroscopy/film respectively and override
auto technique setting. Press the top portion of the key to increase mA/mAs or press the
bottom portion to decrease mA/mAs.
3-20
3. System operation
Auto Technique
Press this key to enable the system to produce an optimum image by adjusting the
technique (kVp, mA, and camera gain) automatically.
Pulse
Press this key to enable pulsed imaging mode using the currently selected pulse rate.
The LED illuminates when pulse is enabled.
A user-defined number of X-ray pulses are generated each second while the X-ray
switch is pressed. Pulsed X-rays can be used to reduce total radiation dose. Pulse mode
cannot be used with Film or Digital Spot mode. Pulse rates are selected from the
Workstation's Mode screen.
Press the key again to return to normal imaging mode.
Film
Press this key to enable Film operation. The LED illuminates when Film mode is enabled.
Press the Film key again to disable Film operation or select Auto Fluoro Mode. See 9.5
Radiographic film on page 9-26 section for more information.
Low Dose
Press this key to select the Low Dose mode. The LED illuminates when the Low Dose
mode is enabled.
Select Low Dose mode when possible to reduce the exposure dose rate to the patient.
Press the key again to return to normal imaging mode.
3-21
3. System operation
Alarm Reset
Alarm Reset Button
The C-Arm tracks the amount of time that X-rays are generated when an X-ray switch is
pressed. The amount of accumulated exposure time is indicated on the C-Arm control
panel display.
If pulse mode is enabled, the amount of time accumulated depends on the length of
time an X-ray switch is pressed and the length of the pulses and the number of pulses
per second.
Systems configured for use in the United States sound an alarm and illuminate the
Alarm Reset LED at the end of each 5 minute (by default) interval of accumulated Fluoro
time.
Press this key to briefly to silence the alarm.
Press and hold the key for approximately two seconds to reset the accumulated
exposure time to zero and silence the alarm.
In addition, when the accumulated fluoro time reaches a preset limit, 10 minutes
maximum by default, X-rays will be terminated. Thirty seconds prior to termination an
alarm will sound. To override X-ray termination and silence the alarm press the Alarm
Reset key briefly.
For non-United States configurations, when the “continuous” fluoro time reaches a
preset limit, the default is 10 minutes maximum, X-rays will be terminated. Thirty
seconds prior to termination an alarm will sound. To override X-ray termination and
silence the alarm press the Alarm Reset key briefly. If you are unable to reset the alarm
before X-rays are terminated release the X-ray switch and then press the X-ray switch
again to enable X-rays.
If you are unable to reset the alarm before X-rays are terminated, release the X-ray
switch and then press the X-ray switch again to enable X-rays.
NOTE: A service representative can adjust the time duration before X-rays are
terminated.
Fast Stop switches

Fast Stop switches are located on each side of the C-Arm control panel. Press either Fast Stop switch
to stop motorized mechanical movement (vertical column) and disable X-rays.
WARNING: If pressing a Fast Stop switch fails to stop motor movement or X-rays, place the
Workstation power switch in the off position, or disconnect the power plug from
the AC receptacle.
3-22
3. System operation
Figure 3-23: Fast Stop switches are located on the C-Arm Control panel.
If the Fast Stop switch is pressed, on purpose or inadvertently, while an operator is pressing the
vertical column switch, vertical column operation will cease and X-rays will be disabled. After both
switches have been released it may be possible to operate the vertical column, however X-rays will
remain disabled until the system is restarted.
If the Fast Stop switch is pressed when a run-away condition exists, vertical column motion will
cease and X-rays will be disabled. Under this condition it is not possible to operate the vertical
column or take X-rays. Call your service representative.
If the Fast Stop switch has been pressed to disable unintended X-rays do not restart the system. Call
your service representative.
NOTE: C-Arm motorized motion can be used after releasing a Fast Stop switch. However, after you
press a Fast Stop switch, you must restart the System before you can take X-rays.
X-ray On switch
The X-ray On switch is located on the C-Arm control panel housing. The switch can be used to take a
film exposure, generate Fluoro images or initiate Roadmapping on Vascular systems. In essence, it
functions just like the left Footswitch or Handswitch and the function is dependant on the imaging
mode selected: standard fluoroscopy or vascular imaging.
When generating X-rays in Fluoro mode the image displays on the left Workstation monitor. When
the X-ray switch is released X-rays are terminated and the last image or frame of the exposure is
retained on the left monitor. This is referred to as Last Image Hold.
See 5.1 Modes of operation on page 5-1 for additional information about imaging modes.
Figure 3-24: X-ray On switch location
Standby or X-rays off

1. Turn the C-Arm keyswitch to the standby position (counterclockwise; vertical).
3-23
3. System operation
NOTE: Placing the equipment in standby disables X-rays and vertical column operation so these fea-
tures will not be activated unintentionally. A message displays on the control panel display
indicating that the keyswitch is in standby.
2. Turn the keyswitch back to the on position when you are ready to use the C-Arm. The
Workstation power switch will remain lit, indicating the system is still powered on.
3.2.2 C-Arm sleep mode

All GE OEC 9900 Elite C-Arms use a “sleep mode” to extend the life of the C-Arm’s X-ray tube. The C-
Arm enters sleep mode after 5 minutes of idle activity. That is, after the C-Arm is turned on, if no C-
Arm key, handswitch or footswitch is pressed for a period of 5 minutes, the C-Arm enters sleep mode
and no X-rays can be taken until the C-Arm comes out of sleep mode. Pressing any key on the C-
Arm control panel wakes the C-Arm and makes it ready for normal activity in 2 seconds.
Pressing a handswitch or footswitch also wakes the C-Arm. Handswitches and footswitches operate
as follows.
Press and hold the fluoro switch for 2 seconds to wake the C-Arm and make a normal fluoro
exposure.
Press and release the HLF (high level fluoro) switch to wake the C-Arm. Wait 2 seconds and
press the HLF footswitch to make HLF exposures.
Press and release the Digital Cine switch to wake the C-Arm. Wait 2 seconds and press the
Digital Cine switch to make digital Cine exposures.
3.3 Motorized C-Arm controls

Operation of the GE OEC 9900 EliteMD is the same as operation of other C-Arms with the exceptions
noted in this section, which are primarily use of the Remote User Interface (RUI) and motorized
motion. These two features give the GE OEC 9900 EliteMD unique capabilities in equipment
positioning, image control, and Workstation interface.
See 3.2 C-Arm controls on page 3-16 for more information on the operation and maintenance of C-
Arms.
3.3.1 Safety
Be sure that you are familiar with the safety information and procedures covered in Chapter 1,
Safety, in this manual. In addition to that information, you should be familiar with the safety
features specific to the GE OEC 9900 EliteMD system.
NOTE: The Remote User Interface is not watertight. It has limited protection from splash only. Any
fluid immersion of the RUI will cause damage to the system.
WARNING: Do not put anything around or near the joystick that could squeeze against the
safety switch and cause the joystick to be continuously enabled. When a joystick
is continuously enabled, any use can result in unintentional movement of the C-
Arm, causing injury or equipment damage.
3-24
3. System operation
WARNING: Use great care when operating all motorized features. Although the system
detects and mitigates the effects of a collision, it is still possible for a moving
C-Arm to hit a person or object with enough force to cause injury or equipment
damage.
WARNING: Make sure the cross-arm brake and the foot brake are both applied before using
any motorized movement feature. Failure to do so may cause unintended
movement across the floor, resulting in injury or equipment damage.
Unintended movement can also occur when you use the Stop Motion button or a
Fast Stop button with the brakes off.
WARNING: Avoid covering the X-ray tube’s ventilation holes in the C-Arm with a drape or
other obstruction. The system may overheat, resulting in downtime while the
system cools.
3.3.2 Remote user interface

The remote user interface (RUI) allows you to set up and control the motorized C-Arm. You can use
the RUI to orient the system, perform all motorized C-Arm movements, take X-rays, and perform
some Workstation functions.
The RUI buttons are arranged in groups. The vertical movement and orientation buttons are on the
left side of the RUI near the joystick. C-Arm buttons are in the center of the RUI. Workstation buttons
are on the right side of the RUI.
1- Motion Stop Button

2- Joystick, vertical movement buttons,
and orientation buttons
3- C-Arm function buttons
4- Workstation function buttons
Figure 3-25: The Remote User Interface (RUI)
3.3.3 Buttons
The movement and orientation buttons on the RUI are unique to the motorized system and are
discussed in some detail. The C-Arm and Workstation buttons on the RUI are described briefly
because they duplicate buttons on the Workstation and on the C-Arm control panel, which are
described earlier in this chapter.
The GE OEC 9900 EliteMD C-Arm has two Fast Stop buttons on the C-Arm control panel housing and
one Motion Stop button on the Remote User Interface (RUI). Function of these buttons is similar with
one significant difference. Any of the buttons can be pressed to stop all motorized motion on the C-
Arm. Pressing a Fast Stop button also disables all X-rays. Pressing the Motion Stop button does not
3-25
3. System operation
disable X-rays.
Fast Stop buttons

The GE OEC 9900 EliteMD C-Arm control panel housing has two red Fast Stop buttons as shown
below. Press either Fast Stop button to disable X-rays and all motorized C-Arm motion.
Figure 3-26: C-Arm Fast Stop buttons
WARNING: If pressing a Fast Stop button fails to stop motor movement or X-rays, turn off
the Workstation power switch or disconnect the Workstation power plug from
the AC outlet. Call for service.
NOTE: Pressing either Fast Stop button disables X-rays and disables all motorized C-Arm motion.
Motion Stop button

WARNING: Pressing the Motion Stop button on the RUI immediately stops all C-Arm motion
but does not disable X-rays. Press one of the Fast Stop buttons on the C-Arm
Control Panel Housing to disable X-rays.
The RUI has a Motion Stop button located above and to the right of the joystick. Pressing the Motion
Stop button disables all motorized C-Arm motion controlled from the RUI but does NOT disable X-
rays. Vertical motorized motion is still available using the vertical motion button on the C-Arm
control panel housing.
Figure 3-27: RUI Motion Stop Button is Above Orientation Buttons

To re-enable motorized C-Arm motion, reset the RUI Motion Stop button by turning it to the left and
allowing it to pop up. C-Arm motion is disabled until the RUI Motion Stop button is reset. If you
receive a Motion Disabled message on the Workstation, check the state of the Motion Stop button
to make sure it has been reset.
3-26
3. System operation
NOTE: When the C-Arm motion has been stopped using the Motion Stop button, you can move the
C-Arm manually after using the clutch handle to disengage the C-Arm clutch, explained later
in this section.
Joystick, Movement Buttons, and Orientation Buttons

The joystick, movement, and orientation buttons are used to control the movement of the C-Arm.
WARNING: Do not wrap anything around the joystick that may simulate the operator
squeezing the joystick. Squeezing the joystick can cause the C-Arm to move
unexpectedly and injure the patient or operator or damage the C-Arm.
Joystick
The Joystick moves the C-Arm rotationally and orbitally. When properly oriented, the C-
Arm moves away or toward you when you move the joystick forward or back. The C-
Arm moves to your left or right when you move the joystick in those directions. See 2.4
Motorized C-Arm on page 2-30 for information on orienting the C-Arm and RUI.
NOTE: The joystick has a safety switch that prevents the C-Arm from moving unless you squeeze the
joystick shaft as you move it. This safety feature ensures that the C-Arm does not move
unexpectedly should the joystick be moved accidentally.
NOTE: You will notice that the C-Arm coasts, or continues to move slightly, after you move it with the
joystick. This is a normal.
Movement buttons
The Movement buttons are used to move the C-Arm vertically. Press the top button to
move the C-Arm up and the down button to move the C-Arm down.
WARNING: Failure to orient the C-Arm and RUI to the patient prior to system use could
injure the patient or operator, or damage the equipment.
Orientation buttons
The orientation buttons are used to orient the C-Arm and RUI so that the C-Arm moves
in the expected direction when you use the joystick.
The top button is the C-Arm orientation button. Press the button to select the correct
C-Arm position, indicated by the LED.
The bottom button is the RUI orientation button. Press the button to select the correct
RUI position, indicated by the red LED.
3-27
3. System operation
3.3.4 C-Arm function buttons

The RUI allows you to access most of the C-Arm Control Panel functions. For a more detailed
explanation of the capabilities and function of each button, see 3.2 C-Arm controls on page 3-16.
Image orientation
Use these keys to rotate or reverse the image produced once X-rays have been generated and live
video is present on the left Workstation monitor. Rotation and reversal are best used with the most
recent image held.
Press this key to rotate the image to attain optimal camera orientation for the next
“live shot.”
Press the left key to reverse the image left to right, and press the right key to reverse
the image top to bottom.
Image acquisition
Use these keys to control field size, collimation, brightness and contrast, and mode.
Field Size
Press this key to select the desired X-ray field size. The illuminated LED indicates which
field size is selected:
Text Icon Field Size (9 inch I.I.) Field Size (12 inch I.I.)
NORM 23 cm (9 inch) 31 cm (12 inch)
MAG 1 15 cm (6 inch) 23 cm (9 inch)
MAG 2 11 cm (4.5 inch) 15 cm (6 inch)
Collimator Leaf Rotation
Press the left portion of this key to rotate the collimator leaf/leaves counterclockwise,
and press the right portion to rotate them clockwise.
Collimator Leaf Open/Close
Press the top portion of this key to open the semitransparent collimator leaf/leaves, and
press the bottom portion of the key to close them.
A graphic icon showing two lines displays when you press this key. It indicates the
position and orientation of the collimator leaves.
Iris Collimator Open/Close
Press the top portion of this key to open the collimator iris or press the bottom portion of
the key to close it.
A graphic icon showing a circle displays when you press this key. It indicates the
position and orientation of the iris.
3-28
3. System operation
Manual Brightness and Contrast

Press this key to changes to manual contrast/brightness mode. This allows you to
adjust autohistogram levels, which can be used to reduce the appearance of metal in
the image.
Auto Brightness and Contrast
Press this key to enable the system to automatically select the optimum amount of
contrast and brightness. Deselecting auto contrast / brightness turns off the LED. The
current level of contrast / brightness remains in effect until adjusted manually or until
auto contrast / brightness is selected again.
Pulse
Press this key to enable pulsed imaging mode using the currently selected pulse rate. A
preset number of X-ray pulses are generated each second while the X-ray switch is
pressed. Press the key again to return to normal imaging mode.
Low Dose
Press this key to select the Low Dose mode. Select Low Dose mode when possible to
reduce the exposure dose rate to the patient. Press the key again to return to normal
imaging mode.
Alarm Reset Button
Press this key to reset the alarm on the C-Arm. The system sounds an alarm and
illuminates the Alarm Reset LED at the end of each 5 minute (default) interval of
accumulated fluoro time. If the alarm is on, press the alarm reset button to turn the
alarm off and clear some error messages.
3.3.5 Workstation Function Buttons

The RUI allows you to access some of the Workstation functions to store and perform basic image
manipulation. For a more detailed explanation of the capabilities and function of each button, see
3.1 Workstation controls on page 3-1.
Image Handling
The image handling buttons allow you to store images, change the displays on which the images
appear, and change the modes of images captured to the Workstation.
Save
The save function can be used during a live X-ray or afterward to save the image
displayed on the left monitor.
Press this key while generating X-rays to save one frame of the live X-ray to the
Workstation's hard drive without interrupting live X-rays.
Press this key after you have completed the exposure to save the image displayed on the
left monitor to the Workstation's hard drive.
3-29
3. System operation
Swap
Use this function while generating live X-rays or after X-rays have been terminated.
Press this key while generating live X-rays to copy one frame of the live X-ray and move
it to the right monitor. Press it again to discard the previously swapped image and
replace it with a new image.
After X-rays have been terminated the last frame of the exposure remains on the left
monitor (last image hold). Press this key to swap the images displayed on the left and
right monitors.
If the right monitor is blank, press this key to copy the image on the left monitor to the
right monitor.
Mode
Press this key to toggle between the standard fluoroscopy mode and the vascular
imaging mode when the C-Arm is connected to a Vascular or Cardiac Workstation.
NOTE: On nonvascular systems, an audible beep sounds to signify that this function is
not available.
Workstation operation
The Workstation Setup keys on the RUI provide access to the Image Directory stored on the
Workstation and the Remote Image Processing screen.
Image Directory
Press this key to display the Image Directory screen. From this screen, you can review,
print, and archive stored images and dose information. See 8.1 Image directory on page
8-1 for more information.
Remote Image Processing
Press this key to display the Remote Image Processing screen. Use the arrow keys on
the RUI to move the cursor on the Workstation from button to button.
Figure 3-28: RUI Arrow Keys and Enter Key
3-30
3. System operation
The focus moves to the closest button in the direction of the arrow pressed.
Once you place the cursor on a touchscreen button, the button possesses the focus and
can be activated by pressing the Enter key found in the center of the RUI arrow keys.
When selecting items such as zoom boxes or markers, press the Enter key and then use
the arrow keys. To remove the focus after moving an object, press the Enter key again.
NOTE: The RUI may be used to activate any touchscreen button.
For a more detailed explanation of the Remote Image Processing screen, see 3.1
Workstation controls on page 3-1.
3.3.6 Motorized C-Arm movement and operation

The GE OEC 9900 EliteMD is equipped with motors that move the C-Arm rotationally, orbitally, and
vertically. Rotational and orbital motorized movement is controlled with the joystick on the RUI.
Vertical movement is controlled either by the vertical movement buttons on the RUI or by the
vertical movement buttons on the C-Arm control panel housing. The C-Arm can be orbited manually
by using the clutch handle to disengage the C-Arm clutch and then moving the C-Arm by hand.
NOTE: If you perform a motorized orbital or rotational C-Arm movement during a Cine run or when
Fluoro imaging, you may notice an increase in image noise. This is because the system turns
off averaging during motorized movement.
C-Arm and RUI orientation

Make sure that the LEDs on the C-Arm and RUI orientation buttons match the current orientation of
the C-Arm and the RUI with respect to the patient.
Test the orientation of C-Arm and RUI before loading a patient by moving the joystick. The C-Arm
should move away from you when you push the joystick away from you. The C-Arm movement
from side to side should correspond to the movement of the joystick from side to side.
Maximum C-Arm motorized rotational speed

The GE OEC 9900 EliteMD C-Arm has a maximum motorized rotational speed of 9° per second.
NOTE: Clear any contact or collision condition and make sure all motorized features are responding
correctly to RUI motion controls before turning off or restarting the system. Failure to do so
causes the next system startup to bring the system up with all motorized features disabled.
Contact detection
CAUTION Collisions can cause serious injury to patients and equipment. Always observe C-
Arm motion and be aware of the C-Arm position in relation to the patient.
The C-Arm is equipped with a contact detection system that activates whenever the Contact
Detection Assembly, mounted on the image intensifier, contacts another object.
3-31
3. System operation
Figure 3-29: Contact Detection assembly

When the Contact Detection Assembly encounters minimal resistance, all motorized motion is
partially disabled and the message, CONTACT DETECTED, displays on the left monitor. An audible
alarm also occurs. You can back the C-Arm away from the contacted object, but you can not move
the C-Arm toward the object. Clear the blockage to dismiss the message and fully re-enable
motorized motion.
NOTE: Before using the system, always test the contact detection assembly to make sure the system
stops properly upon contact. If the system does not stop properly, the assembly should be
removed or serviced immediately to prevent injury to the operator or patient.
Should a collision occur to another part of the C-Arm, the system detects the decrease in velocity
and increased resistance to movement, and shuts down all motorized features. The message,
COLLISION DETECTED, displays on the left monitor. Motion stops when the system senses forces
that exceed predefined internal limits. To re-enable motorized movement, you must clear the
blockage and move the C-Arm 2° back from the point of contact.
NOTE: If contact is detected by the Contact Detection Assembly when the joystick is not active, (for
example if the contact assembly is bumped when the C-Arm is not in motion) the system limits
motion speed to 3°/second when the joystick is activated and used to move the C-Arm. Once
the contact is cleared, normal motion speed is restored.
NOTE: Clear any contact or collision condition and make sure all motorized features are responding
correctly to RUI motion controls before turning off or restarting the system. Failure to do so
causes the next system startup to bring the system up with all motorized features disabled.
Rotational speed
CAUTION Make sure the C-Arm and RUI are properly oriented before using the joystick for
motorized movement.
The C-Arm, both 9 inch image intensifier and 12 inch image intensifier, can rotate through a
complete circle. The C-Arm can move 270° in one direction and 90° in the opposite direction, as
shown in the following picture. Angular position and direction of movement information displays on
the left monitor.
3-32
3. System operation
NOTE: Angle display during replay of a Cine run is sometimes not current with the rest of the data on
the left monitor.
Figure 3-30: C-Arm with 9 inch I.I. rotational movement
Orbital movement
CAUTION Make sure the C-Arm and RUI are properly oriented before using joystick for
motorized movement.
The C-Arm with a 9 inch image intensifier can move through 143° orbitally, as shown in the
following picture. A C-Arm with a 12 inch image intensifier can move through 125° orbitally.
Information about Angular position and direction of movement displays on the left monitor.
NOTE: The system does not report uncommanded rotational motion of less than 3°.
NOTE: Angle display during replay of a Cine run is sometimes not current with the rest of the data on
the left monitor.
Figure 3-31: GE OEC Motorized C-Arm with 9 in I.I. orbital movement
Vertical movement
WARNING: Be especially careful when moving the C-Arm vertically. It is very easy to collide
with the patient table or objects under the table. The system has no contact or
collision detection capability for vertical movement.
Use the vertical movement keys on the RUI or on the top of the control panel housing to move the C-
3-33
3. System operation
Arm vertically.
Figure 3-32: Vertical movement
3.3.7 Manual movement

You can manually move the C-Arm horizontally using the horizontal cross-arm handle. You can
manually move the C-Arm orbitally by disengaging the orbital clutch. Manual rotation of the C-Arm
is not possible without special tools.
Manual horizontal movement

CAUTION Make sure the cross-arm brake is fully engaged before using motorized movement.
To move the C-Arm horizontally, disengage the horizontal cross-arm brake and then push or pull the
cross-arm handle to move the C-Arm.
Figure 3-33: Horizontal movement
NOTE: The cross-arm brake may be used to apply light tension, and allow some movement of the
cross-arm, while restricting free-drift.
Manual orbital movement

To move the C-Arm orbitally, disengage the clutch on the C-Arm and then use the handles on the
image intensifier to move the C-Arm.
3-34
3. System operation
Figure 3-34: Operating the C-Arm Orbital Clutch

Pull the clutch handle toward the rear of the C-Arm to disengage the clutch. After the C-Arm is in the
desired position, release the clutch handle to re-engage the clutch and hold the C-Arm in place.
NOTE: The orbital clutch allows limited movement of the C-Arm if the image intensifier or X-ray tube
bumps an object, or if the mainframe hits a bump while you push it down a hallway. This is
an impact-absorbing feature that protects the equipment from damage.
NOTE: While the clutch is disengaged, no motion can be initiated from the RUI. The clutch must be
re-engaged, to restore RUI motion control.
3-35
3. System operation
3-36
4. Patient information and exams

This section provides information about the following topics:
l Patient information screen
l Scheduled exams
l Saved exams
4.1 Patient information screen

Use the Patient Information screen to:
l Enter patient information.
l Display Scheduled Exams screen and begin a new exam.
l Display Saved Exams screen and select a previously saved exam containing images.
l Edit patient information.
NOTE: For proper documentation of images, you should always enter patient information before
beginning a new exam. If a patient name is not entered, images will be saved under the
default name "UNNAMED."
NOTE: You also may change the image profile used for the patient by touching Change Profile. See
5.4 Anatomical profile on page 5-8 for information on using Anatomical Profiles.
The Patient Information screen displays automatically at system start-up.
Figure 4-1: Patient Information screen

Press the Patient Information key on the Workstation keyboard to display this
screen at any time.
The active boxes are defined in the Customize Patient Information screen in the Customize
4-1
function. Inactive boxes are "ghosted" and cannot be selected. See 2.1 Workstation overview on
page 2-1 for details.
A cursor indicates which box you are in. Use the Tab or Enter key, or touch the next box to move the
cursor to the next active box.
Once you begin imaging, switch screens or touch Exit, the boxes are locked. To edit the boxes, touch
Edit on the Patient Information screen.
4.1.1 Select current patient

Before images are taken you must select a current patient record to receive the images. The current
patient is selected in one of the following ways.
l Enter the patient information for the current patient in the Patient Information screen.
l Select a patient record from the Scheduled Exams screen.
l Resume an exam by selecting a patient record from the Select Current Patient screen.
4.1.2 Change current patient

1. To change the current patient from the Select Current Patient screen, press the Patient
Information key on the keyboard. The Patient Information screen displays.
2. Touch Resume Exam… on the screen. A screen similar to the following displays.
Figure 4-2: Select Current Patient Screen

The Select Current Patient screen displays an alphabetical list of patient records for whom
images have been stored on the system. To sort the list by date or by physician, touch the By
Date or the By Physician button on the screen. If the list is longer than can be displayed on a
single screen, use the arrow keys on the screen to scroll through the list.
4-2
3. Select the desired patient from the list.

4. Touch OK to return to the Patient Information screen and to make the selected patient the
current patient. The system is now ready for you to begin taking X-rays.
4.1.3 Enter patient information

Enter patient information immediately before a procedure.
At system startup, use the keyboard to enter patient information as follows:
Last Name Enter the patient's last name.
First Name Enter the patient's first name.
M.I. Enter the first letter of the patient's middle name.
Birthdate Enter the patient's birth date as MM DD YYYY.
Sex Enter the patient’s sex as M or F.
Patient ID Enter the patient ID.
Physician Enter the physician's name according to DICOM format: Last^First^MI. Use a ^
between the names, not a comma (that is, jones^jason^h^jr.).
If supported by the server being queried, use * for a general search of a name. (that is,
Jones*) Check the server's DICOM Conformance Sheet for more information.
Procedure Enter a brief description of the planned procedure.
Comments Enter comments.
Accession # Enter the accession number.
When you have finished entering patient information, you can begin taking X-rays, touch Exit , or
touch New Exam.
If you begin taking X-rays, the Patient information screen closes automatically and the Main
screen displays. The patient you have just entered becomes the current patient.
If you touch Exit, the patient you have just entered becomes the current patient, the Patient
Information screen closes, and the Main screen displays. The system is ready for you to begin
taking X-rays.
If you touch New Exam, the patient information you have just entered is saved in the Scheduled
Exams list and the Patient Information screen is cleared.
NOTE: Each time you choose New Exam or Scheduled Exams, the C-Arm settings are reset to the
system default parameters. This includes the Cine overwrite warning, fluoro timer,
contrast/brightness, noise filtering and mode settings. The collimator leaves and iris on the
C-Arm adjust to a full open position.
C-Arm settings are not retained with the exam information. When the current patient is
changed, imaging parameters will be reset to the system default values. When returning to
re-image the patient, any parameters you were using for that patient need to be specified
again. See 2. System setup and positioning on page 2-1 for any settings that can be pre-
determined for default.
4-3
4.1.4 Edit patient information

By touching the Edit button on the Patient Information screen, you can edit the displayed patient's
information.
Figure 4-3: Patient Information Screen Edit Button
NOTE: Editing general patient information modifies information stored with all images for that patient
exam. Editing the Comment function during an exam changes the information on the new
image and any subsequent images. The information in the Comment section for previous
images during the exam stays the same.
NOTE: The Comment line is always active and does not require this procedure to edit.
1. Touch Edit.
2. Highlight the patient field to be edited.
3. Edit information as needed.
4. Touch EXIT to update and return to the Main screen.
NOTE: To edit patient information on a previously saved record in Scheduled Exams or Saved Exams,
recall the exam and follow the instructions for editing information.
To edit the Comment line:

1. Redisplay the Patient Information screen.
2. Select the Comment line.
3. Enter new information.
4. Touch Exit to update and return to the Main screen.
The comment in the upper left hand side of the left monitor display will update for the current image
and subsequent images. You may still use the Comment function on the Image Annotation screen
to add post-processing comments to an image.
4-4
4.2 Scheduled exams

The scheduled exams feature allows you to enter patient information prior to exams and retrieve it
at the beginning of the procedure.
Patient information can be stored in Scheduled Exams for 48 hours. If X-rays are not taken within
48 hours, the record is deleted. Once an X-ray image has been saved, the patient record is moved to
Saved Exams.
4.2.1 Set up the Scheduled Exams feature

NOTE: To update the work list from the hospital network, see 9.1 DICOM setup and configuration on
page 9-1.
1. Complete the Patient Information screen.

2. Touch New Exam to send the information to the Scheduled Exams screen. An empty Patient
Information screen displays.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each patient's information to be saved in Scheduled Exams. X-rays
for each patient must be taken within 48 hours.
4. When completed, touch New Exam to send the last patient information entered to the
Scheduled Exams list, or Exit to begin imaging that patient.
NOTE: If you perform this function during or prior to an exam, reselect the current patient being
imaged before continuing exam.
4.2.2 Select a patient from Scheduled Exams

1. Touch Scheduled Exams from the Patient Information screen.
Figure 4-4: Patient Information Screen

A screen similar to the following displays.
4-5
Figure 4-5: Scheduled Exams Screen

The Scheduled Exams screen displays an alphabetical list of scheduled patients. To list by
physician, touch By Physician on the screen.
2. Touch a patient field. If the list of patients is longer than can be displayed in a single screen
use the arrow keys on the touchscreen to scroll through the list.
3. Touch OK to close the Scheduled Exams screen and display the Patient Information screen
for the selected patient.
You may begin taking X-rays for the selected patient.
NOTE: Always ensure the correct patient name displays on the patient information screen before
producing X-rays; otherwise, images may be stored under an incorrect patient’s name.
Scheduled exam list

1. To select the current patient from the scheduled exams list, press the Patient Information
key on the keyboard.
When the Patient Information screen displays, touch Scheduled Exams on the screen.
The Scheduled Exams screen displays an alphabetical list of patient records that have been
entered in the Patient Information screen and saved with the New Exam button and for
whom no images have been stored on the system.
To sort the list by physician, touch By Physician on the screen. If the list is longer than can be
displayed on a single screen, use the arrow keys on the screen to scroll through the list.
2. Select the desired patient from the list.
3. Touch OK to return to the Patient Information screen and to make the selected patient the
4-6
NOTE: Each time you choose New Exam or Scheduled Exams, the C-Arm settings are reset to
default parameters. This includes the Cine overwrite warning, fluoro timer,
contrast/brightness, noise filtering and mode settings. The collimator leaves and iris on the C-
Arm adjust to a full open position.
changed, any imaging parameters that are set will be reset to the system default values.
When returning to re-image the patient, any parameters you were using for that patient need
to be specified again. See 2. System setup and positioning on page 2-1 for any settings that
can be pre-determined for default.
4.2.3 Update schedule - schedule filter

The Update Schedule and Schedule Filter buttons in the Scheduled Exams screen are used to
retrieve patient records from a DICOM Work List Query server. If the Workstation is not connected to
a DICOM network or if the DICOM servers are not defined on the Workstation, the Update Schedule
and Schedule Filter buttons are not active on the Scheduled Exams screen.
1. To retrieve patient records using the Update Schedule button, make sure that a DICOM Work
List Query Server is defined for the Workstation. See 9.1 DICOM setup and configuration on
page 9-1.
2. Touch Update Schedule to retrieve patient records from the DICOM server defined for the
Workstation. This operation may take some time depending on the number of records
available on the DICOM server and the speed of the network.
3. The Update Schedule operation can retrieve up to 500 records. Touch Schedule Filter to limit
the number of records displayed. A screen similar to following displays.
Figure 4-6: Schedule Filter screen
4-7
4. Enter information into the Schedule Filter screen to search for patient records that meet the
filter criteria.
Modality Choose RF, XA, SC, or ALL.

RF X-ray Radio Fluoroscopic Image Storage
XA X-ray Angiographic Image Storage
SC Secondary Capture Image Storage
ALL Select ALL unless querying for a specific modality
NOTE: No error checking is done for date or time values so results from the server will vary.
5. Select Get Today's Exams, or enter information for a refined query in the next section.
The lower half of the Schedule Filter screen provides a way to refine or filter your search of the
DICOM work list. Multiple information entries may be used to refine your filter.
6. Enter the specific filtering criteria needed.
Patient Name Enter patient's name according to DICOM Format: Last^First^MI.

Use a ^ between the names, not a comma. (that is, jones^jason^h^jr.)
If supported by the server being queried, use * for a general search of a
name. (that is, Jones*) Check the server's DICOM Conformance Sheet
for more information.
Accession Enter the accession number.
NOTE: The Accession field is always enabled on the DICOM query directory screen. The accession box
may be enabled or disabled on the Patient Information screen. This is set up in the Set Up
Patient Information screen.
Study Date YYYYMMDD. You must use this format. No spaces or other characters other than
numbers are allowed. You can enter a date range using the following formats:
-YYYYMMDDT retrieves all studies before and including this date.
YTYYYMMDD-T retrieves all studies after and including this date.
YTYYYMMDD-YYYMMDDT retrieves all studies between and including these dates.
Study Time HHMMSS. Use this format to enter the time. Use the same syntax as that used for
Study Date.
Time is entered based on 24 hours. (that is, 2:00 pm is entered 140000.)
Physician Enter the physician's name according to DICOM format: Last^First^MI. See Patient
Name above for more details.
Patient DOB Enter all or part of the patient’s date of birth using the same formatting as the Study
Date entry. Then select the modality used with the scheduled patient(s) you wish to
see.
4-8
7. Touch OK. The Schedule Filter screen closes, and the Scheduled Exams screen displays.
8. Touch Update Schedule and the patient names, filtered according to the criteria entered in
the filter screen, display.
9. Select a patient from the list.
10. Touch OK to return to the Patient Information screen to make the selected patient the
NOTE: Always ensure the correct patient name displays on the Patient Information screen before
producing X-rays; otherwise, images may be stored under an incorrect patient’s name.
NOTE: Each time you choose New Exam or Scheduled Exams, the C-Arm settings are reset to default
parameters. This includes the Cine overwrite warning, fluoro timer, contrast/brightness, noise
filtering and mode settings. The collimator leaves and iris on the C-Arm adjust to a full open
position.
changed, any imaging parameters that are set will be reset to the system default values. When
returning to re-image the patient, any parameters you were using for that patient need to be
specified again. See 2. System setup and positioning on page 2-1 for any settings that can be
pre-determined for default.
4.3 Saved exams

The Saved Exams screen is used to view images and information from a saved patient exam. It
contains a list of previously saved exams. If no images were saved during an exam, the system will
not save the patient information. If a last name was not entered for the patient before X-rays were
produced, images are stored under the last name "UNNAMED."
4.3.1 Access the Saved Exam images

CAUTION A patient selected from the Saved Exams screen for display in the Image Directory
screen does not become the current patient. Any new images taken will be added to
the current patient selected from the Patient Information screen.
1. From any screen, press the Image Directory key on the keyboard to display the Image
Directory screen.
4-9
Figure 4-7: Image Directory Screen

2. Touch Saved Exams on the Image Directory screen to display the Saved Exams screen that
is similar to the following.
Figure 4-8: Saved Exams Screen

This screen lists patient exams that have been saved on the system. Use the arrow keys on
the touchscreen to scroll through the list.
3. Select the patient whose images you wish to review, touch OK. The system returns to the
Image Directory screen.
The patient information for the selected patient displays along with the images associated
with the selected patient.
4-10
4.3.2 Access Saved Exam patient information

1. On the Patient Information screen, touch Saved Exams to view a list of patients examined.
Figure 4-9: Patient Information Screen

The Saved Exams list displays patients alphabetically, by last name.
l Select By Date to display the list chronologically.
l Select By Physician to display the list alphabetically, by doctor.
2. Touch a patient field and then touch OK to display the Patient Information screen for that
patient. If the list of patients is longer than can be displayed in a single screen use the arrow
keys on the touchscreen to scroll through the list.
The Patient Information screen now contains all the information stored for the selected
patient's exam. You can:
3. Edit information in the patient record you just recalled.
4. Produce additional X-rays. Images will be saved using the date and time of the original exam.
NOTE: Always ensure the correct patient displays on the Patient Information screen before
producing X-rays. Otherwise, images may be stored under the incorrect patient name.
4-11
4-12
5. Imaging
5. Imaging
This chapter describes how to produce images using the basic fluoroscopy features provided on all
systems, and how to produce images using vascular imaging modes provided on non-ESP/GSP
systems.
l Modes of operation
l Image save and auto save
l X-ray switch setup
l Anatomical profile
l Fluoro imaging
l Vascular imaging
l Cardiac imaging
l Radiation display
5.1 Modes of operation

The GE OEC 9900 Elite Workstation employs a variety of modes of operation for maximum flexibility
in a number of imaging procedures. This section contains information on the various modes of
operation, technical information, as well as specifics on using the various modes.
5.1.1 Automatic and manual exposure control

Press the AUTO technique button in the Generator control section of the C-Arm control panel, near
the kVp and mA/mAs control buttons, to toggle between automatic and manual exposure control.
l When automatic exposure control is selected, the LED next to the AUTO button illuminates. If
an X-ray control switch is pressed, the system automatically adjusts the kV and mA to
acquire an X-ray image.
l When manual exposure control is selected, the LED next to the AUTO button is dark. If an
X-ray control switch is pressed, kVp and mA can be independently adjusted before or during
the generation of X-rays.
The system defaults to automatic exposure control of X-ray technique (kVp and mA).
NOTE: Automatic exposure control is recommended for most imaging situations. It will auto-
matically acquire the desired X-ray image with technique factors that minimize the amount
of radiation exposure.
5.1.2 Mode groups

A mode pair can be selected from each imaging group.
Only one mode pair is active at a time. The active mode pair displays on the status bar.
Continuous X-ray is the default. See 5.5.4 Pulsed X-ray on page 5-11 for more information on
5-1
5. Imaging
enabling and setting pulse rates. See 5.6.6 Digital pulse Cine on page 5-23 for more information on
setting digital Cine pulse rates.
5.1.3 Access modes

All fluoro modes used on the GE OEC 9900 Elite can be engaged, disengaged, and modified in a
variety of ways including mode keys on the C-Arm control panel, and the two and three pedal
footswitches, and on the Remote User Interface on motorized C-Arms. Additionally, modes can be
accessed using the Mode screen displayed on the right monitor of the Workstation. Use the Mode
screen to assign functions to the footswitch.
5.1.4 Mode screen in Fluoro imaging

A Mode screen is provided to enable you to set up your choice of anatomical profiles and imaging
pairs and to select pulse rates. The following examples display how to set up the anatomical profile,
mode and pulse rate for standard fluoroscopy.
On the Main screen, touch Mode....
Figure 5-1: Main Screen

A screen similar to the following displays on the right monitor.
Figure 5-2: Mode Screen (GSP system on left; Cardiac system on right)
NOTE: The Change Profile… button is not active if the Workstation is not connected to a C-Arm.
5-2
5. Imaging
5.1.5 Mode display

The current active mode and related settings display in the status bar at the bottom of the Mode
screen. The Mode screen and status bar are similar to the following.
1- Standard fluoro modes

2- Vascular modes
3- Mode status bar
Figure 5-3: Mode Screen
NOTE: The Mode Status Bar show the setting of the footswitch buttons. See 5.1.12 Footswitches and
modes on page 5-6 in this section for more information.
5.1.6 Status bar

The status bar is located on the bottom right monitor display. During an exam, the configured active
mode pair displays on the status bar.
NOTE: The status bar is not displayed on all right monitors.
A status bar similar to the one below displays :
Figure 5-4: Example status bar

All information next to the or icon describes which imaging, anatomical profile, and pulse
or Cine rate is applied using the X-ray switch with that label.
If film mode is selected, the film icon displays in the status bar.
Figure 5-5: Status bar film mode
5-3
5. Imaging
1. A Fluoro shot can be initiated by pressing the left X-ray switch.

2. A High Level Fluoro (HLF) shot can be initiated by pressing the X-ray switch.
NOTE: For producing film shots, see 9.5.1 Make a film exposure on page 9-26.
5.1.7 X-ray switch mode setup for fluoro imaging
To change the active mode, select the desired button. The highlighted bar displays next to the
selected button and the status bar reflects the change.
The left X-ray switch can be set to initiate Fluoro imaging or to enable Roadmap.
The right X-ray switch can be set to initiate HLF, Dig. Spot, or Subtract whichever is
active. Additionally you can set the Pulse Rate and Cine Rate.
The status bar indicates which mode you have selected.
5.1.8 Mode pairs

A mode pair can be selected from each imaging group.
Only one mode pair is active at a time. The active mode pair displays on the status bar.
Continuous X-ray is the default. See 5.5.4 Pulsed X-ray on page 5-11 for more information on
enabling and setting pulse rates. See 5.6.6 Digital pulse Cine on page 5-23 for more information on
setting digital Cine pulse rates.
5.1.9 Switching mode pairs

You can switch modes using the Mode screen on the Workstation or using the Mode switch on the
C-Arm.
See 2.3 C-Arm overview and setup on page 2-17 for locations of the Mode switch on the system
being used.
To change the imaging mode pairs available during a procedure, use the Mode screen on the
Workstation. Always refer to the status bar to determine the active modes available.
5.1.10 Set up imaging modes available during the exam

In this example, a basic fluoro image and a roadmap need to be taken.
1. Touch Mode on the Main screen.
The default setting for standard fluoroscopy is Fluoro/HLF.
If the highlighted center bar displays next to the HLF button, the active fluoroscopy pair is
Fluoro/HLF.
If the highlighted bar is next to Dig. Spot, touch HLF to activate HLF in the standard
fluoroscopy group.
5-4
5. Imaging
1- Standard Fluoroscopy
2- Vascular
Figure 5-6: Mode Pairs on Mode Screen

The default setting for vascular is Fluoro/Subtract. Touch Roadmap to switch to
Roadmap/Subtract and move the highlighted center bar next to Roadmap.
2. Touch Exit to close the Mode screen. You are now ready to begin imaging.
3. Verify the available modes on the status bar. If the vascular mode pair (Roadmap/Subtract)
displays, press the Mode switch to display the fluoroscopy pair (Fluoro/HLF).
Figure 5-7: Mode pair status bar

4. Complete the fluoro part of the exam to view the patient anatomy.
5. Press the Mode switch to display Roadmap and Subtract on the status bar.
6. Complete the roadmap procedure. For more information on completing a subtraction
procedure, see 5.6.5 Roadmap imaging on page 5-20.
5.1.11 Imaging modes summary

The following table summarizes the modes available on the system. Additionally it shows the X-ray
techniques available with each mode, the status bar display for each mode, and a brief list of
examples for each mode. The examples are not exhaustive and other uses may be as valid as the
examples shown. The user must be aware of the techniques associated with the various modes and
monitor dose rates and doses for each patient.
Table 5-1: Imaging Table
X-ray
Mode Display Examples
Techniques
Fluoro Kv: 40 to 120 General Fluoro
mA: 0.2 to 10 Imaging and Road-
mapping
Pulsed Kv: 40 to 120 Low-dose Imaging
Fluoro mA: 0.2 to 10
High Level Kv: 40 to 120 Dense Anatomy (low
Fluoro (HLF) mA: 0.2 to 20 noise) and Subtraction
Digital Spot Kv: 40 to 120 Short Duration High mA

mA: 1.0 to 75 Imaging (a film-like shot)
5-5
5. Imaging
Digital Cine Kv: 40 to 120 Cardiac and

(Pulsed) mA: 0.2 to 150 Vascular Imaging
Pulsed HLF Kv: 40 to 120 Fluoro Video
mA: 0.2 to 40
Radiography Kv: 50 to 120 X-ray Films
mA: up to 75
mAs: 1 to 300 mAs
5.1.12 Footswitches and modes

The modes displayed in the status bar and in the Mode screen relate to the two or three pedal
footswitch as follows. Pressing a footswitch begins X-rays in the indicated mode. Releasing the
footswitch stops X-rays. Pressing the small switch, in the center of the two pedal footswitch and in
between the left and center switches of the three pedal footswitch, toggles through the available
modes and is reflected in the Mode screen.
Table 5-2: Footswitches and Modes
Two Pedal Footswitch Three Pedal Footswitch
Mode Left Right Left Middle Right

Group Footswitch Footswitch Footswitch Footswitch Footswitch
HLF or
Standard HLF or
Fluoro Digital Spot Fluoro Digital Cine
Fluoro Digital Spot
Fluoro or Fluoro or Digital Cine

Vascular Subtract Subtraction
Roadmap Roadmap (Non-subtracted)
Mode Toggle Small Center Switch Small Switch between left and center footswitches
5.1.13 Visual and audible X-ray indication

The following visual indications are provided as alerts that standard or High level fluoro (HLF) X-rays
are being generated.
X-ray C-Arm X-ray On Workstation X-ray Workstation / Audible
Mode Lamp (Yellow) On Lamp (Yellow) C-Arm Display Alarms
Fluoro On continuously On continuously “LIVE” pulses on bottom left of Pulsed alarm
left monitor
Pulsed On continuously Flashes at pulse rate “LIVE” pulses on bottom left of Pulsed alarm
Fluoro left monitor
Pulsed On continuously Flashes at pulse rate “LIVE” pulses on bottom left of Pulsed alarm at twice
HLF left monitor the rate as standard
alarm
5-6
5. Imaging
High Level On continuously On continuously “LIVE” pulses on bottom left of Pulsed alarm at twice
Fluoro left monitor the rate as standard
(HLF) alarm
Film Mode On during X-ray On during X-ray "ARMED" displays on C-Arm Beep at beginning
exposure exposure control panel when film mode and three quick
is prearmed beeps at end
Digital On during X-ray On during X-ray “LIVE” displays briefly on bot- Single audible beep
Spot exposure exposure tom left of the left monitor. X- followed by second
rays automatically terminate, beep with different
and Save icon and number of tone to indicate when
saved image display briefly on image is auto-
bottom left of left monitor. matically saved.
Digital On continuously 15 PPS: Flashes at pulse “LIVE” pulses on bottom left of Pulsed alarm
Cine rate left monitor
30 PPS: On continuously
The Reset Alarm generates a constant alarm until Alarm Reset is pressed.
5.2 Image save and auto save

When generating X-rays images, the image displays on the left Workstation monitor. When the X-
ray switch is released, X-rays are terminated and the last image or frame of the exposure is retained
on the left monitor. This is referred to as Last Image Hold.
To save the last image held on the left monitor display, press the Save key.
An auto save feature may be enabled that automatically saves the last image held on the left
monitor display during imaging. When the auto save feature is enabled, the image currently
displayed on the monitor when the X-ray switch is released is saved automatically by the system.
See Set up the Workstation on page 2-3 for information on enabling the auto save feature.
CAUTION When storage capacity has been reached, each new saved image will overwrite the old-
est image on the disk.
5.3 X-ray switch setup

The Workstation allows you to choose an anatomical profile that specifies image processing
parameters used by the Workstation. Additionally, you can choose between HLF and Digital Spot
mode for standard fluoroscopy uses. Fluoro is available at all times.
NOTE: The Mode switch is inactive on standard fluoroscopy-only systems. Screens vary based on
model configuration.
The Mode screen allows you to change the Anatomical Profile that is applied to images. The
Anatomical Profile optimizes the display of images for the selected type of imaging. To select an
appropriate Anatomical Profile for vascular imaging, touch Change Profile… on the Mode screen.
5-7
5. Imaging
5.4 Anatomical profile

The anatomical profile resets to the default profile with each new patient. If you wish to use the
default profile, you do not need to make any changes. You can change the profile in the Change
Imaging Profile screen.
NOTE: The Workstation determines which profiles are available depending on the software installed
on the Workstation and the type of C-Arm connected to the Workstation.
1. Set the anatomical profile for this patient. Touch Change Profile… on the Mode screen. A
screen similar the following displays.
Figure 5-8: Change Imaging Profile screen

2. Select the desired profile. The profile icon displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the
screen.
3. Touch OK to return to the Mode screen.
Changing the image profile allows you to quickly adjust the behavior of the system for optimal
performance in specific imaging situations. Selecting a profile optimizes image processing for the
procedure to be performed. All systems may not include all available profiles. Available profiles
include the following.
l General: The General profile provides versatility for all applications. Its image processing is
optimized for versatility providing the best images possible over a wide range of uses.
l 9800: The 9800 profile mimics the imaging behavior of the earlier GE OEC 9800 system.
l Orthopedic: The Orthopedic profile is optimized for bone contrast and small-detail visibility. It
features increased sharpness and increased noise reduction.
l Spine: The Spine Profile's X-ray technique and image processing are optimized for spine
imaging from cervical to sacrum, to provide high visibility of vertebral bodies, spinal
processes, facet joints, needles and tools in short fluoro acquisitions.
5-8
5. Imaging
l Vascular: The Vascular profile is optimized to visualize iodine-filled vessels, catheters, stents,
and other tools in vascular procedures performed in thick anatomy, such as the chest and the
abdomen, as opposed to the lighter anatomy such as legs or arms.
l Bolus Chase: The Bolus Chase profile is optimized for run-off procedures. It is tuned to
provide the appearance and the advantages of a subtracted run, although the image is not
actually subtracted and thus can support motion.
l Cardiac: The Cardiac profile is optimized for cardiac procedures. It enhances the visibility of
moving features and vessels filled with a contrast agent.
l P-Vas: The P-Vas profile is optimized to visualize contrast-filled vessels, catheters, stents, and
other tools in vascular procedures, with enhanced digital subtraction angiography (DSA) for,
but not limited to, peripheral vascular imaging, especially in low dose or pulsed mode. When
performing DSA or Roadmapping in low dose or pulsed modes, select Peripheral Vascular
profile to optimize image processing for desired image quality.
The selected profile optimizes image processing for the selected type of imaging. Changing an image
profile affects the detail of captured images.
NOTE: The default profile can be set to any of the profiles available in the Change Profile screen. See
2.1 Workstation overview on page 2-1 for information on selecting a default profile.
5.5 Fluoro imaging

All systems provide standard fluoroscopy modes. Fluoroscopy mode is the only mode available on
the GSP and ESP models of the Workstation. Vascular and Cardiac systems provide basic fluoro as
well as vascular features. For an explanation of vascular imaging features, see 5.6 Vascular imaging
on page 5-12.
5.5.1 Fluoro mode

Fluoro mode displays live fluoroscopic images on the left monitor.
Produce a fluoro Image

1. Verify that Fluoro displays on the status bar.
2. Select pulsed X-ray or low dose, if desired. Use the Mode screen or the C-Arm PULSE key to
switch between continuous and pulsed X-rays.
3. Press the left X-ray switch on the footswitch, handswitch, or the X-ray On switch on the
C-Arm.
After the image has been obtained, image attributes such as edge enhancement or contrast and
brightness can be modified.
5-9
5. Imaging
5.5.2 High Level Fluoro Imaging (HLF)

WARNING: HLF should not be used for general purpose imaging. To minimize X-ray
exposure hazards, use HLF with discretion.
During continuous HLF, the mA can increase to as much as 20 mA. During
pulsed HLF the mA can increase to as much as 40 mA. This can subject the
patient and those working around the X-ray field to a significantly larger dose
of radiation than they would receive during fluoro or pulsed fluoro operation.
High Level Fluoro (HLF) mode decreases noise level and improves image quality by increasing
fluoroscopic mA.
Continuous HLF uses mA levels up to 20 mA.
Pulsed HLF ranging from 1-8 PPS provides pulsed fluorography. When using HLF mode, mA can
increase up to 40 mA.
Automatic termination of HLF and pulsed HLF exposure occurs after each 30-second interval of
continuous use. Automatic exposure termination reduces unnecessary X-ray exposure and is
designed to comply with X-ray tube ratings. An HLF OVERTIME message displays on the control
panel housing.
Produce a standard HLF image

1. Verify that HLF displays on the status bar. If Dig. Spot displays, use the Mode screen to select
HLF.
2. Select pulsed X-ray generation on the Mode screen or C-Arm control panel, if desired.
Continuous X-ray is the default. If pulsed operation is chosen, the pulse rate displays on the
status bar.
3. Press the X-ray switch on the footswitch or handswitch to make HLF exposures.
5.5.3 Digital spot

Digital Spot mode creates a short-duration, high-mA exposure to produce a high-quality single
image.
After the image has been obtained, image attributes such as edge enhancement or contrast and
brightness can be modified. Pulsed operation is not allowed in digital spot mode.
Produce a Digital Spot image

1. Touch DIG. SPOT from the Mode screen. Verify that DIG. SPOT displays on the status bar.
2. Press the left X-ray switch on the footswitch, handswitch or the X-ray On switch to
confirm positioning.
3. When the desired image displays on the monitor, release the left X-ray switch and then
press and hold the X-ray switch to obtain the digital spot image.
5-10
5. Imaging
4. The system automatically terminates the exposure and saves the Digital Spot image on the
hard disk.
NOTE: If you release the footswitch early, the exposure will prematurely terminate. Continue pressing
the switch until the system automatically terminates the exposure.
5.5.4 Pulsed X-ray

This section describes how to select and change pulse rates, and switch between continuous and
pulsed imaging.
Pulsed mode generates a preset number of X-ray pulses each second while the X-ray switch is
pressed. Pulsed X-rays can be used to reduce total radiation.
Use of a pulsed fluoro mode can significantly reduce the dose received by the patient, however,
image quality may be degraded in pulsed fluoro modes.
See 5.6.6 Digital pulse Cine on page 5-23 for a description of Digital Pulse Cine.
NOTE: Pulse rates available may vary based on which system you have purchased.
When continuous mode is active, no pulse rate (PPS) displays on the status bar.
Figure 5-9: Status bar – continuous mode
Enable pulsed X-ray

To enable pulsed operation at the currently selected pulse rate, press the Pulse key on the C-Arm or
touch Pulse on the Mode screen.
When pulse is enabled, the Pulse button on the Mode screen is highlighted and the pulse rate (PPS)
displays on the status bar.
Figure 5-10: Status Bar – Pulse Mode

The default pulse rate is 8 PPS.
CAUTION Combined use of both a pulsed fluoro mode and the low dose mode may have a com-
pounding effect in degrading image quality.
CAUTION Use of the low dose mode can significantly reduce the dose received by the patient; how-
ever, image quality may be degraded in low dose.
NOTE: If the system defaults have been configured to operate at lower doses, the Low Dose button
on the C-Arm control panel may not provide further dose reduction. To determine if your
system defaults are configured for low dose operation, contact service to determine if the
International B ABS table is configured on your system.
5-11
5. Imaging
NOTE: To reselect continuous operation, press the Pulse key on the C-Arm control panel or touch the
Pulse on the Mode screen. The pulse rates will no longer display on the status bar and the
Pulse button on the Mode screen will not be highlighted.
Change the pulse rate

1. Touch Rate from the Mode screen.
Figure 5-11: Fluoroscopy Pulse Rate Button (Cardiac shown)

Figure 5-12: Pulse Rate Screen

2. Select a pulse rate from the pulse rate screen. The selected pulse rate displays automatically
on the status bar and the screen closes automatically.
3. Touch Exit on the Mode screen to return to the Main screen.
5.6 Vascular imaging

Vascular imaging features include:
l Subtraction
l Roadmapping
l Digital Cine Pulse
NOTE: Vascular and Cardiac systems include all standard fluoroscopy features.
5-12
5. Imaging
See 5.5 Fluoro imaging on page 5-9 for basic fluoro information. Read the Fluoro Imaging section
before beginning vascular imaging procedures.
5.6.1 X-ray switch setup for vascular imaging

On vascular systems, two image modalities (standard fluoroscopy and vascular) are available at
start-up. Press the Mode key on the X-ray switches or C-Arm control panel to change from one pair
of imaging modes to another.
To verify which group is active and which mode pairs are available, always check the status bar
display on the right monitor.
5.6.2 Mode screen in Vascular imaging

The Mode screen allows you to set up your choice of available imaging pairs during a procedure.
Vascular and cardiac systems provide slightly different mode screens allowing for the different
features necessary to these systems. The following examples show how to set up the anatomical
profile, mode, and pulse rates for vascular imaging.
Use the Mode screen to:
l Change imaging mode pairs that are available from the X-ray switches during a procedure.
l Select pulse rates.
l Change anatomical profiles.
l Access Mode… from the Main screen.

Vascular, Cardiac, and Bolus Chase profiles are available for vascular imaging. Selecting a profile
optimizes image processing for the procedure to be performed. When a profile is selected its icon
displays in the status bar. For vascular imaging, select one of the vascular modes then touch OK to
return to the Mode screen.
5-13
5. Imaging
Available Mode Groups
Figure 5-14: Mode screen

The Mode screen allows you to change the Anatomical Profile that is applied to images. The
Anatomical Profile optimizes the display of images for the selected type of imaging. To select an
appropriate Anatomical Profile for vascular imaging, touch Change Profile… on the Mode screen. A
screen similar to the following displays.
Figure 5-15: Anatomical Profile screen with vascular profiles highlighted

Vascular, Cardiac, Bolus Chase, and P-Vas profiles are available for vascular imaging. Selecting a
profile optimizes image processing for the procedure to be performed. When a profile is selected its
icon appears in the status bar. For vascular imaging, select one of the vascular modes then select OK
to return to the Mode screen.
There are two available mode groups for use in vascular imaging:
5-14
5. Imaging
1- Standard Fluoroscopy mode group

2- Vascular mode group
3- The current profile icon displays
Figure 5-16: Mode Groups for Vascular Imaging
5.6.3 Change the vascular pulse rate

1. Select the rate button on the Mode screen. The Digital Cine Pulse rate dialog box
displays.
Figure 5-17: Fluoro pulse rates

2. Select a pulse rate from the Digital Cine Pulse rate dialog box. The pulse rate will display on
the status bar and the dialog box will automatically close.
3. Touch EXIT on the Mode screen to return to the Main screen.
Vascular Systems
When the system is first turned on, the default available imaging modes and the active anatomical
profile display on the status bar.
5-15
5. Imaging
Figure 5-18: Vascular Mode Screen With Fluoroscopy Active

Press the left X-ray switch to initiate a fluoro shot.
Press the right X-ray switch to initiate an HLF shot or Digital Spot image (when
DIG. SPOT displays on the status bar).
Press the Mode key on the X-ray switch or on the C-Arm control panel to switch to vascular
imaging.
Figure 5-19: Vascular Mode Screen With Vascular Active

With vascular active, the status bar displays Roadmap and Subtract or Fluoro and Subtract.
Press the left X-ray switch to initiate a roadmap or fluoro shot.
Press the right X-ray switch to initiate a subtraction.
For more instructions on creating a roadmap or subtraction, see 5.6.5 Roadmap imaging on page 5-
20 or 5.6.4 Subtraction imaging on page 5-17.
5-16
5. Imaging
Figure 5-20: Pulse rates 50 hZ system (left) and 60hZ system (right)
5.6.4 Subtraction imaging

Real-time subtraction provides images that reflect the difference between current fluoroscopic
images and a mask image obtained at the start of the subtraction process. The result displays on
the left monitor. The live, unsubtracted fluoro image displays on the right monitor. By default,
subtracted images are acquired to the Cine disk. Real-time subtraction is primarily used for contrast
studies, such as angiography.
Peak opacification can be applied during post-processing.
CAUTION Do not use pulsed fluoro modes for subtraction or roadmap imaging. Use of pulsed
fluoro modes for subtraction or roadmapping may result in poor image quality.
NOTE: The noise filtering level may only be modified during playback of a 30 FPS (25 FPS on 50 Hz)
Cine run.
Sequence of events during subtraction

The System software automatically performs several steps during real-time subtraction. To illustrate
the process, a timeline diagram of a typical subtraction is shown below.
5-17
5. Imaging
Figure 5-21: Event Sequence During Subtraction

The sequence of events shown on the timeline includes:
1. The X-ray switch is pressed to begin the exposure. The X-ray
technique stabilizes.
2. The mask is acquired and technique is locked.
NOTE: Any movement results in a mask and incoming image mismatch.
3. Mask image has been acquired and the subtraction process begins.
The left monitor displays a uniform gray result and the system begins subtracting images and
displaying them. As long as the subtraction continues, new images are subtracted from the
mask obtained at the beginning of the Cine run. As images are acquired, a syringe icon
displays indicating that the system is ready for contrast to be injected.
4. Contrast is injected, and the subtracted images display on the left monitor. Vessels are
outlined with contrast.
5. The contrast concentration peaks.
6. Contrast concentration decreases to a minimum.
7. When the footswitch is released, the last subtracted image displays on the left monitor.
NOTE: Releasing the X-ray switch at any time during this procedure terminates the subtraction
process.
Subtraction procedure
1. Press the Mode switch to activate vascular mode, if necessary.
2. Verify that SUBTRACT displays on the status bar.
Cine is set automatically. To change the Cine frame rate, use the Cine Setup screen. See 6.
Dynamic recording on page 6-1 for more information.
3. Press and hold the X-ray switch to begin the subtraction process and create a mask
automatically. Acquiring and creating the mask image can take up to 2 seconds.
5-18
5. Imaging
4. After the mask is acquired, continue pressing the X-ray switch to subtract subsequent
images from the mask. Subtraction begins when a subtracted image and a Cine frame
number display on the left monitor.
5. An injection icon displays on the left monitor, signaling the operator to inject a contrast
media. If an approved injector is properly connected to the Workstation, a signal is sent to the
injector.
Subtracted images display on the left monitor as the contrast concentration peaks and
decreases to a minimum.
6. Release the X-ray switch to end the subtraction.

The subtraction Cine run plays back automatically on the left monitor unless auto Cine playback
has been disabled.
NOTE: Pressing the Swap key replaces the temporary image on the right monitor with the image on
the left monitor.
See Setup screen on page 2-2 for details on auto playback. See 6. Dynamic recording on page 6-1
for a description of the Cine Playback screen.
Adjust the mask
NOTE: This feature is available for Subtraction and Roadmapping imaging.
Registration
If the patient moves during a subtraction run or roadmap fluoro, misalignment of the mask and
incoming images could cause a poor image. Registration allows you to move the mask image to
produce an accurate registration by realigning the mask and the incoming images. You can realign
the mask during the procedure, or during playback if the images are saved.
To register the roadmap mask:
1. Touch Adjust Mask on the Main screen or the Cine Playback screen. The Adjust Mask screen
displays.
2. Use the mask registration buttons to align the mask image with the incoming images.
3. Touch Reset on the screen to restore the mask to its original position.
Figure 5-22: Adjust Mask Screen
5-19
5. Imaging
Landmarking
In some subtracted images, it may be necessary to see the position of vessels in relation to certain
background anatomies. Landmarking allows you to vary the percentage of background anatomy
that displays in a subtracted image. This function is available for subtraction and roadmapping.
To vary the percentage of background anatomy:
1. Touch Adjust Mask on the Main screen or the Cine Playback screen.
2. Touch the landmarking buttons.

3. Touch Exit to close the Adjust Mask screen.
The mask is adjusted in 5% increments with each press of the landmark button.
5.6.5 Roadmap imaging

Roadmap mode provides a subtracted image on the left monitor that is the difference between the
current fluoroscopic image and a mask image. The result on the left monitor is a roadmap of the
vasculature showing the catheter or contrast as it moves. During roadmapping, the right monitor
displays the live, unsubtracted image.
Peak opacification is enabled automatically during the first phase of roadmapping (mask
acquisition). When peak opacification is applied, each pixel is compared, as it is acquired, to its
counterpart in the previous image. If the new pixel is darker than in the previous image, the old pixel
is replaced. When this process is complete, the resulting image contains the darkest pixels acquired
for each point. Opacification is turned off during the second phase of roadmapping.
Continuous X-ray mode should be used for roadmapping.
NOTE: If you are using a mechanical contrast injector, no signal from the Workstation is sent when
the injection icon displays on the left monitor. The injection of contrast should be manually
initiated.
Sequence of events during Roadmap imaging

The software automatically performs several steps during roadmapping. The following timeline
illustrates the roadmap process.
Figure 5-23: The Roadmapping Process.
5-20
5. Imaging
Roadmap 1st Phase

1. When the left footswitch is pressed, the X-ray technique adjusts and stabilizes. Roadmap
– 1 displays in the left status bar.
2. The inject icon displays on the left monitor. The contrast injection should begin, after which
the contrast concentration in the image increases.
3. An image of the vessels and contrast displays on the left monitor at or near peak
concentration.
4. The footswitch is released. (The footswitch can be released anytime during steps 4 or 5. Peak
opacification is applied automatically.)
5. The last image is saved automatically as the mask, and the X-ray technique is frozen.
6. Peak opacification causes the areas darkened by the contrast to retain their darkest values in
the mask image.
Roadmap 2nd Phase

1. The roadmap subtraction begins when the left X-ray switch is pressed again. Roadmap –
2 displays in the left status bar
2. The X-ray technique remains the same as it was during the mask acquisition. Pressing the left
X-ray switch continues roadmapping. As roadmapping continues, new incoming images
are subtracted from the mask image. The result displays on the left monitor.
Roadmap procedure
1. Verify that Fluoro displays on the status bar.
2. Press the left X-ray switch to create a fluoro image to confirm position.
3. Press Mode key to activate roadmap mode. Verify that Roadmap displays on the status bar.
NOTE: Use the Cine Setup screen to enable Cine acquisition. Refer Dynamic Recording for more
information.
4. Press the left X-ray switch to initiate the first phase of roadmapping. Roadmap – 1
displays on the left status bar.
5. A fluoro image displays on the left monitor.
6. Inject contrast media when the inject icon displays on the left monitor.
7. Release the left X-ray switch when a satisfactory image displays on the left monitor and
the contrast is at, or near, peak concentration in the area of interest.
8. The roadmap mask is created automatically and displayed on the left monitor for phase 2.
9. Press the left X-ray switch again to begin roadmapping. Roadmap – 2 displays on the left
status bar. The saved mask is subtracted from the new fluoro images. The resulting roadmap
displays on the left monitor. The X-ray technique is locked.
5-21
5. Imaging
10. Continue the roadmap subtractions as many times as necessary by pressing the left switch.
The original contrast image is used as the mask for each subtraction.
11. To exit roadmap mode, press the Mode key.
Select and clear a Roadmap mask

The Roadmap Mask screen allows you to save and use up to two roadmap mask images.
To eliminate additional contrast injection, use a mask saved from one of the following:
l The current roadmap procedure
l A previous Cine run
l A subtraction procedure
Figure 5-24: Roadmap Mask Screen
Use a saved mask

The two most recent mask images from the current patient exam are saved to disk automatically
and displayed on the Roadmap Mask screen under the Save Mask buttons.
To perform a roadmap procedure using a saved mask:
1. Touch Roadmap Mask from the Main screen.
2. Touch Use Mask beneath the image of the mask you wish to use. The saved mask is recalled
when the second phase of the roadmap shot is started.
3. When Roadmap-2 displays on the status bar, indicating that the second phase of
roadmapping is in process, the chosen mask displays on the left monitor.
4. Press the left X-ray switch. The technique will stabilize and subtraction will begin using the
recalled image as the mask.
5. If necessary, touch ADJUST MASK on the Main screen to adjust registration.
Clear the current mask

To clear the left monitor and begin a new roadmap procedure:
5-22
5. Imaging
1. Touch New Mask on the Roadmap Mask screen.

2. Repeat the roadmap procedure.
The current mask can also be cleared using the footswitch:
1. Press the Mode key on the footswitch to select fluoro mode.
2. Press the left X-ray switch to take a brief exposure.
3. Press the Mode key again to reselect roadmap mode.
Produce a Roadmap mask from a subtraction Cine run

You can create a roadmap mask from a stored subtraction run. Once the mask is created, save it on
the Roadmap Mask screen and retrieve it as the mask for the roadmap procedure. This method
avoids additional contrast injection and reduces patient exposure.
Patient positioning must be the same as it was when the recalled mask was created. However, using
the Adjust Mask screen to register the image can compensate for slight movement. (See Adjust the
mask on page 5-19 for information about mask registration.)
To prepare a roadmap mask from a stored subtraction run:
1. Touch the preview image representing the subtraction Cine run on the Image Directory
screen. The Cine run begins playback on the left monitor. The Cine screen displays on the
right monitor.
2. Touch View Subtracted on the Cine screen to display the run in its unsubtracted form. View
Subtracted will not be highlighted.
3. Touch Peak Opacify to enable peak opacification.
4. Use the playback buttons to display the frame you want to use as the mask on the left
monitor.
5. Touch Roadmap Mask on the Cine screen.
6. Touch Save Mask.
7. Touch Use Mask beneath the image of the mask you just created. The mask displays on the
left monitor and the system enters the second phase of roadmapping.
8. Press the left X-ray switch. The technique stabilizes and subtraction begins using the
recalled image as the mask.
5.6.6 Digital pulse Cine

On Cardiac and Vascular Workstations, 15 or 30 PPS (12 or 25 PPS on a 50 Hz system) in HLF mode
provides Digital Cine operation.
On Vascular Workstations, 15 PPS (12 PPS on 50 Hz systems) in HLF mode provides Digital Cine
operation.
Digital Cine combines shorter pulsed widths with higher mA values to reduce image motion artifacts.
To provide optimum images:
5-23
5. Imaging
l Camera gain is reduced and the mA increases to as much as 150 mA.

l There is no dose reduction.
l Exposure time is limited.
l Averaging is turned off.
Automatic termination of digital Cine exposure occurs after each preset interval of continuous use.
Automatic exposure termination reduces unnecessary X-ray exposure and is designed to comply
with X-ray tube ratings. To change the exposure time limit, contact service.
WARNING: During pulsed digital Cine HLF, the mA can increase to as much as 150 mA. This
can subject the patient and those working around the X-ray field to a
significantly larger dose of radiation than they would receive during normal
pulsed fluoro operation. To minimize X-ray exposure hazards, use HLF with
discretion.
5.6.7 Create a digital pulse Cine image on vascular systems
1. Verify that HLF displays on the status bar.

If Subtract displays, press the Mode key to activate HLF mode.
If Dig. Spot displays, use the Mode screen to select HLF.
2. Touch Pulse on the Mode screen to enable pulsed operation. The Pulse button will be
highlighted when active.
Figure 5-25: Mode Screen
5-24
5. Imaging
3. Touch Rate to set a pulse rate of 15 or 30 (12 or 25 on 50Hz systems) PPS from the Digital
Cine box on the pulse rate screen. Verify the selected pulse rate displays on the status bar.
The frame rate displayed is the same as the pulse rate. Acquisition occurs at that rate.
Figure 5-26: Vascular Pulse Rate Screen
4. Press the right X-ray switch. The digital Cine image is acquired to the Cine disk
automatically.
NOTE: Pulse rate screens may vary slightly depending on the System.
5.6.8 Cine acquisition

When acquiring a Cine run, the Workstation will not save the run until 5 frames have been captured.
Runs shorter than 5 frames will be discarded. At lower Cine acquisition rates, it may take up to 5
seconds to record a Cine run successfully. You can tell when recording has begun, when a frame
counter displays on the left monitor. See 6. Dynamic recording on page 6-1 for more information on
Cine recording and reviewing.
5.7 Cardiac imaging

Cardiac systems come equipped with a three-pedal footswitch.
When the system is first turned on, the default imaging pairs display in the status bar.
Cardiac icon
The cardiac icon displays in the status bar when the cardiac profile has been selected from the
Anatomical Profile screen.
5-25
5. Imaging
Figure 5-27: Cardiac Mode Screen
Press the left X-ray switch to initiate a fluoro shot.

Press the center X-ray switch to initiate an HLF shot.
Press the far right X-ray switch to initiate digital Cine pulse imaging. The
status bar does not display information for this pedal.
Press the Mode key on the X-ray switch or on the C-Arm control panel to
switch between vascular and fluoro imaging.
With cardiac selected, the status bar displays Roadmap and Subtract or Fluoro and Subtract.
Press the left X-ray switch to initiate a roadmap or fluoro shot.
Press the center X-ray switch to initiate a subtraction.
NOTE: The far right X-ray switch will always automatically invoke digital Cine pulse operation at
the current pulse rate. Use the digital Cine pulse rate screen to determine or change the
active pulse rate.
For more instructions on creating fluoro, see 5.5.2 High Level Fluoro Imaging (HLF) on page 5-10,
5.5.3 Digital spot on page 5-10, 5.6.5 Roadmap imaging on page 5-20, 5.6.4 Subtraction imaging on
page 5-17, and 5.6.6 Digital pulse Cine on page 5-23.
5.7.1 Cardiac fluoro pulse rates
To enable pulsed operation at the currently selected pulse rate, press the PULSE key on the
C-Arm or touch Pulse on the Mode screen.
When pulse is enabled, the Pulse button on the Mode screen is highlighted and the pulse rate (PPS)
displays on the status bar.
5-26
5. Imaging
Figure 5-28: Cardiac Mode Screen with Pulse Enabled

The default rate is 8 PPS. The current rate applied displays in the PPS box and on the
status bar.
Change vascular pulse rate

1. Touch the rate button on the Mode screen. The Digital Cine Pulse rate dialog box
displays.
Figure 5-29: Fluoro pulse rates
5-27
5. Imaging
2. Select a pulse rate from the Digital Cine Pulse rate dialog box. The pulse rate will display on
the status bar and the dialog box will automatically close.
3. Touch EXIT on the Mode screen to return to the Main screen.
5.7.2 Create a digital pulse Cine image on cardiac systems
The digital Cine footswitch is always available to invoke digital Cine operation during a procedure,
regardless of other preset mode pairs. The digital Cine rate box on the Mode screen allows the user
to display and change the preset rate. This information is not displayed on the status bar.
1. To verify the selected pulse rate, display the Mode screen. Check the rate information in the
Digital Cine box. Default is 15 pps (12 pps on 50 Hz systems). Change the rate, if
necessary.
Figure 5-30: Digital Cine Rate Box
2. Press the far right footswitch to create a Digital Cine HLF image.
To change the pulse rate

1. Touch the rate box on the Mode screen to display the Digital Cine Pulse rate dialog
box.
5-28
5. Imaging
Figure 5-31: Digital Cine Pulse Rate Dialog Box

2. Select a pulse rate from the dialog box. The dialog box closes automatically once a rate is
chosen.
3. Touch Exit on the Mode screen to return to the Main screen or keep the Mode screen
displayed to reference the active pulse rate for the far right footswitch.
5.8 Radiation display

5.8.1 Dosimetry display
The GE OEC 9900 Elite Workstation can be configured to show three indications for dosimetry: Dose
Area Product, Cumulative Air Kerma, and Air Kerma Rate, which are set according to the regulations
of the country where the system is installed. This information is continuously displayed and updated
throughout an exposure on the bottom right corner of the X-ray Image screen, and is also available
on the Dose Summary screen. Contact service to have these settings adjusted to site preference.
These dosimetric indications are calculated in the system based on kVp, mA, exposure time, and
collimation. The dosimetry displayed by the GE OEC 9900 Elite System can be independently
measured by a dosimeter. A current calibration on the GE OEC 9900 Elite system is needed for
accurate dosimetry information. Annual calibration checks are recommended.
NOTE: Dosimetry can be displayed in units based on Grays (Gy) or rads. This setting can be changed
on the Customize Workstation screen, accessible through the Customize screen.
5.8.2 Air kerma and air kerma rate

Air Kerma (Kinetic Energy Released per unit Mass) is an indication of the radiation delivered to the
Interventional Reference Point (IRP), a point in space, and is measured in the units of Grays (Gy).
The GE OEC 9900 Elite System determines the IRP as a point along the central X-ray beam axis 70cm
from the focal spot (30cm from the image intensifier entrance).
5-29
5. Imaging
NOTE: Selection of the IRP is based on international convention and typical usage of a multi-use
mobile fluoroscopy system. This point should represent a typical intersection of patient sur-
face and the X-ray beam axis.
WARNING: When the patient is positioned more than 30cm from the Image Intensifier, the
dose received by the patient is higher than the indications displayed on the Work-
station.
The Air Kerma display option on the GE OEC 9900 Elite Workstation provides two indications of Air
Kerma, the Cumulative Air Kerma and the Air Kerma Rate.
l The Cumulative Air Kerma (CAK) is an indication of the accumulated Air Kerma at the IRP for
the duration of the exam. The number is at 0 at the beginning of the exam, and increases for
each X-ray exposure. The CAK value is automatically reset to 0 at the beginning of each new
exam. CAK is displayed in terms of mGy or Gy.
l The Air Kerma Rate (AKR) is an indication of the instantaneous rate of radiation. During an X-
ray exposure, the AKR displays in units of mGy/min. Otherwise, the Workstation displays the
AKR as 0 mGy/min.
l The displayed AKR and CAK have an accuracy error of less than 35% for exposure times
greater than 3 seconds.
NOTE: Air Kerma is useful in predicting short-term deterministic effects from radiation. Examples of
deterministic effects include skin injury and hair loss. The United States Food and Drug Admin-
istration, in “Recording Information In The Patient's Medical Record That Identifies The Poten-
tial For Serious X-ray-Induced Skin Injuries,” (1995), suggests a threshold of 1 Gy, beyond
which deterministic effects might appear.
NOTE: The GE OEC 9900 Elite system does NOT disable X-ray production at any radiation dose
threshold
The GE OEC 9900 Elite Workstation can display CAK and AKR using different units:
Measurement Units Conversion
CAK or Entrance Dose Gy or rads 1Gy corresponds to 100 rads.
AKR or Entrance Exposure Rate mGy/min or R/min 1Gy corresponds to 114 Roentgens
(R).
5.8.3 Dose-area product (DAP)

Dose Area Product (DAP) is an indication of the radiation energy used during a procedure or
individual exposure. It is measured in the units of mGym2 or radcm2. DAP is the product of the
exposed area and the Air Kerma. The Dose Area Product is not dependent on the patient position
relative to the X-ray tube.
The DAP display option on the GE OEC 9900 Elite Workstation provides the DAP for each X-ray
exposure on the X-ray Image screen. Between exposures, the GE OEC 9900 Elite Workstation retains
the DAP value for the previous exposure on the X-ray Image screen. The Dose Summary screen
5-30
5. Imaging
displays the accumulated DAP for the entire exam. The DAP value is automatically reset to 0 at the
beginning of each new exam.
The displayed DAP has an accuracy error of less than 50% for exposures greater than 0.25 mGym2.
NOTE: DAP is useful to assess the risk of long-term stochastic effects from radiation. For example, an
increased risk of cancer due to lifetime radiation exposure is a stochastic effect..
NOTE: The GE OEC 9900 Elite system does NOT disable X-ray at any radiation dose threshold.
5.8.4 Exposure timer

The Exposure Timer, displayed on the lower right corner of the X-ray Image screen, accumulates the
time during which X-ray has been generated during the exam. The information is displayed in
minutes and 10ths of a minute. The timer starts at 0 at the beginning of the exam, and it increases
for each X-ray exposure during the exam.
5.8.5 Dosimetry on the X-ray image screen

The dosimetry on the GE OEC 9900 Elite X-ray Image screen is similar to the following:
1 - Exposure timer.
2 - Air Kerma Rate (AKR)
3 - Cumulative Air Kerma (CAK)
4 - Dose Area Product (DAP)
5 - X-ray technique factors
Figure 5-32: Sample screen - live shot
NOTE: The Workstation can display Air Kerma, Dose Area Product, or both, on the X-ray Image
screen. Contact service to change this setting.
5.8.6 Dose summary

The Dose Summary screen displays dosimetry for each patient exam.
To display the Dose Summary screen on the left monitor, touch Dose Summary on the Image
Directory screen. A screen similar to the following displays.
The Dose Summary screen contains the following information about the patient exam:
5-31
5. Imaging
1- Patient information.
2- Accumulated Dose Area Product for the exam.
3- Cumulative Air Kermas (CAK).
4- Percentage of total dose area product in each
mode or field of view.
5 - Time of exposure, in seconds, for each imaging
mode.
Figure 5-33: Dose Summary Screen
NOTE: If the system is configured to display only Air Kerma, line 2 will be empty and line 3 will display
Cumulative Air Kerma for the exam. If the system is configured to display both Air Kerma and
DAP, line 2 will show DAP and line 3 will display Air Kerma.
NOTE: In Pulsed modes, the total time that X-rays were generated displays in the Time column,
rather than the length of time that the X-ray switch was pressed.
NOTE: The Workstation can be set to display Air Kerma, Dose Area Product, or both, in this summary
screen. Contact service to change this setting.
NOTE: A printer must be connected and configured on the System in order to print patient summary
information. See 8.6.1 Select a device on page 8-15 select a printer, if necessary.
1. Touch Dose Summary on the Image Directory screen. The dose summary displays on the left
monitor.
NOTE: Wait 2-3 seconds for the image of the Dose Summary to stabilize on the left monitor before
proceeding with step 2.
2. At the left of the Image Directory screen on the right monitor, touch the area beneath the
printer name. This sends a screen capture of the dose summary to the printer.
3. Touch Copy. The image prints on your printer.
5-32
6. Dynamic recording
The GE OEC Workstation can be equipped with a dynamic recording (Cine) disk that allows you to
record a series of dynamic images. The Cine Setup screen allows you to enable and disable Cine
acquisition for the various image modes and to set Cine acquisition rates.
WARNING: Use caution while the Workstation is in use. The system and Cine disks are
always running during operation of the Workstation. Any sudden, intense impact
can damage the system or Cine disk and could result in loss of previously
recorded Cine runs and prevent further imaging.
l Cine options
l Cine review
l Mini Cine playback
6.1 Cine options

The Cine Setup screen allows you to enable Cine acquisition, and change the recording rate (frame
rate). Check the configuration of your system to determine the Cine disk size.
During acquisition, images are recorded to the Cine disk until the available storage area is full. When
30 seconds of acquisition time remains before the disk is full, a warning message displays on the
right monitor.
When the disk is full, or when a new patient exam begins, Cine recording time resets automatically
to the maximum recording time and any Cine runs from previous exams are overwritten.
NOTE: You can copy Cine runs to a CD/DVD after completing an exam to preserve them for further
review. See 8.2 Retrieve a saved exam on page 8-4 for information about archiving Cine
runs.
When a single run fills all available time, X-rays continue to be taken as long as you are pressing the
switch, but acquisition of the Cine run discontinues.
The Cine Setup screen displays the storage time remaining in number of seconds. This number
displays adjacent to the Rate button for each mode and on the left monitor.
To display the Cine screen, touch Cine… from the Main screen.
6-1

6.1.1 Activate the Cine disk

1. Touch Cine Setup on the Cine screen.
Figure 6-2: Cine Screen

6-2
Figure 6-3: Cine Setup Screen

2. Use the check boxes and buttons on the Cine Setup screen to turn Cine acquisition on or off
for each mode and to set continuous acquisition rate.
6.1.2 Acquire On/Off

Select the check box next to the corresponding image mode to enable or disable Cine acquisition.
Acquire is on if the box is checked.
Figure 6-4: Cine Setup screen - Acquire ON/OFF

If the shot type is digital Cine, acquisition is enabled automatically and cannot be turned off.
By default, acquisition is enabled for subtract mode.
When acquiring a Cine run, the Workstation will not save the run until 5 frames have been captured.
Runs shorter than 5 frames will be discarded. At lower Cine acquisition rates, it may take up to 5
seconds to record a Cine run successfully. A recording has begun when a frame counter displays on
the left monitor.
6-3
Change the continuous acquisition rate

The current acquisition rate displays adjacent to the Rate button for the corresponding mode.
The acquisition default for fluoro, HLF, and roadmap mode is 8 FPS and 30 fps (25 FPS for 50 Hz
systems) for continuous subtract mode. If pulse is enabled, the acquisition rate equals the pulse rate.
The available acquisition time varies according to the acquisition rate. Select a lower rate to increase
the amount of acquisition time.
1. Touch Rate next to the mode.
Figure 6-5: Cine Setup Screen - Rate

Figure 6-6: Cine Acquisition Rate dialog box

2. Select an acquisition rate. The Acquisition Rate dialog box closes automatically. The status
bar shows the acquisition rate (fps) when Cine acquire is on.
Figure 6-7: Status bar showing Cine rate of 8 fps

3. To close the Cine Setup screen, touch OK.
6-4
6.2 Cine review

The preview image of a Cine run includes the letter C next to the image number on the Image
Directory screen. Cine runs display the same exam information as static images and you can apply
any of the post-processing functions to a single frame of a Cine run. The Cine screen allows you to
review a Cine run, set cues, adjust landmark and registration, and define a roadmap mask. You can
select a mask at any point in the run to reprocess a subtraction.
6.2.1 Review a Cine run

If the patient exam containing the Cine run you want to review is not displayed, see 8.2 Retrieve a
saved exam on page 8-4.
Figure 6-8: Image Directory screen with Cine preview image (7C)
1. Select the preview image of the Cine run in the Image Directory screen. Cine playback occurs
on the left monitor and the Cine screen displays on the right monitor.
2. As playback progresses through the acquired images, the frame number changes to indicate
the position of the frame within the run.
1- Progress bar
2- Position of mask (vertical white bar)
Amount of time (in seconds) elapsed
3-
from start of Cine run
4- Frame number display
Figure 6-9: Cine playback and Mask indicator bar
6-5
3. Replay continues to loop until you touch the Play/Pause ( ) button to pause the run to
view a single frame or exit.
Figure 6-10: Cine Playback buttons
l Touch to move forward by a single frame.

l Touch to move back by a single frame.
l Touch to move forward by 10 frames.
l Touch to move back by 10 frames.
l Touch to begin or pause Cine playback.
l Touch Minimize to close the Cine screen and display the Cine playback controls on the
selected Cine run. See 6.3 Mini Cine playback on page 6-13 for an explanation of the Mini Cine
controls.
6-6
6.2.2 Select Cine runs from the Cine screen

You can use the Cine screen to view each Cine run for a single patient.
Figure 6-11: Cine Run selection buttons

l Touch < to review the previous Cine run for the current patient session.
l Touch > to review the next Cine run for the current patient session.
The total number of runs is noted as Run X of X. This number does not correspond with the image
number of the Cine run in the Image Directory. The run number indicates how many runs are
available or review and which run you are reviewing.
6-7
6.2.3 Store frame

When Cine playback is paused and a DICOM storage sever has been configured on the system, the
Store Frame button allows you to send the displayed image to a DICOM storage server.
Figure 6-12: Cine Store Frame button

When the Store Frame button is touched, the current image is sent to the DICOM server whose
name displays under the Store Frame button.
NOTE: A DICOM server must be configured on the system before the Store Frame button can be acti-
vated. See 9.1.5 DICOM configuration on page 9-5 for information on configuring DICOM
servers.
6.2.4 Set mask

1. Use the playback buttons to display the frame you want to use as the mask on the left
monitor.
2. Touch Set Mask.
Figure 6-13: Set Mask button

Use the playback buttons to review the run.
6-8
6.2.5 Set cues

The Set Cues function allows you to select a portion of a Cine run for playback.
1. Touch Set cues....
Figure 6-14: Set Cues button

The Set Cues dialog box displays on the Cine screen.
2. Pause the run. Use the playback buttons to display the frame in the Cine run that will be the
starting cue.
Figure 6-15: Mask indicator bar with Set Cues (1 and 2)
6-9
3. Touch Set Left to set the beginning cue.

4. Advance to the chosen ending frame. Touch Set Right to set the ending cue. Playback
displays the images located between the cues.
5. To delete the cues, touch Clear Left or Clear Right.
6. Touch OK to close the Set Cues dialog box.
NOTE: The cues remain set on the Cine run until they are cleared. If you archive the run with the cues
set, only the portion of the session between the set cues will be archived.
6.2.6 Viewing options

The Cine screen offers the following options:
l View a Cine run in subtracted or unsubtracted form.
l Perform a post-processing subtraction from a fluoro or HLF run.
l Apply peak opacification to a subtracted/unsubtracted run.
View in subtracted or unsubtracted form
Figure 6-16: View Subtracted button

Enable and disable subtracted view by touching View Subtracted.
If the View Subtracted button is highlighted, the Cine run displays in subtracted form.
To view the run in unsubtracted form, touch View Subtracted again. The button is no longer
highlighted and the Cine run displays unsubtracted.
NOTE: You cannot display a roadmap unsubtracted.
6-10
Perform a post-processing subtraction

If contrast has been injected during acquisition of fluoro or HLF images, you can playback the run,
select a mask, and use the Set Mask and View Subtracted buttons to display a post-processing
subtraction on the left monitor.
To perform a post-processing Subtraction using a Fluoro or HLF run:
1. Display the run you want to use as the mask on the left monitor.
2. Touch Set Mask.
3. Touch View Subtracted.
The fluoro or HLF run displays as a subtraction on the left monitor. Use the Cine playback buttons to
review the run.
Apply peak opacification during playback

Peak opacification is a process automatically applied in roadmap mode during mask acquisition.
Each pixel of a new frame is compared with its counterpart in the previous frame. If the new pixel is
darker than in the previous image the old pixel is replaced. The resulting image contains the darkest
pixels acquired for each point.
Figure 6-17: Peak Opacify button

You can use the Peak Opacify button during post-processing to view a subtraction run with
opacification. The areas darkened by the contrast media remain dark in the playback of the run,
providing maximum vessel display.
6-11
Adjust mask
Figure 6-18: Adjust Mask button

To adjust the mask or landmarking on an image, see Adjust the mask on page 5-19.
Roadmap mask
Figure 6-19: Roadmap Mask button

Use this button to select a roadmap mask from previously saved masks or create a mask from a
subtraction Cine run. See Produce a Roadmap mask from a subtraction Cine run on page 5-23
6-12
6.3 Mini Cine playback

Mini Cine playback allows you to review Cine runs using playback controls displayed on the same
screen as the Cine run. To activate Mini Cine, touch Minimize on the Cine Playback screen. A screen
similar to the following displays.
NOTE: You can make the Mini-Cine display the default for viewing Cine runs. See Setup screen on
page 2-2.
Store Frame – Stores the current frame
1-
to a DICOM storage server.
Cine Playback and Mask indicator bar
2-
– Shows progress of playback.
Recording time remaining in seconds
3-
and frames.
Peak Opacify – Applies Peak
4-
Opacification to the current Cine run.
Next/Previous Cine run for selected
5-
patient.
Current/Total Cine runs for selected
6-
patient.
7- Maximize – Returns to Cine screen.
Cine playback controls – Play / Pause,
8- Forward / Back one frame, Forward /
Back multiple frames.
Exit – Exits Cine playback and returns
9-
to the Main screen.
Figure 6-20: Mini Cine controls
NOTE: Mini Cine controls provide the same functionality as the equivalent Cine screen controls. See
6.1 Cine options on page 6-1 and 6.2 Cine review on page 6-5 for a complete description of
the desired control.
6-13
6-14
7. Image annotation and measurement

This chapter explains how to use image annotation to place markers, add comments, crop images,
and measure features.
Topics discussed in this chapter are:
l Display Image Annotation Screen
l Image markers
l Image comments
l Crop an image
l Measure an image
l Calibration
7.1 Display Image Annotation Screen
To display the Image Annotation screen, press the Image Annotation key on the Workstation
keyboard.
Figure 7-1: Image Annotation Screen
7-1
7.2 Image markers

Markers are objects used to point out features in an image, and to indicate left and right on the
image.
7.2.1 Place a marker

1. Touch Markers... on the Image Annotation screen to display the Markers screen and the
Markers object bar, at the top of the screen.
Figure 7-2: Markers Screen

The markers object bar includes four directional arrows and L (left) and R (right) markers.
2. Touch a marker button in the object bar. The marker displays on both the left and right
monitors.
3. To position a marker, touch the marker on the right monitor image, and drag it to the desired
position. To fine tune the position, use the arrow keys on the Workstation keyboard. Each
press of an arrow key moves the selected marker by one pixel.
4. To add more markers, repeat steps two and three. You can place up to five markers on any
image.
5. Press the Save key on the keyboard to save a copy of the image with the markers.
6. Touch OK to close the Markers screen. The annotated image remains displayed on the left
monitor until you press an X-ray switch or recall a saved image.
7.2.2 Delete markers

1. Touch the marker on the right monitor.
2. Press the Delete on the keyboard.
7-2
7.3 Image comments

Comments are short text annotations on an image.
7.3.1 Place comments on an image

1. Touch Comment... on the Image Annotation screen. The Comment screen displays.
Figure 7-3: Comment Screen

2. Touch Comment on the Comment screen. The comment box displays.
3. Enter text in the comment box. You can enter up to 80 characters.
l To position the comment box on the image, select the comment box on the right monitor
and drag it. Use the keyboard arrow keys to fine position each comment box. Each press of
an arrow key moves the box one pixel.
l To add additional comments, touch Comment and enter another comment. You can enter
up to five comments per image.
4. Press the Save key on the keyboard to save a copy of the image with the comments.
5. Touch OK to close the Comment screen. The commented image remains displayed on the left
monitor until you press an X-ray switch or recall a saved image.
7.3.2 Delete comments from an image

1. Touch the comment on the right monitor.
7-3
7.4 Crop an image

The Crop tool allows you to hide portions of the image on the left monitor, to draw attention to an
area of interest.
7.4.1 Crop an image procedure

1. Touch Crop... on the Image Annotation screen. The crop screen displays four arrows
attached to crop shutters.
Figure 7-4: Crop Screen

2. Touch and drag the crop arrows to crop the image. As you move the arrows, the cropped
area of the left monitor image is hidden from view.
l To fine-position a crop shutter, use the keyboard arrow keys. The arrow key will move a
selected crop arrow one pixel.
The following illustration shows an example of a cropped image as it displays on the left and right
monitors.
Figure 7-5: Cropped Image on Left and Right Monitors
3. Press the Save key on the keyboard to save a copy of the cropped image.
4. Touch OK to close the Crop screen. The left monitor image remains cropped until you press
the X-ray switch or display a saved image.
7-4
7.5 Calibration
NOTE: Calibration should be performed before distance or stenosis measurements are applied. Ste-
nosis can only display a percentage if no calibration is performed.
To perform a calibration between two points, place a measuring device in the plane of interest. The
distance on the image should be marked during calibration and the length value entered in the
appropriate box. Once the value is entered in the mm or French box, the reference value for the fixed
length displays in the upper right hand corner of the Measurement screen.
When calibration is changed during a procedure, the values in length for stenosis and distance
adjust to the new calibration values.
On Cine Run Frames, each frame of a Cine run will receive measurement calculations based on the
same calibration values when measurements are applied. When the frame is saved, it is saved as a
single frame with the current calibration and cannot be modified when calibration is adjusted.
When zoom is enabled on an image, the reference calibration values are scaled to match the zoom
factor.
7.5.1 Perform calibration

1. Touch Calibrate on the Measure screen.
Figure 7-6: Calibrate Screen

2. On the Calibrate screen, move the crosshairs to set the distance.
3. Enter the measured length or catheter size in the appropriate calibration input box.
7-5
7.6 Measure an image

The Measure tool allows you to calibrate the system's measurements, measure features on an
image, and measure the ratio of a stenotic area.
NOTE: Measurement tools are not available on all Workstation models.
Measurements can be applied to a saved image, a single frame of a Cine run, a recalled image, and
the current image displayed. Zoom should be enabled before placing measurements.
Up to three distance measurements, and one stenosis measurement can be placed on any one
image.
When calibration is performed, the reference calibration value displays in the upper right hand
corner of the Measure screen.
To position the measurement box on the image, touch the measurement box on the right monitor
and drag it. Use the keyboard arrow keys to fine position each measurement box. Each press of an
arrow key moves the box one pixel.
NOTE: The Measure screen closes when X-rays are enabled.
Figure 7-7: Measure screen
7.6.1 Measure a distance

A Calibration must be performed before distance measurements can be placed. The Distance button
will not be active until calibration is performed.
The distance calculation displays once both end points have been placed. This value displays
adjacent to the end point.
When calibration is changed during the procedure, the distance measurements are recalculated
and the new values display.
7-6
7.6.2 Perform distance measurements

1. Perform Calibration.
2. Touch the Distance button on the Image Annotation screen. The left monitor image is
copied to the right monitor and displayed in the Measurement screen, with a default
measurement line displayed. This line is based on the calibration performed.
Figure 7-8: Distance display

3. Touch one crosshair at either end of the line and position the beginning point of
measurement.
4. Touch the second crosshair and position the end point of measurement. The distance
measurement will display in millimeters adjacent to the end point.
5. Press the Save key on the keyboard to save a copy of the image with the measurement
information.
7.6.3 Measure a stenosis

A calibration should be performed before applying stenosis lines. If calibration is not performed, only
the stenosis percentage can display. Calibration may be performed after the stenosis lines are
placed.
The stenosis function is a ratio measurement of three distances. The ratio is the average of the lines
drawn above and below a stenosis, and a dotted line bisecting the stenosis.
The dotted stenosis line is drawn across the stenotic region. The other two lines are drawn across
normal vessel regions above and below the stenotic region.
Once the lines have been placed, the percent stenosis displays near the start point of the stenosis
line. If calibration has been performed, the length of each line displays adjacent to the end point.
7-7
7.6.4 Perform a stenosis measurement

1. Perform Calibration.
2. Touch the Stenosis button on the Measurement screen. Three measurement lines
appear.
Figure 7-9: Stenosis display

3. Place the shorter dotted default line to mark the stenotic area.
4. Place one longer line across a normal vessel above the stenotic region.
5. Place the other line below the stenotic region and across a normal vessel.
6. Press the Save key on the keyboard to save a copy of the image with the stenosis
measurement information.
7.6.5 Delete measurements

1. Touch the crosshair of the measurement.
7-8
8. Image review, hardcopy, and archive

This chapter covers image review and processing, including how to create a new study from an
existing patient, review patient summaries and dose information, improve the quality of images
after the shot is taken, print images, and archive images.
l Image directory
l Retrieve a saved exam
l Copy to a new study
l Post-processing to optimize fluoroscopic images
l Review patient information and dose screen
l Create prints
l Archive images
l View, annotate, and export images with DICOM
l Portable DICOM viewer
8.1 Image directory

The Image Directory screen allows you to display static images and Cine runs for review or
modification.
To display the Image Directory screen, press the Image Directory key on the Workstation
keyboard.
8-1
8.1.1 Image directory screen
Figure 8-1: Image Directory Screen Features

1- Copy From … Used to select the source to copy from.
CAUTION When copying to DVD wait for the drive to load the disk before beginning the copy.
The disk is loaded after the disk is inserted into the drive and the LED on the front of
the drive goes off.
2- Patient summary/information. When selected, this information displays on the active (left)
monitor. When displayed, this information may be placed in the queue for copying or print-
ing
3- Saved Exams… Used to recall images that have been previously saved.
4- Dose Summary… Used to display the dose summary information on the left monitor. When
displayed, this information may be placed in the queue for copying or printing.
5- Preview Images. Static images and Cine runs associated with the selected patient. Cine runs
are denoted with a "C" next to the image number.
6- Up and Down arrows. Used to scroll through all preview images. The arrow buttons are only
active if more than nine (9) images are retrieved. You also may use the keyboard to enter the
image number and then press ENTER to display the preview image.
7- Exit. Exits the image directory.
8- Copy. Used to Copy the selected images to the designated destination.
9- Select All. Used to select all images in the gallery for copying or printing.
8-2
10 - Options. Used to select options for the selected target destination. In this example, the
target is the CD/DVD drive. If you are copying images to a printer, this button is labeled
Layout.
11 - Copy To device icon. Shows which device is selected as the target and shows information
about the device including free space, layout information, and so on, that can be used to
determine if the selected images will fit on the selected device.
12 - Copy To… Used to select the target destination for the copy operation.
8.1.2 Damaged thumbnails in the image screen

If an image thumbnail has been damaged or otherwise become inaccessible to the system, you will
see a damaged thumbnail icon in the image directory.
Figure 8-2: Damaged Thumbnail Icon on the Image Directory Screen

Even though the thumbnail is damaged, the image itself is still available and can be displayed by
selecting the damaged thumbnail icon displayed in its place.
8-3
8.1.3 Review Cine runs and subtracted Cine runs

You can display archived exams, including Cine runs, on the Workstation.
When you select a Cine run from a CD/DVD, a static image is shown on the left monitor because Cine
runs cannot be played directly from the CD/DVD.
When you select a subtracted Cine run from a CD/DVD, the static image may not be displayed as a
subtracted image. If you wish to view the subtracted images from a subtracted Cine run, copy the
Cine run from the CD/DVD to the Workstation for play back.
See 8.7.7 Copy from an archive device on page 8-22 for information on copying images and Cine
runs from a CD/DVD to the Workstation.
8.2 Retrieve a saved exam

During a procedure, images can be saved in the saved exams feature of the system. Images are
indexed by the patient name, doctor name, and date of the exam.
CAUTION Do not turn off the Workstation while the system is retrieving information from a disk in
the CD/DVD drive, that is, when the green activity light on the drive is on. Allow the proc-
ess to complete and the light on the front of the CD/DVD drive to go off, before turning
off the system. If you turn off the Workstation while information is being retrieved from
the disk you could cause all saved information on the Workstation to become lost or
corrupt.
8.2.1 Retrieve a saved exam procedure

1. Touch Saved Exams… on the Image Directory screen.
Figure 8-3: Saved Exams button on Image Directory screen

An alphabetic list of patients, similar to the following, for the currently selected Copy From
device displays.
8-4
Figure 8-4: Saved Exams Screen

l By Patient: Touch this button to view the list of patients by patient's name.
l By Date: Touch this button to view the list of patients by date of their exam.
l By Physician: Touch this button to view the list of patients by their physician's name.
l On-screen arrow buttons: Use these to scroll through the patient list.
2. Select the patient name.
3. Touch OK to exit the Saved Exams screen. The patient information displays in the image
directory.
4. Select an image displayed in the image directory for review. The image displays on the left
monitor.
Figure 8-5: Image Directory preview image
NOTE: When you access the saved exams list from image directory and select a patient, the current
patient does not change. If you make and save an exposure while a saved exam displays on
the Image Directory screen, the image is saved with the current patient's exam, not with the
saved exam displayed on the Image Directory screen.
8-5
8.2.2 Image review

The following information displays with the left monitor image:
1 - Hospital name and exposure date and time.
See Set up the Workstation on page 2-3 for
details on setting this information.
2 - Brightness and contrast values.
3 - Dose information.
NOTE: Rate information changes as the

X-ray is taken and then drops to
0 at the end of the shot.
4 - Live or saved shot and Cine time remaining in
seconds.
5 - Technique used during the exposure.
6 - Patient information from the Patient
Information screen.
Figure 8-6: Sample image

The information displayed on a retrieved image is somewhat different than a live X-ray. The
following information displays on retrieved images.
1 - Hospital name and exposure date and time.

See Set up the Workstation on page 2-3 for
details on setting this information.
2 - Brightness and contrast values.
3 - Anatomical Profile in use with the image.
4 - Number of retrieved image in the image
directory.
5 - Technique used during the exposure.
6 - Patient information from the Patient
Information screen.
Figure 8-7: Sample retrieved image
8.3 Copy to a new study

You can use the Copy To… function to create a new study for an existing patient.
NOTE: To create a new study for an existing patient, you must make the patient the current patient
on the system before creating the new study.
8-6
8.3.1 Copy to a new study procedure

1. Press the Patient Info key ) to display the Patient Information screen.
2. Touch Resume Exam on the Patient Information screen to display the Saved Exams screen.
3. Select the desired patient study from the Saved Exams… list and touch OK to return to the
Patient Information screen. The selected patient is now the current patient.
4. Press the Image Directory key ) to display the Image Directory screen.
5. Touch Copy To… on the Image Directory screen to display the Copy To screen.
6. Touch New Study from the Copy To… list and then touch OK to return to the Image Directory
screen. The Image Directory screen, similar to the following, displays.
Figure 8-8: Image Directory setup to copy to a new study

7. Select the images to be included in the new study from the Image Directory screen. Press and
hold the Ctrl key to select multiple images. Images are added to the new study in the order
they are selected from the Image Directory screen.
You can use the Select All button to select all of the images from the original study.
CAUTION If you use Select All, all of the images are moved from the original study to the new
study and the original study is deleted from the system. Dose Summary information
from the original study is deleted. If you wish to save the Dose Summary information,
select the Dose Summary button to display the Dose Summary on the left monitor
and then press the Save button to save an image of the Dose Summary in the Image
Directory. The Dose Summary image can then be copied to the new study or retained
in the original study.
8. Once the desired images are highlighted, touch Copy to move the selected images and the
patient information to a new study.
All of the selected patient information and the selected images are moved to the new study
8-7
and removed from the original study. The new study displays in the Scheduled Exams list
accessible from the Patient Information screen.
8.4 Post-processing to optimize fluoroscopic images

On GE OEC 9900 Elite systems, anatomical profiles have been optimized to provide brightness,
contrast, and enhancement (sharpness) levels suitable for a wide range of uses. The user may desire
to adjust the brightness, contrast, and enhance settings manually to fine-tune the look of an image
to suit personal preference. The methods described in this section can be used to make such
adjustments. If the user consistently makes the same adjustment to images for a given profile, a
service engineer can address this by changing default values for brightness, contrast, and
enhancement.
8.4.1 Image adjustment procedure

To adjust images, proceed in the following order:
1. Adjust brightness for overall and background image appearance.
2. Adjust contrast level to define the anatomical structure.
3. Adjust enhance level for overall definition.
The brightness, contrast, and enhancement control buttons are shown below.
Brightness Contrast Enhance
The brightness and contrast values are located to the left of the brightness and contrast icons in the
upper-right corner of the image (Figure 8-9).
To display the enhance value, press the Enhance control button once and the enhance value
displays as a vertical, graduated column on the left side of the image as shown in Figure 8-9.
In the examples shown in Figure 8-9, the brightness value is 36, the contrast value is 28, and the
enhance value is 3.
1- Brightness value and icon

2- Contrast value and icon
3- Enhance value displayed on
graduated vertical column
Figure 8-9: Location of brightness, contrast, and enhance values
8-8
8.4.2 Adjust brightness

Analyze the overall image appearance and background. If the overall image appears darker than
desired, or if there is too much tissue density in the image, or if the background image needs to be
brighter, increase the brightness level to brighten the overall image.
1. Increase the brightness by 1-2 units on the Workstation and observe the overall image
appearance.
2. Repeat the adjustment until the desired image brightness and quality are achieved.
Figure 8-10 shows an image before the brightness level was increased. Figure 8-11 shows the same
image after the brightness level was increased.
Figure 8-10: Before brightness increase Figure 8-11: After brightness increase
If the overall image appears brighter than desired, or if a bright area of features is saturated, or if
there is a loss of anatomy (or skin lines) that should be visible, decrease the brightness.
1. Decrease the brightness by 1-2 units on the Workstation and observe the overall image
appearance.
2. Repeat the adjustment until the desired image brightness and quality are achieved.
Figure 8-12 shows an image before the brightness level was decreased. Figure 8-13 shows the same
image after the brightness level was decreased.
8-9
Figure 8-12: Before brightness decrease Figure 8-13: After brightness decrease
8.4.3 Adjust contrast

Analyze the appearance of the anatomical structure. If the anatomical structures (bones, contrast
filled vessels, and other features of interest) appear soft, or if the structures are not well defined, not
dark enough, or look blurred, increase the contrast level to improve the overall image. Such images
are sometimes described as “washed out” or as not having enough detail.
1. Increase the contrast by 1-2 units on the Workstation and observe the overall image
appearance.
2. Repeat the adjustment until the desired image contrast and quality are achieved.
Figure 8-14 shows an image before contrast level adjustment. Figure 8-15 shows the same image
after the contrast level was increased.
Figure 8-14: Before contrast level increase Figure 8-15: After contrast level increase
If the anatomical structures (bones, contrast filled vessels, and other features of interest) are too
contrasted, too dark, too noisy, or saturated in the bright areas, reduce the contrast level to improve
the overall image. Such images may be described as “grainy.” s
8-10
1. Decrease the contrast by 1-2 units on the Workstation and observe the overall image
appearance.
2. Repeat the adjustment until the desired image contrast and quality are achieved.
Figure 8-16 shows an image before the contrast level was decreased. Figure 8-17 shows the same
image after the contrast level was decreased.
Figure 8-16: Before contrast level decrease Figure 8-17: After contrast level decrease
8.4.4 Adjust enhancement

Analyze the appearance of the anatomical structure. If an image with proper brightness and
contrast levels appears noisy or grainy, reduce the enhancement level.
1. Decrease the enhancement by one unit on the Workstation and observe the change in the
image.
2. Repeat the adjustment until the desired image quality is achieved.
Using lower enhancement may suppress noise and improve the image quality of local structures,
but may also sacrifice image sharpness (for example, for small anatomy and quiet image). A tradeoff
should be made based on personal preference. The following figures provide example images before
and after enhance adjustment.
The images in Figure 8-18 and Figure 8-19 were taken with the Spine profile. A higher enhancement
level will produce a sharper image (Figure 8-18), but may cause a noisy or grainy appearance,
especially for large and dense anatomy.
The modified image in Figure 8-19 uses the same brightness and contrast settings as in Figure 8-18,
but with a lower enhance value.
Reducing the enhancement level reduces the noisy and grainy appearance. This may improve the
system tolerance to patient size and density differences, resulting in more consistent images.
8-11
Figure 8-18: Higher enhancement level Figure 8-19: Lower enhancement level
If the image has proper brightness and contrast levels but the anatomical structures (bones,
contrast filled vessels, and other features of interest) need to be sharper to reveal more details,
increase the enhancement level to improve the sharpness of local structures.
1. Increase the enhancement by one unit on the Workstation and observe the change. Greater
enhancement may introduce more noise into the image. A trade-off should be made based on
personal preference.
2. Repeat the adjustment until the desired image quality is achieved.
Figure 8-20 shows an image before enhance adjustment. Figure 8-21 shows the same image after
the enhance level was adjusted.
Figure 8-20: Before enhancement adjustment Figure 8-21: After enhancement adjustment
8.5 Review patient information and dose screen

The Dose Summary screen displays X-ray exposure data.
To display the Dose Summary screen on the left monitor, touch Dose Summary on the Image
Directory screen. The Dose Summary screen contains the following information about the patient
session:
8-12
NOTE: Dose units of measure can be set to mGy or rad, using the Workstation Setup screen, which
is accessible through the System Setup screen.
1- Patient information.
2- Calculated Dose Area Product (the dose in mGy or
rad times the exposed area in meters) for the
whole procedure or study.
3- The skin dose or entrance air kerma calculated in
mGy or rads. The displayed air kerma or entrance
air kerma rate values are based on a reference
point 70 cm from the focal spot along the X-ray
beam axis. The reference point location is based
on international convention and typical usage of
a multi-use mobile fluoroscopy system. GE OEC
has selected this location to represent a typical
intersection of patient surface and the X-ray
beam axis. Actual patient entrance air kerma
rates may vary significantly depending on actual
source-to-skin distance.
4- Percentage of total dose area product in each mode or field of view.
5- Time of exposure in seconds for each imaging mode. The time displayed on the last line,
Pulsed, is the total time that X-rays were being generated. This time probably will differ
from the amount of time the X-ray switch was being pressed.
Figure 8-22: The Dose Summary Screen
NOTE: The Workstation can be set to display skin dose, Dose Area Product, or both in this summary
screen. Contact service to have this setting changed.
Some systems display the dose rate readings in real time on the left monitor in rad/min instead of
rad/s.
NOTE: The displayed entrance air kerma or entrance air kerma rate values are based on a reference
point 70 cm from the focal spot along the X-ray beam axis. The reference point location is
based on international convention and typical usage of a multi-use mobile fluoroscopy sys-
tem. GE OEC has selected this location to represent a typical intersection of patient surface
and the X-ray beam axis. Actual patient entrance air kerma rates may vary significantly
depending on actual source-to-skin distance.
8.5.1 Save dose summary information

You can create a copy of an exam’s dose summary in the Image Directory. When the exam is
archived to DICOM or other external media, the copy of the Dose Summary is preserved as an image
in the archive.
8-13
8.5.2 Create a dose summary image for the current patient

You can create a Dose Summary image for the current patient after an image displays on the left
monitor.
1. Display an image on the left monitor by taking an X-ray image, a single image or Cine run,
and then pressing the Save key on the keyboard to save the image to the Image
Directory.
2. Go to the Image Directory screen by pressing the Image Directory key .

3. Touch Dose Summary on the Image Directory screen to display the Dose Summary on the
left monitor.
4. Press the Save key to create a copy of the Dose Summary in the Image Directory. The
Dose Summary displays as a thumbnail in the Image Directory.
5. The Dose summary information can still change at this point if more X-rays are taken. You
must archive the Dose Summary information to a CD, DICOM store server, or other image
archive to make a static Dose Summary image.
8.5.3 Create a dose summary image for a saved patient

You can create a Dose Summary image for a saved patient after opening a saved patient exam and
displaying a saved image on the left monitor.
1. Go to the Image Directory screen by pressing the Image Directory key .

2. Touch Saved Exams… to display the Saved Exams screen.
3. Select a patient from the Saved Exams screen and touch OK to display the images for that
patient in the Image Directory.
4. Display a saved image on the left monitor by selecting one of the images from the Image
Directory.
5. Once the selected image displays, touch Dose Summary on the Image Directory screen to
display the Dose Summary on the left monitor.
6. Press the Save key to create a copy of the Dose Summary in the Image Directory. The
Dose Summary displays as a thumbnail in the Image Directory.
7. The Dose summary information can still change at this point if the saved patient is made the
current patient and more X-rays are taken. You must archive the Dose Summary information
to a CD, DICOM store server, or other image archive to make a static Dose Summary image.
See 8. Image review, hardcopy, and archive on page 8-1 for information on copying and
archiving images.
8.6 Create prints

The Workstation supports a variety of optional hard copy devices. You can send images, patient
8-14
information, and the dose summary to these print devices:

l Instant Film/Paper Printer
l DICOM Printer
l Thermal Printer
Detailed instructions for using each device are provided in the documentation supplements for the
specific device. This section explains, in general, how to select and send to a device.
NOTE: For HIPAA compliance, remove identifying information from the image using the Setup
Patient Information screen prior to printing.
For more information on any of these devices, call the Communications Center or your local sales
representative. See 13.11 Communication Center contact information on page 13-26 for telephone
numbers.
8.6.1 Select a device

Use the Copy To screen to select a print device.
1. Touch Copy To… on the Image Directory screen. The Copy To screen lists the available print
and storage devices.
Figure 8-23: Image Directory and Copy To screens

2. Select the name of the print device.
3. Touch OK to confirm your selection and return to the Image Directory screen. The icon and
default layout displays under the Copy To… button.
8.6.2 Select a layout

You can choose a print layout from one of four layouts. The device selected determines layouts
available. For DICOM layout selection and setup, see Print servers on page 9-9.
1. Touch Layout on the Image Directory screen. The Layout dialog box displays.
8-15
Figure 8-24: Layout Dialog Box

2. Select the icon representing the layout you want to use.
3. Touch OK to close the Layout dialog box. The selected layout displays in the Image Directory
screen.
8.6.3 Print
For printing from the thermal printer, see the printer's user manual. Use these steps to print on an
Instant Film/Paper or DICOM printer.
1. Select the Instant Film/Paper or DICOM printer from the Copy To screen. Touch OK to exit.
2. Choose a layout format. See 8.6.2 Select a layout on page 8-15.
3. If the image you want to print is already displayed on the left monitor, go to Step 4.
Otherwise, select the preview image. The image displays on the left monitor.
Figure 8-25: Print Queue and Preview image

4. Select a box in the copy queue to send the image to the queue. The boxes represent the print
layout and location of images on the media. You can place images into the boxes in any
order.
5. Touch Copy.
The number of images you print at one time depends on the device type and print format selected.
8-16
You can continue to select images and load them into the queue until all available positions are
filled.
If you select a preview image and then select a box already containing an image, you will replace
the existing image with the preview image you selected most recently.
As images are sent to the print device, the message, Please Wait, displays. To cancel the copy
process, touch Cancel on the message screen. Once the process has been canceled, a Please Wait
message with no Cancel button displays until the cancel command is completed.
8.6.4 Print dose summary

1. Touch Dose Summary on the Image Directory screen. The dose summary displays on the left
monitor.
2. Select a box in the copy queue to send the dose summary to the queue.
3. Touch Copy.
NOTE: The Dose Summary can be placed in a queue with images.
8.6.5 Print patient summary

1. Select the box containing patient information at the top of the Image Directory screen. The
patient summary displays on the left monitor.
2. Select a box in the copy queue to send the patient summary to the queue.
3. Touch Copy.
NOTE: The Patient Summary can be placed in a queue with images.
8.6.6 Clear the copy queue

You can clear the copy queue using any of the following methods:
l Select a different destination device from the Copy To screen.
l Select a different print layout from the Layout dialog box.
l Exit the Image Directory screen.
8.7 Archive images

The System supports a variety of archive options. You can archive images, patient information, and
the dose summary.
Available storage options include:
l CD/DVD
l DICOM Storage
See 9.2.2 Store/archive DICOM images on page 9-17 for detailed instructions on archiving images to
8-17
a DICOM server.
For more information on available storage options, call the Communications Center or your local
sales representative. See 13.11 Communication Center contact information on page 13-26.
You can archive static images and CINE runs from the system disk to CD/DVD or to DICOM storage.
When you copy images to a CD/DVD disc, a portable DICOM viewer is also written to the disc and
can be used to review those images on a PC.
The storage device button displayed on the Image Directory screen is unique for each available
storage device. The following example shows the button displayed for a CD/DVD.
NOTE: Before selecting CD/DVD make sure a disc is in the drive and that the green LED on the front of
the drive is off.
Figure 8-26: Device Queue and Preview Images

The number of images you can archive on the device media depends on the selected file format and
storage capacity of the media.
Patient and dose summary information can be archived with images.
8.7.1 Select a storage device

Use the Copy To screen to select an archive device.
1. Touch Copy To… on the Image Directory screen. The Copy To screen lists the available print
and storage devices.
8-18
Figure 8-27: Image Directory and Copy To Screens

2. Select the name of the storage device.
3. Touch OK to confirm your selection and return to the Image Directory screen.
8.7.2 Configure the Copy To ... device

If you select a DICOM device as your Copy To target device, see 9.2 DICOM operation on page 9-16.
If you choose a CD/DVD as your target device, touch the CD/DVD Options button. A screen similar
to the following displays.
Figure 8-28: CD/DVD Options Screen

The CD/DVD Options screen allows you to set options for storing images on a CD or DVD.
NOTE: For performance and compatibility information on the CD / DVD drive, see 13.8.3 CD/DVD-
R/RW drive on page 13-17.
8-19
8.7.3 Save As... options

The Save As options allow you to specify the format for the images that are stored on the CD or DVD.
l DICOM Viewer Compatible: Images are stored in DICOM formats that can be viewed using
the portable DICOM viewer that can be written to disc as part of the archive process. (See
8.7.4 Copy options on page 8-20 for more information). The following DICOM modality
formats are supported.
NOTE: Choosing DICOM Viewer Compatible allows you to export Dose Summary information for the
selected images. Once Dose Summary information has been exported and removed from the
Workstation it cannot be restored although it can be reviewed by a DICOM Viewer. If you save
the Dose Summary as an image, the Dose Summary Image can be restored to the Workstation
as an image. See 8.5.1 Save dose summary information on page 8-13 for information on sav-
ing the Dose Summary as an image.
XA - X-ray Angiographic Image Storage - 490 x 492 static and Cine image size
NOTE: Choose the XA format for images that will be displayed on a laptop computer. A resolution of
0.5K x 0.5K displays with more accuracy on a laptop than a higher resolution image.
RF - X-ray Radio Fluoroscopic Image Storage - 1K x 1K static and Cine image size
SC - Secondary Capture Image Storage - 1K x 1K static image only; screen capture type
image with Annotation and markers
l 9900 Compatible: Images are stored in the system's native RAW format. Select a file size of
0.5k or 1k to store the queued images in RAW format.
l Image Size: If you have previously selected to store unprocessed images, you can select
between two image sizes, 1K X 1K or 0.5K X 0.5K. Images stored at the higher resolution take
more room on the disc but contain more image information.
l Write Speed: Two write speeds are available on the CD / DVD drive.
l Maximum - Produces the fastest recording speed possible for the type and quality of
media in the drive. High quality CD-R media allow for the fastest maximum speeds while
DVD RW media generally produce the slowest maximum.
l Minimum - Causes the drive to record at the slowest speed for the type and quality of
media in the drive. Use Minimum recording speed for lower quality media or to assure a
compatible copy of the selected information.
8.7.4 Copy options

l Finalize CD after copy: Select this check box to close the disc. You cannot save additional
data to a disc once it is finalized. Clear the check box if you intend to create a multi-session
disc and save additional data to the disc.
NOTE: DVD-R discs are the only media type with multi-session capabilities. If a disc is not finalized
after the first session, it cannot be finalized until the system determines that it is full. See 13.8.3
CD/DVD-R/RW drive on page 13-17 for a list of supported CD and DVD formats.
8-20
l Remove Patient Information: Select remove patient information to delete all identifying
patient information from the selected images as they are written to the disc. The images are
not affected by deleting the patient information and can be retrieved from the disc for display
and study but they no longer contain any information about the patient.
l Include Viewer: Select include viewer to include a viewer application program that allows
images on the disc to be viewed on other platforms. See 8.9 Portable DICOM viewer on page 8-
28.
NOTE: Images included on the disc with the viewer have text added that says “Not for Diagnostic
Use.” If you do not wish your images to have this text applied, do not include the viewer on the
disc. Images can be viewed and printed from the Workstation or from another system with
DICOM viewing capabilities.
l Merge annotations and patient information: Select merge annotations and patient
information to include any annotations made to the image as well as all patient information
related to the selected image as a single DICOM overlay.
8.7.5 Copy to archive device

Static images
1. Select a storage device from the Copy To screen.
2. Select the preview images to archive.
3. Press and hold Ctrl on the keyboard to select multiple images from the previews in the
directory. As you select images, the Capacity, Free, and Selected, boxes are updated in the
Copy To screen.
Figure 8-29: Image Directory

You can continue selecting images until the Selected Images and Capacity boxes are the
same. If all of the images in the directory will fit on one disc, touch Select All to select all of the
images in the directory.
8-21
4. Touch Copy on the Image Directory screen to copy the queued images.
As images are sent to the storage device, the message Please Wait displays. To cancel the copy
process, touch Cancel on the message screen. Once the process has been canceled, a Please Wait
message with no Cancel button displays until it has completed the cancel command.
You can continue to copy images to a media until the message, Disk Full, displays. To continue
copying images, insert another disc and touch OK in the dialog box.
Cine Runs
The preview image of a Cine run contains an image number and the letter C.
1. Select the preview image of the Cine run. The Cine run plays on the left monitor and the Cine
screen displays on the right monitor.
2. Touch Exit to close the Cine screen.
3. Touch Copy To… on the Image Directory screen.
4. Select the target from the Copy To screen and touch OK.
5. Touch Copy.
NOTE: If cues are set, only the active portion of the Cine run between the cues is archived.
NOTE: DICOM limits the maximum size of a single Cine run to 4.29 GB.
8.7.6 Clear the storage device queue

You can clear the copy queue using any of the following methods:
l Select a different destination device from the Copy To screen.
l Select a different print layout from the Copy Format dialog box.
l Exit the Image Directory screen.
8.7.7 Copy from an archive device

You can display archived exams on the Workstation, and then copy images to the system and make
hard copies.
CAUTION Do not turn off the Workstation while the system is retrieving information from a disc in
the CD / DVD drive, that is, when the green activity light on the drive is on. Allow the
process to complete and the light on the front of the CD / DVD drive to go off, before
turning off the system. If you turn off the Workstation while information is being
retrieved from the disc you could cause all saved information on the Workstation to
become lost or corrupt.
1. Touch Copy From... on the Image Directory screen.
8-22
Figure 8-30: Copy From button

The Copy From screen displays a list of available source devices. You can copy images to any
available destination devices, as long as the source and destination devices are different.
Figure 8-31: Copy From Screen

2. Select the name of the device containing the patient exam.
3. Touch OK to confirm your choice.
4. The Saved Exams list for the selected device displays.
5. Select the patient name for the exam you want to display.
6. Touch OK to confirm your choice and close the Copy From screen.
NOTE: As images are viewed from the Image Directory, they replace the images on the Workstation,
beginning with the oldest first. Any images that were not previously backed up will be lost
from the Workstation.
8-23
CAUTION Do not turn off the Workstation while the system is retrieving information from a disc in
the CD / DVD drive and the green activity light on the drive is on. Allow the process to
complete and the light on the front of the CD / DVD drive to go off, before turning off the
system. If you turn off the Workstation while information is being retrieved from the disc
you could cause all saved information on the Workstation to become lost or corrupt.
8.7.8 Copy multiple patients to a single disc

The CD/DVD drive available on the GE OEC 9900 Elite Workstation makes it possible to copy more
than one patient’s images and information to a single “multi-session” disc. This capability is
controlled by the “Finalize after copy” check box in the CD/DVD Options screen.
CAUTION Information on a multi-session disc can become lost if the disc is not created and main-
tained on a single Workstation. Multi-session discs must be started, written to, and fin-
ished on the same Workstation. Starting a multi-session disc on one system and then
writing to it or finalizing it on another system could make the disc unreadable.
NOTE: Unless it is done correctly, complete CD/DVD data loss is possible when using multiple record-
ing sessions. For best data integrity it is recommended that the Finalize option always remain
selected when using CD/DVD media.
To copy multiple patients to a single disc you must copy each patient individually to the disc.
1. Place an appropriate disc in the CD/DVD drive.
NOTE: DVD-R discs are the only media type with multi-session capabilities. See 13.8.3 CD/DVD-R/RW
drive on page 13-17 for a list of supported CD and DVD formats.
2. Make sure that the “Finalize after copy” check box is left unselected as shown. Select and
copy the first patient’s information to the disc.
Figure 8-32: Finalize after copy unchecked

3. Select and copy the next patient’s information.
4. Continue the process for each patient.
8-24
CAUTION A multi-session CD/DVD must be created, written to, and finalized on the same Work-
station. Using a non-finalized CD/DVD on another system could make the disc unus-
able.
5. On the last patient, make sure to check the Finalize after copy box to finalize the disc.
Figure 8-33: Finalize after copy checked
Discs that are not finalized may not be readable on all CD/DVD drives. If the disc reaches
capacity before the final patient, it will be finalized automatically.
NOTE: When the copy is complete, verify that the information was correctly written to the disc. You
can verify the information by viewing the images copied to the disc in the Image Directory,
see 8.1 Image directory on page 8-1 for more information. If the information was written to
the disc using the “DICOM Viewer compatible” option, the disc can be inserted into a PC to
view the images for verification..
8.8 View, annotate, and export images with DICOM

Viewing, annotating, and exporting functions of the DICOM Viewer are controlled by a menu that
displays by clicking and holding the right mouse button over the selected image. The menu displays,
similar to the following.
Figure 8-34: DICOM Viewer right click menu
8-25
The menu options are as follows:
Magnifying glass
This option displays a magnifying glass window similar to the following.
Figure 8-35: DICOM Viewer Magnifying Glass

l Move the magnifying glass over the image to magnify the area of the image below the
magnifying glass.
l Use the slider at the bottom of the magnifying glass to increase or decrease the
magnification.
l Click on the close button in the top right corner to close the magnifying glass.
Zoom
The selected image can be displayed at normal magnification (1X) or at two time normal
magnification (2X). The currently selected magnification is shown with a bullet next to it.
Flip and rotate

Use the flip and rotate commands to change the orientation of the currently displayed image. You
can flip the image horizontally or vertically and rotate the image in 90 degree increments.
Inverted window
Use the Inverted Window command to invert the image display. An inverted display is the exact
opposite of the normal image display making the image appear as a negative of itself.
Create annotation
The Create Annotation command allows you to add distance or angle measurements to the
selected image.
1. Select Distance to add a distance measurement to the image. A plus symbol (+) displays on
the image at the selected point.
8-26
2. Click on the point and drag the + to the desired distance that you wish to annotate. The
image displays similar to the following.
Figure 8-36: DICOM Viewer Distance Annotation
l To move the annotation, click anywhere on the distance line and then drag it to
the desired location.
l To change the length of the annotation, click either end of the distance line and
drag it to the desired length.
l To delete a distance annotation, click on it and then press the delete key.
3. Select Angle to add an angle annotation to the image. The image displays similar to the
following.
Figure 8-37: DICOM Viewer Angle Annotation

l To move the annotation, click on any of the lines and then drag it to the desired location.
l To change the angle of the measurement, click on any of the points and then drag it to the
8-27
desired angle.
l To delete an angle annotation, click on it and then press the delete key.
Reset image settings

The Reset Image Settings command returns the image to its original state after it has been
magnified, flipped, rotated, or inverted using the commands in the menu.
Export
The export command allows you to export the image as a jpg or tiff image. When you select export,
a dialog box displays , allowing you to give the image a name, select the format, either jpg or tiff,
and select the folder where you wish to store it.
8.9 Portable DICOM viewer

When you copy images to a CD / DVD you have the option of including a DICOM viewer utility to the
disk. This utility allows you to view the images and Cine runs on the disk as well as add linear and
angular measurements to the images.
CAUTION The DICOM Viewer should not be used for diagnostic purposes. Its use is limited to
reviewing images. The images should be displayed on the Workstation or printed if
they are used to provide diagnostic information.
8.9.1 Use the DICOM viewer

When the DICOM Viewer is written to a CD / DVD it configures the disk with Autorun files. These files
allow the viewer to run automatically when the disk is inserted into a CD / DVD drive on a personal
computer using the Windows operating system.
To begin using the DICOM Viewer simply insert the disk containing the images and the viewer into
the CD /DVD drive of the PC.
A screen similar to following displays.
NOTE: If the viewer fails to start, you can run the Autostart program directly from the disk or open
Internet Explorer version 5.x or later and open the Start.htm file from the CdViewer folder on
the disk.
8-28
1- Control bar
2- Image viewport
3- Image path
Figure 8-38: Portable DICOM Viewer Main Screen

This screen contains all of the images and Cine runs found on the disk as well as all of the controls
necessary to view, annotate, or export the images. The viewer also may be used to view DICOM
images stored elsewhere on the PC.
8.9.2 DICOM viewer control bar

Use the controls on the control bar to view, annotate, and export the images.
Use Browse to find other images on the PC. The path to the images displays in
the Image path area below the Browse button.
Go back one page of images.
Go back one image.
Go forward one image.
Go forward one page of images.
Go back one Cine run.
Go forward one Cine run.
NOTE: Cine runs display as a series of images. The run can be played by selecting any of the images
in the series. Individual images from the run can be annotated and exported.
Change Cine layout. You can change the layout of the Cine series display to
show more images or fewer images at one time.
Change viewport layout. You can change the layout of the viewport display
to show more images or fewer images at one time.
Play selected Cine run. This icon is active only when an image from a Cine run
is selected.
Stop running Cine run. This icon displays only when a Cine run is selected.
8-29
Decrease speed of Cine run.
Increase speed of Cine run. The current frames per second displays next to
this icon.
Copy the image properties of the selected image to all images in the current
directory.
Presentation State lists the presentation states (if any) associated with the selected study.
Window Preset Lists any window / level presets associated with the selected Cine run.
Annotations Check Box Shows / hides the viewport annotations.
Displays the help file for the Portable DICOM Viewer.
8-30
9. Additional functions and options

This chapter contains information about applications available on the OEC Workstation that
enhance and extend the functionality of the Workstation, including a DICOM interface, DICOM
Query/Retrieve operations, surgical navigation applications, the Medrad Mark V ProVis injector,
external video input for applications using external video devices, and heat management options for
the C-Arm.
l DICOM setup and configuration
l DICOM operation
l DICOM query retrieve option
l Medrad Mark V ProVis injector
l Radiographic film
l Heat management
9.1 DICOM setup and configuration

The American College of Radiology (ACR) and the National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA) developed the Digital Imaging and Communications in MediCine (DICOM) standard.
The standard uses an object-oriented design to query the worklist, archive, and print images.
This section describes how to:
l Connect the Workstation to the network
l Configure the Workstation and DICOM devices
l Query, Retrieve, and Display studies and patient information stored on DICOM Servers
l Print patient information and images
l Archive patient information and images
NOTE: The GE OEC 9900 Elite supports 10 Base-T and 100 Base-T Ethernet connections.
During network transfers, both images and patient information are sent. This patient information
may be the result of a DICOM WorkList Query, or be manually entered on the Workstation in the
Patient Annotation screen by the technologist. Patient Birth Dates can be part of the manually
entered patient data. For the Birth Date to be transferred correctly, it must be entered in the Date
format defined in the Customize, Time/Date screen. The choices are YYYYMMDD or MMDDYYYY.
9.1.1 Network connection

To use the DICOM interface you must connect your Workstation to your facility's DICOM network.
The network connector is identified on the WorkStation's external interface panel as Ethernet.
9-1
1. Connect an Ethernet cable to the facility's wall jack and to the Ethernet jack on the
Workstations external interface panel.
2. Verify that both connectors lock in place.
If the network cable is not connected before start up, a message displays on the right monitor,
informing the user that the network is not responding. Touch OK to clear the message screen.
If at any time the system is on and either the network cable is unplugged, or the network system
goes down, a message displays stating that network functions are impaired. Again, touch OK to
clear the screen and resume normal operation.
Figure 9-1: The Ethernet connector on the Workstation external interface panel
9.1.2 Configure DICOM

The Workstation must be configured to access the DICOM network. Configuration identifies the
Workstation to the network and defines the DICOM network nodes to the Workstation. The DICOM
nodes supported include:
l Workstation Retrieve Server
l Storage servers
l Print servers
l Query servers
All devices that meet the DICOM standard are required to have a Conformance Statement that
defines how the device implements the standard. During configuration, you will supply information
contained in the device Conformance Statements.
NOTE: Network communications are always initiated by the Workstation.
9-2
Figure 9-2: Workstation to network to server connection
9.1.3 Setup configurations
Press the Setup key on the Workstation keyboard. A screen similar to the following displays.
Figure 9-3: Workstation Setup screen

Use this screen to access the DICOM and Network setup screens.
Begin by setting up the Network connection. Touch Network Config…. A screen similar to the
following displays.
9-3
9.1.4 Network configuration
Figure 9-4: Network Configuration Screen
NOTE: When all configurations are set up, or after any changes to the setup of a server, you must
restart the Workstation to accept those changes. To restart the Workstation, turn it off, wait 10
seconds, then turn it back on.
The Workstation is identified to the network by its host Internet Protocol (IP) address and its subnet
mask.
The Workstation configures itself automatically if DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is
checked. DHCP allows the Workstation to obtain an IP address and other necessary network
information from a server on the network. If your network does not have a DHCP server, you will
need to fill in the information on this screen manually. You can obtain the correct information from
your network administrator.
You can verify your network settings by using the Verify button. Touch Verify. A screen similar to the
following displays.
Figure 9-5: The Network Verify Screen
9-4
Test your network connection as follows.

1. Enter a network destination, an IP address or server name, in the Destination box.
2. Touch Ping. The Workstation sends a ping command to the destination you previously
entered. The results of the ping display in the results window.
3. If the ping is successful, your network connection is working correctly and you can continue
with the DICOM configuration.
4. If the ping is not successful, check your destination entry and try again.
If you still are not successful, you may need to check your Workstation network
configuration as well as your network cable to make sure that everything is setup correctly.
Finally, you can contact GE OEC Customer Service for help.

5. Once the network is working properly, touch OK to return to the Network Configuration
screen and then touch OK again to return to the Workstation Configuration screen to
continue with the DICOM configuration.
9.1.5 DICOM configuration

Touch DICOM… on the Workstation Setup screen. A screen similar to the following displays.
Figure 9-6: DICOM Configuration Screen

This screen allows you to set up lists and default parameters for use with DICOM operations.
9-5
Store Server list

A DICOM store server is a networked computer used to archive images.
1. Touch Store Servers... on the DICOM Configuration screen. A screen similar to the following
displays.
Figure 9-7: The DICOM Store Server List Screen

The DICOM Store Server List displays a list of DICOM storage servers. [----]... displays on
buttons for which a Server Alias has not been defined. Once a Server Alias is defined, the
button label changes to reflect the name entered for the Server Alias.
2. Select a [----]... button for each storage server you want to configure. A screen similar to the
following displays.
Figure 9-8: The DICOM Store Definition Screen

3. Obtain the following information from your network administrator and enter it on this screen:
9-6
Server Alias Unique name, internal to Workstation, used to identify the server in the list of
available destination devices.
Server IP Unique IP address assigned to the server you are configuring. Obtain from net-
Address work administrator.
Port Number Port number assigned to the storage device. Obtain a port number from your
network administrator, or see the DICOM Conformance Statement for the stor-
age server.
AE Title DICOM Application Entity Title (AE Title). Obtain title from network admin-
istrator, or see the DICOM Conformance Statement for the storage device.
Gateway IP IP address of the gateway network node. Only enter if necessary for network
Address configuration. See the network administrator.
Modality Image modality supported by the storage device. See the DICOM
Conformance Statement for the storage device. The Workstation supports the
following modalities:
RF X-ray Radio Fluoroscopic Image Storage - static and Cine
XA X-ray Angiographic Image Storage - static and Cine
SC Secondary Capture Image Storage - 1K x 1K static image only; screen
capture type image with Annotation and markers
Image Size Size of images supported by storage device. You can choose 1K x 1K or
0.5K x 0.5K
Store Allows storage of Overlay information associated with an image as data
Overlay separate from the image. For more information on DICOM Overlays, see
Overlays on page 9-8.
Always Always store overlay information with the image.
If Image is Annotated Store overlay information only if the image is
annotated.
Never Never store overlay information with the image.
Merge This check box allows you to have annotation and patient information
Annotation combined into a single overlay and then stored with the image.
and Patient
Information
4. Touch VERIFY to determine the server is connected. If an error message displays, follow the
onscreen directions.
The message, THE DICOM SERVER HAS VERIFIED SUCCESSFULLY, displays if the server has
connected. Touch OK to close the screen.
5. Touch OK to close the DICOM Store Definition screen.
6. Repeat steps one through four for each DICOM storage server on the network. When you
have finished configuring all servers, touch EXIT to close the DICOM Store Server List screen.
9-7
Overlays
DICOM Overlays represent a method of adding information to a Clinical Image. This information
may be in the form of text or graphics. There are two methods of sending Overlay information, and
the Workstation incorporates both methods.
Burned-In Overlays
The first method is simply adding the information directly over the clinical image. This is referred
to as "burned- in" overlays, because the information is part of the image and cannot be removed.
Do the following for a burned-in overlay on an image:
1. Display the image that you want sent as a burned overlay on the Workstation screen.
2. Select the SC modality in the DICOM Storage Definition screen to send the image data to the
PACs system or network printer.
Overlays As Separate Data
The second method of storing overlays is to send the information as separate data elements,
depending on the selection made in the DICOM Storage Definition screen. This method allows
the PACs system to control whether or not the overlay information displays. The following
describes data transmission using the different DICOM Storage Definition selections:
Always allows additional data elements to be sent with every image, whether or not the user
added any post-processed Markers or Comments to the image.
If Image Is Annotated allows two additional data elements to be sent in addition to the
image data if, and only if, the user adds any post-processing type markers or comments to
the image. The first image data element contains the clinical image; the second contains
Markers, Comments, Arrows and the measurement results; and the third contains all the
information in the periphery of the image, namely Patient Demographics, X-ray technique,
Window and Level settings, and Institute Name, date, and time.
Never allows no additional information or data elements to be sent. This optimizes network
transfer speed, but any markers or comments added to the image will not be sent with the
image.
The DICOM overlay selection applies to RF and XA modalities. The SC modality always uses
burned in overlays.
9-8
Print servers
DICOM print servers are network nodes that provide print functions in compliance with the DICOM
standard.
To configure a DICOM Print Server:
1. Touch Print Servers... on the DICOM Configuration screen. A screen similar to the following
displays.
Figure 9-9: The DICOM Print Server List Screen

The DICOM Print Server List displays a list of print servers. [----]... displays on buttons with no
defined server alias. Once a server alias is defined, the button label changes to reflect the
name entered for the server alias.
2. Select a [----]... button. A screen similar to the following displays.
Figure 9-10: DICOM Print Definition Screen
9-9
3. Obtain the following information from the Network Administrator for your facility and enter it
in the text boxes on this screen:
Server Alias Unique name, internal to the Workstation, used to identify the server in
the list of available destination devices.
AE Title DICOM Application Entity Title (AE Title). Obtain the title from the
network administrator, or see the DICOM Conformance Statement for
the print device.
Server IP Address Unique IP address assigned to the server you are configuring. Obtain
from the network administrator.
Port Number Port number assigned to the print device. Obtain from the network
administrator, or see the DICOM Conformance Statement for the print
device.
Config. Info See the DICOM Conformance statement for configuration information
options.
Gateway IP IP address of the gateway network node. Only enter if necessary for
Address network configuration. See the network administrator.
Maximum Density Maximum print density. See the DICOM Conformance Statement for the
print device.
Minimum Density Minimum print density. See the DICOM Conformance Statement for the
print device.
4. Touch Border Density... and select a image border density. The available options are:
l Black
l White
Touch OK to close the Border Density dialog box.
5. Touch Empty Density... and select the image empty density. The available options are:
l Black
l White
Touch OK to close the Empty Density dialog box.
6. Touch Copies... and select the number of copies that will be printed each time a print
command is sent to this printer.
Touch OK to close the Copies dialog box.
7. Touch Print Priority... and select a print priority. The available options are:
l High
l Medium
l Low
Touch OK to close the Print Priority dialog box.
9-10
8. Touch Destination... and select a print destination. The available options are:
l Magazine
l Processor
Touch OK to close the Destination dialog box.
9. Touch Medium Type... and select a medium type. The available options are:
l Paper
l Clear Film
l Blue Film
Touch OK to close the Medium Type dialog box.
10. Touch Film Size... and select a film size. The available options are:
l 8 inch x 10 inch • 14 inch x 14 inch
l 10 inch x 12 inch • 14 inch x 17 inch
l 10 inch x 14 inch • 24 cm x 30 cm
l 11 inch x 14 inch
Touch OK to close the Film Size dialog box.
11. Select a film matrix format for the X-ray images. You can select up to four formats for each
DICOM print device you are configuring.
A default format selection displays on the first Format... button. The default selection is
Standard\1,1.
To select a new film matrix, or additional formats, Touch Format... and then select a format
from the Print Format screen.
The film matrix determines the printed format for the X-ray images in columns and rows. The
matrix choices are limited to those available from the selected printer. The total number of
images printed on one film sheet is the product of the two numbers. For example, 2 columns
multiplied by 3 rows, equals a total of six images printed on one film.
The Workstation supports the following film matrix formats:
9-11
(columns x rows)
1x1 3x3
1x2 3x4
2x2 4x4
2x3 4x5
Repeat to define additional print formats. Touch OK to close the Format dialog box.
12. Touch Verify to determine the server is connected. If an error message occurs, follow the
The message, The DICOM Server Has Verified Successfully, displays if the server has
13. Touch OK to leave the DICOM Print Definition screen.
14. Touch Exit to leave the DICOM Print Server List and return to DICOM Configuration screen.
Worklist query server

The DICOM query server provides patient and exam schedule information from the Radiology
Information System (RIS).
1. To configure the query server, touch Worklist Query... on the DICOM Configuration screen.
The Worklist Query Definition screen displays.
Figure 9-11: The Worklist Query Definition screen

2. Obtain the following information about the query server from your network administrator
and enter it on this screen:
Server IP Address Unique IP address assigned to the server you are configuring.
Obtain from network administrator.
Port Number Port number assigned to the query server. Obtain from the network
administrator, or see the DICOM Conformance Statement.
9-12
AE Title DICOM Application Entity Title (AE Title). Obtain title from network
administrator, or see the DICOM Conformance Statement for the
query device.
Gateway IP Address IP address of the gateway network node. Only enter if necessary for
network configuration. See the network administrator.
Modality Choose RF, XA, SC, or ALL.
RF X-ray RadioFluoroscopic Image Storage
XA X-ray Angiographic Image Storage
SC Secondary Capture Image Storage
ALL Select ALL unless querying for a specific modality
Worklist The Worklist check box should be marked with an X to enable work-
list query. See the DICOM Conformance Statement to obtain the
query type.
NOTE: No error checking is done for date or time values so results from the server will vary.
3. Select Get Today's Exams, or enter information for a refined query in the next section.
The lower half of the Worklist Query Definition screen provides a way to refine or filter your
search of the DICOM database. Multiple information entered may be used to refine your
search.
4. Enter the specific search criteria needed.
Patient Name Enter patient's name according to DICOM Format: Last^First^MI.

Use a ^ between the names, not a comma. (ie: jones^jason^h^jr.)
If supported by the server being queried, use * for a general search
of a name. (ie: jones*) Check the server's DICOM Conformance Sheet
for more information.
Accession # Enter the accession number.
Study Date YYYYMMDD. Use the format selected in the Customize, Time/Date
menu to enter the date. You can enter a date range using the
following formats:
l YYYMMDD retrieves all studies before and including this date.
l YYYMMDD- retrieves all studies after and including this date.
l YYYMMDD-YYYMMDD retrieves all studies between and
including these dates.
Study Time HHMMSS. Use this format to enter the time. Use the same syntax as
that used for Study Date.
Time is entered based on 24 hours. (ie: 2:00 pm is entered 140000.)
9-13
Physician Enter the physician's name according to DICOM format:

Last^First^MI. See Patient Name above for more details.
NOTE: The Accession field is always enabled on the DICOM Query Directory screen. The accession
box may be enabled or disabled on the Patient Information screen. This is set up in the Cus-
tomize Patient Information screen.
5. Touch Verify to determine the server is connected. If an error message displays, follow the
The message, THE DICOM SERVER HAS VERIFIED SUCCESSFULLY, displays if the server has
6. Touch OK to close the Worklist Query Definition screen.
Image retrieve server

The DICOM image retrieve server allows you to retrieve patient images from a DICOM Query Server.
To configure the image retrieve server and one or more query servers:
1. Touch Image Retrieve... from the DICOM Configuration screen. A screen similar to the
following displays.
Figure 9-12: DICOM Image Retrieve List

The DICOM Image Retrieve List displays a list of image query servers. The empty name
symbol, [----]..., displays on buttons with no defined Server Alias.
Query/Retrieve DICOM Application Entity Title (AE Title). Obtain title from network
AE Title administrator, or see the DICOM Conformance Statement for the
server. This title is used for queries. The title also is used by the
Retrieve Server in response to store requests.
Port Number Port number assigned to the server running on the Workstation. The
default value is 10004. Valid values are 104, 1025-49000.
9-14
Verify Touch Verify to determine that the selected port is available. If an

error message occurs, follow the onscreen directions.
The message, THE PORT HAS VERIFIED SUCCESSFULLY, displays if
the port is active. Touch OK to close the screen.
Days for Cache Specifies the number of days that retrieved documents will remain in
the cache. Use the arrows to increase or decrease the number
of days.
2. Select a [----]... button. A screen similar to the following displays.
Figure 9-13: Query/Retrieve Definition

3. Obtain the following information from your network administrator and enter it on this screen:
Server Alias Unique name, internal to the Workstation, used to identify the server in
the list of available source devices.
Hostname / IP Unique Hostname or IP address assigned to the server you are con-
Address figuring. Obtain from network administrator.
Port Port number assigned to the query device. Obtain a port number from
your network administrator, or see the DICOM Conformance Statement
for the query/retrieve server.
AE Title DICOM Application Entity Title (AE Title). Obtain title from network
administrator, or see the DICOM Conformance Statement for the
query/retrieve server.
Timeout The time in seconds that the Workstation waits for a response from the
server before timing out.
9-15
Information Select the appropriate information model for the server that is being
Model configured. For the appropriate information model see the AACS Admin
or to the DICOM conformance statement for the server. Select a model
that has both find and move support. Find and move support are
necessary for the Query/Retrieve application to function properly.
Patient Root Starts queries at the patient level down to the series level.
Study Root Starts queries at the study level down to the series level.
Patient/Study Root Starts queries at the patient level down to the series
level.
Once a Server Alias is defined, the button label changes to reflect the name entered for
the Server Alias.
4. Touch Verify to determine if the server is connected. If an error message occurs, follow the
onscreen directions. The message, THE DICOM SERVER HAS VERIFIED SUCCESSFULLY,
displays if the server is connected. Touch OK to close the message.
5. Touch OK to close the Query/Retrieve Definition screen.
9.2 DICOM operation

After you have configured DICOM on the Workstation you can use DICOM for printing, storing, and
archiving images.
9.2.1 Print DICOM images

More information can be found in Image Review, Hardcopy, and Archive.
When printing frames from a Cine run, only the frame showing on the left monitor will be added to
the queue.
Make a Hardcopy
NOTE: For HIPAA compliance, remove identifying information from the image using the Setup
Patient Information screen prior to printing.
1. Select the DICOM printer from the Copy To screen. Touch OK to exit.
2. Choose a layout format.
3. If the image you want to hardcopy is already displayed on the left monitor, go to Step 4.
Otherwise, select the preview image. The image displays on the left monitor.
4. Select a box in the copy queue to send the image to the queue. The boxes represent the
hardcopy layout and location of images on the media. You can place images into the boxes in
any order.
5. Touch COPY.
9-16
9.2.2 Store/archive DICOM images

The Workstation allows:
l Storage of static images and Cine runs on a DICOM storage device.
l Sending the current frame viewed on the left monitor to a DICOM store server. (This action
may be taken during the playback of the Cine Run.)
NOTE: When patient information is transferred to a DICOM store, the data is then under the control of
another system. The other system is then responsible for HIPAA compliance.
Use the Image Directory screen to load images into the print or storage queue and execute the
copy command. 8. Image review, hardcopy, and archive on page 8-1 contains a complete
description of how to use the image directory functions.
As images are sent to the storage device, the message Please Wait displays. To cancel the copy
process, touch Cancel on the Please Wait screen. Once the process has been canceled, a Please
Wait message with no Cancel button will display until the command has been completed.
To store images and Cine Runs on a DICOM server:
1. Touch Copy To from the Image Directory screen. The Copy To screen displays.
Figure 9-14: The Copy To Screen

2. Select a DICOM server from the list of configured destination devices.
3. Touch OK to close the Copy To screen.
9-17
Figure 9-15: Image Directory Screen

4. Touch Layout and select the desired layout for your storage server.
5. Select the thumbnail for the image or Cine run you want to archive.
6. Select the device queue icon to load the image or Cine run to the queue.
As you load images into the queue, the Storage Device Queue Icon is updated to display how
many images and runs are loaded.
NOTE: Cine opens the Cine Playback window. You must exit Cine playback and then select the
queue icon to queue the entire Cine run.
7. Touch Copy to send a single frame immediately to the DICOM store server.
NOTE: The Cine screen should display on the right monitor.
Figure 9-16: Cine Screen with DICOM Store server button
9-18
8. Pause the Cine run.

9. Advance to the frame to be stored.
10. Press the server icon on the Cine screen. Please Wait displays during the transfer until
transfer to the DICOM Store Server is complete.
The image is sent to the last store server chosen by default. The name of the server chosen
displays below the DICOM icon. (For more information, see Store Server list on page 9-6 .)
11. Wait until the transfer has completed.
If X-rays are initiated while transfer is in progress, the transfer will terminate.
NOTE: For complete instructions how to use the Cine screen, see 6.2 Cine review on page 6-5.
9.2.3 Copy from CD/DVD storage to DICOM

Copy a previously archived Cine Run
1. Insert the CD / DVD containing the archived exam in the CD/DVD drive. See 8.2 Retrieve a
saved exam on page 8-4 for instructions on how to retrieve an archived exam.
2. Touch Copy From on the Image Directory screen. Choose SYSTEM and then touch OK. The
Copy To device will automatically default to diskette.
3. Touch Copy To on the Image Directory screen. Choose the DICOM storage device and then
touch OK.
4. Touch Copy to copy the Cine Run from the System to the DICOM server.
Clear the Storage Device Queue

1. Touch Copy To. The Copy To screen displays and all images loaded into the queue are
removed from the queue.
2. Select a different storage device, or touch Exit to return to the Image Directory screen.
9.3 DICOM query retrieve option

The Workstation provides a fully functional DICOM Query/Retrieve system that allows you to find,
retrieve, and view images from a range of sources stored on the DICOM network. You can use the
DICOM Query/Retrieve tools to find and retrieve images from a DICOM network or from a CD/DVD in
the Workstation CD/DVD drive.
9.3.1 DICOM retrieve

DICOM Retrieve is found in the Additional Applications screen.
9-19
Press the Additional Applications key on the Workstation keyboard. A screen similar to the
following displays.
Figure 9-17: Additional Applications Screen

Touch DICOM Retrieve. A screen similar to the following displays.
Figure 9-18: DICOM Retrieve Screen
Search
Information from the current patient displays in the search boxes at the top of the screen and the
list shows records available for that patient. You can change the search as follows.
1. Enter the parameters in the boxes at the top of the DICOM Retrieve screen for the
information that you want to retrieve. You do not need to fill in all of the boxes. For example, if
you enter just a last name or part of a last name, the system will find all records with that last
name or that include the portion of the name in the selected source.
2. Select a date range in the Date list.
3. Select a DICOM source or local CD/DVD in the Source list.
9-20
NOTE: The sources found in the Source list are those servers entered in the query/retrieve server def-
inition lists during DICOM setup. If a desired server is not listed, you may need to enter the def-
inition for that server in the appropriate server list.
4. Once you have entered your desired query parameters, touch Search on the DICOM
Retrieve screen. The system performs the query and displays an in progress message as it
searches and finds records. When the search is complete, the results display in the DICOM
Retrieve screen.
Retrieve
1. Once the records from your search have been found, you can retrieve the images associated
with the records. Select a record from the list and then touch Retrieve on the DICOM Retrieve
screen.
NOTE: If the list in the DICOM Retrieve window is too long to fit on one screen, you can use the scroll
bars on the right side and bottom of the window to move through the list to find the record
that you are seeking. Additionally, clicking on the headings at the top of the Window sorts the
list by the selected heading. Columns can be resized by selecting the divider in the column
header.
The system retrieves all of the files associated with the record that you selected. An in
progress message displays while the files are retrieved. When the files have been retrieved, the
progress message disappears.
As the files are retrieved from the server, they are cached on the Workstation hard disk. If a
record exists in the cache, a dialog box displays, asking if you wish to overwrite the existing
data. Should the cache become full, a screen similar to the following displays.
Figure 9-19: DICOM Manual Delete Screen

The Manual Delete screen displays all of the records currently in the Query/Retrieve cache.
MB Required box shows how much space must be free before the retrieve operation can
continue. One record can represent one or more files.
9-21
NOTE: These records have been previously retrieved from DICOM servers for viewing on the Work-
station. Deleting these records does not remove them from their original servers. Acquired
images that are stored on the GE OEC Workstation are not included in this list. Deleting these
records does not affect any other acquired images stored on the Workstation.
2. Select records from the Manual Delete screen. You can select more than one record at a time
by holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard as you select records. As records are selected,
the MB Selected box shows how much space the selected records occupy. To complete your
retrieve operation you must clear at least as much space as shown in the MB Required box.
As records are deleted, the MB Required box decreases.
3. When you have selected the records you wish to delete, touch Delete Selected. A delete
confirmation box displays.
4. To delete the selected records from the cache, touch Yes in the delete confirmation box and
then touch OK. The records are deleted from the cache. If sufficient space has been cleared,
the DICOM Retrieve screen displays and the requested retrieve operation is completed. If
more space must be cleared, the Manual Delete screen reappears so you can delete
additional records.
View
1. After the images from the selected record have been retrieved, you can view them using the
Query/Retrieve Viewer. Select a record from the list in the DICOM Retrieve screen.
NOTE: If the list in the DICOM Retrieve window is too long to fit on one screen, you can use the scroll
bars on the right side and bottom of the window to move through the list to find the record
that you are seeking. Additionally, clicking on the headings at the top of the Window sorts the
list by the selected heading.
2. Touch View on the DICOM Retrieve screen. A screen similar to the following displays.
Figure 9-20: DICOM Retrieve Study Viewer

The images associated with the selected record display as thumbnail images in the Study
9-22
Viewer screen. If there are more than 16 images use the arrow keys to scroll through the
images. The other controls on screen are as follows:
Layout – Adjusts the number of images displayed on the Study Viewer screen by
changing the layout of the retrieved images. The supported layouts are 4X4, 3X3,
and 2X2.
Rotate – Rotates the selected image.
Flip Horizontal – Flips the selected image over horizontally.
Flip Vertical – Flips the selected image over vertically.
Negate – Inverts the selected image into a negative image.
Reset – Removes all changes and resets the selected image to its original form.
Multiple Select and Review – Allows you to select multiple images and then page
through just the selected images in the Image Viewer.
3. Select an image to work with. Use the onscreen controls to manipulate the image. To view the
image in more detail or to see a complete Cine run, touch Image View. A screen similar to the
following displays.
Figure 9-21: DICOM Image View Screen

Use the Image View screen to view and manipulate images and Cine runs. The controls on
this screen are as follows.
Overlay – Displays any overlay information stored with the image. Overlays can
include, markers, annotations, measurements, patient information, and so on.
Rotate – Rotates the selected image.
Flip Horizontal – Flips the selected image over horizontally.
9-23
Flip Vertical – Flips the selected image over vertically.
Negate – Inverts the selected image into a negative image.
Window/Level – Adjusts the window/level. The window/level displays in the bottom

right corner of the image as C:XXX and W:XXX.
Zoom – Zooms in or out on the image. The zoom factor displays under the button.
Pan – Moves the image on screen for viewing all parts of a zoomed image.
Reset – Removes all changes and resets the selected image to its original form.
If the selected image is a Cine run, the Cine viewer controls at the bottom of the screen are
enabled. The total frames and current frame number displays under the Cine controls.
Play/Pause – Initiates play back of a Cine run or pauses a Cine run that is playing.
Back 1 Frame – Goes back 1 frame in a Cine run.
Forward 1 Frame - Goes forward 1 frame in a Cine run.
Back Multiple Frames – Goes back multiple frames, up to 10 frames, in a Cine run.
Forward Multiple Frames – Goes forward multiple frames, up to 10 frames, in a
Cine run.
4. Touch OK to return to the DICOM Study View screen.

5. Touch OK on the DICOM Study View screen to return to the DICOM Retrieve screen.
9.4 Medrad Mark V ProVis injector

The Medrad Mark V ProVis Injector can be connected to the Workstation using the Room Interface
connector on the rear of the Workstation. Connecting the injector to the Workstation allows
automatic injection of contrast when performing Roadmap and/or Subtraction imaging.
9.4.1 Safety notice

The information presented here is intended for personnel with adequate training and experience in
angiographic studies. Any attempt to operate or repair a medical device such as an injector without
adequate training may result in personal injury, property damage or patient injury.
9.4.2 Proper injector use

Before attempting to connect and use the injector with the Workstation, read the Medrad Mark V
ProVis Operation Manual (KMP 910E). Keep the manual available wherever the injector will be used.
9.4.3 Intended use

The Medrad Mark V ProVis injector is intended to be used specifically for the purposes of injecting
intravenous contrast medium and common flushing solutions into humans for angiographic
9-24
diagnostic studies. DO NOT attempt to use the injector for any other purpose.
9.4.4 Connect the injector to the Workstation

Use only the interface cable provided by GE Healthcare to connect the injector to the Workstation.
See 13.11.1 Ordering disposable and accessory items on page 13-26 for information on ordering an
interface cable for your injector.
CAUTION Replace any covers removed from connectors on the Workstation and its periph-
erals when the injector is disconnected.
Connect the interface cable to the Room Interface connector on the rear of the Workstation and to
the J40, universal interface connector, on the Control Room Console Connector Panel on the
Medrad Injector.
Figure 9-22: Medrad injector connections
9.4.5 Auto inject synchronization

When properly set up and connected, the Medrad injector injects a preset amount of contrast media
upon receiving a signal from the Workstation. During Digital Subtract, the inject signal is sent when
the syringe icon displays on the left monitor. Display of the syringe icon indicates that a digital mask
has been acquired and the injection of contrast media may begin. Make sure the injector is set up to
respond to the external signal from the Workstation. If the injector is not properly set up, contrast
media may be injected prematurely or not at all.
The following table details the Workstation modes when the signal is sent from the Workstation to
the injector.
NOTE: The Medrad Injector must be correctly connected to the Workstation and armed before the
Workstation can automatically activate the injector and inject contrast media.
9-25
Table 9-1: Workstation Auto Inject Synchronization

Mode Cue Contrast Injected
Subtract Inject icon displayed Inject signal is sent when icon displays.
Status bar:
Roadmap-1 Inject icon displayed Inject icon displays while Roadmap-1 is active.
Status bar: The Workstation does not send a signal to the
injector. The Med Rad injector must be trig-
gered manually.
HLF with Cine Status bar: Inject signal is sent as soon as the image is
stable, 1 to 2 seconds after the X-ray switch is
pressed.
Digital Cine Status bar: Inject signal is sent as soon as the image is sta-
ble, 1 to 2 seconds after the X-ray switch is
pressed.
Digital Pulse Pressing the Cardiac pedal Inject signal is sent as soon as the image is sta-
Cine ble, 1 to 2 seconds after the X-ray switch is
pressed.
9.5 Radiographic film

Use film mode to produce radiographic films. The film cassette holder described in this section is
available as an option and should be used if you use film mode.
9.5.1 Make a film exposure

1. Press the FILM key on the C-Arm control panel.
NOTE: Once film mode has been selected, the field size and collimator settings are locked. If further
adjustments are required, you must first reenter Fluoro mode. To leave film mode, press the
FILM key again.
2. Place the cassette holder over the face of the image intensifier with the handle opened out.
Figure 9-23: Installation of cassette holder

3. Rotate the cassette holder handle to securely attach the cassette holder to the image
intensifier.
9-26
WARNING: Verify that the cassette holder is securely attached to the image intensifier. Unse-
cured cassette holders may fall, injuring patients or personnel.
CAUTION When using the film cassette holder, ensure that the film cassette is centered. Improper
centering may result in misalignment with the X-ray beam and an incomplete film
exposure may occur.
4. Insert a film cassette into the cassette holder and center it.
NOTE: The cassette holder uses friction to hold the cassette. See 13.10.7 Film cassette on page 13-
25 for film cassette sizes.
Figure 9-24: Insert a cassette
WARNING: Verify that the cassette is held securely within the cassette holder. Unsecured
film cassettes may fall, injuring patients or personnel.
5. Adjust the radiographic technique (kVp and mAs) to the desired levels.
6. Press and hold any X-ray switch.
NOTE: There is a 2-second delay after the switch is pressed while the rotating anode accelerates and
the filament is heated. The beginning of the exposure is signaled by a beep. The end of the
exposure is signaled by three quick beeps.
7. Release the X-ray switch at the end of the exposure (when you hear three quick beeps).
NOTE: If a film exposure is terminated prematurely, the message RELEASED EARLY will be displayed
briefly on the C-Arm control panel. When the message is no longer displayed you can
continue.
8. Remove the film cassette by pushing the cassette out of the cassette holder.
9. To remove the cassette holder, open the cassette holder handle and press firmly against the
side of the cassette holder.
9-27
Figure 9-25: Remove the cassette holder
NOTE: The cassette holder is designed to attach snugly to the image intensifier lip when the handle is
engaged. It may be necessary to strike the cassette holder with the palm of your hand to
dislodge the cassette holder from the image intensifier.
Prearm for film exposure

The system can be prearmed in film mode up to sixty seconds in advance to avoid the 2-second
delay when the X-ray switch is pressed.
To prearm the system:
1. Set the desired technique (kVp and mAs).
2. Press any X-ray switch and release before the 2-second delay expires.
NOTE: The C-Arm control panel displays the message, ARMED.
3. When you are ready to make the exposure, press the X-ray switch again. The system will
initiate an exposure immediately. There will be no delay.
If you decide not to make a prearmed exposure, wait sixty seconds or press any control panel key
(except the X-ray On switch) to cancel prearming.
9.6 Heat management

This section describes operating characteristics of an GE OEC C-Arm fitted with optional cooling
hardware and software connected to your Workstation. Heat management is standard on new
cardiac systems, optional for new non-cardiac systems, and can be added as a kit to existing
cardiac systems. The additional X-ray tube cooling capability provided by these changes permits
more efficient X-ray tube anode target and housing cooling. This contributes to longer X-ray tube
life, better system performance, and improved patient throughput.
NOTE: It is assumed that you are familiar with basic operation your GE OEC C-Arm. See 2.3 C-Arm
overview and setup on page 2-17 if you need assistance.
9.6.1 Performance improvements with heat management

The following graphs illustrate how the Heat Management hardware and software improvements
increase the X-ray tube’s heat capacity.
9-28
This first graph shows the heat management characteristics of an GE OEC C-Arm operated
continuously at 80 kV and 5 mA. The C-Arm is not equipped with Heat Management hardware or
software. Note that the X-ray tube housing temperature reaches 80°C after approximately 62
minutes. Note also that it takes about 52 minutes for the housing to cool down from 80°C to 50°C.
Figure 9-26: C-Arm thermal characteristics without heat management

The following graph shows the heat management characteristics of an GE OEC C-Arm equipped
with the Heat Management hardware and software. Again, the C-Arm operates continuously at 80
kV and 5 mA. This time the X-ray tube anode runs 7° to 8° cooler than before, and the housing
reaches 80°C after 77 minutes, an improvement in operating time of about 24 percent. The housing
cools down faster, reaching 50°C in about 45 minutes.
Figure 9-27: C-Arm thermal characteristics with heat management
9.6.2 Anode warm and hot thresholds

A system equipped with heat management hardware and software behaves a bit differently than
one that is not equipped with this feature. There are four primary differences.
1. You will see temperature-related messages on the left monitor instead of the right monitor.
2. There is no OK button associated with any of these messages.
3. You don’t have to respond to any of the heat messages.
4. Each message clears automatically when the system cools.
The following pages show the heat messages that may appear in systems equipped with heat
management hardware and software. They are arranged in order, from least important to most
9-29
important. The graphical heat bar shown here provides the same information as the text message
on the C-Arm Control Panel.
Figure 9-28: Anode heat bar on Figure 9-29: Anode and housing heat bars on
left monitor left monitor
These bars give a graphical representation of the temperature of the X-ray tube anode and X-ray
tube housing. This is the same information that displays in text form on the C-Arm Control Panel.
ANODE WARM - This status message displays on the left monitor. No operator action is required.
HOUSING WARM - This status message displays on the left monitor. No action is necessary. You
can make fluoro exposures, but HLF and digital Cine are not allowed. Wait until the housing cools.
This usually takes a few seconds.
ANODE HOT - HLF DISABLED - This status message displays on the left monitor. No action is
necessary. You can make fluoro exposures, but HLF and digital Cine do not work until the anode
cools. This usually takes a few seconds.
HOUSING HOT - HLF DISABLED - This status message displays on the left monitor. No action is
necessary. You can make fluoro exposures, but HLF is disabled and digital Cine does not work until
the housing cools.
ANODE OVERHEATED - X-RAYS DISABLED - You cannot take X-rays as long as this message is
present.
HOUSING OVERHEATED - X-RAYS DISABLED - This status message also displays on the left
monitor. X-rays are disabled until this message clears.
9-30
10. Labels and symbols

This chapter describes labels and symbols that are located on your System and that are not
described elsewhere. Not all labels and symbols appear on all Systems or components.
l Heat management
l Symbols
10.1 Labels
Two types of labels are described: warning / caution labels and regulatory certification labels.
l Warning / caution labels define potential hazards and advise against misuse that might result
in personal injury. Familiarize yourself with these labels and their meanings in order to ensure
a safe environment for both the patient and yourself.
l Regulatory labels indicate that the system meets the requirements of specific governmental,
medical and industrial organizations.
10.1.1 Pinch point labels
Located as near as possible to pinch points, these labels identify the pinch point. Keep hands and
feet away from pinch points when the C-Arm is in motion. These labels are located as shown below.
10-1
Figure 10-1: Super C-Arm pinch points
Figure 10-2: Standard C-Arm pinch points
10-2
10.1.2 Additional Labels

Tables 10-1 through 10-17 identify the locations and descriptions of other labels that may appear
on your system.
Table 10-1
Label
Location Top of Workstation, above power switch.

Description Explains how to turn the system off and how to restart the system.
Table 10-2
Label
Location C-Arm, rear cover label panel.

Description Indicates location of certification labels. Open panel to view labels inside.
Table 10-3
Label
Location Back of the Workstation, next to the external connector panel.

Description l Warns about not touching the connectors on the back of the Workstation.
l Identifies the need to keep connectors covered when not in use.
l Identifies the standard that medical devices connected to the Workstation must
meet.
This label applies to the connectors on the rear of the Workstation as well as to any
connectors not in use on other medical devices such as printers, that are connected to the
Workstation.
10-3
Table 10-4
Label
Location Workstation rear cover.

Description Contains manufacturer information and input power requirements. US Federal law
restricts this device to sale by, or on order of, a physician.
Table 10-5
Label
Location Front of C-Arm, below interface panel.

Description Contains manufacturer information.
10-4
Table 10-6
Label
Location On a C-Arm rear cover label panel.

Description This is a USA FDA certification label. This certifies that the Beam Limiting Device meets
applicable federal standards and regulations as of the date of manufacture. Contains man-
ufacturer information.
Table 10-7
Label
Location On C-Arm rear cover label panel.

Description This is a USA FDA certification label. This certifies that the Image Intensifier meets appli-
cable federal standards and regulations as of the date of manufacture. Contains man-
10-5
Table 10-8
Label

Description This is a USA FDA certification label. This certifies that the High Voltage Generator/X-ray
Control meets applicable federal standards and regulations as of the date of manufacture.
Contains manufacturer information.
Table 10-9
Label

Description This is a USA FDA certification label. This certifies that the X-ray tube assembly meets appli-
10-6
Table 10-10
Label
Location On C-Arm film cassette holder.

Description This is a USA FDA certification label. This certifies that the film cassette holder meets appli-
Table 10-11
Label
Location Bottom of three-pedal footswitch.

Description Indicates that the electrical switching mechanism within the footswitch is protected from
exposure to dust and the effects of continuous immersion in water. Placement inside a pro-
tective cover is recommended.
Table 10-12
Label
Location On the C-Arm control panel housing.

Description Alerts the operator to be familiar with safe operating practices associated with this equip-
ment before using the system.
10-7
Table 10-13
Label
Location On the control panel housing.

Description Alerts the operator to be familiar with safe operating practices associated with this equip-
ment before using the system.
Table 10-14
Label
Location Back of Workstation, next to external connector panel.

Description Indicates Workstation connector ports.
Table 10-15
Label
Location C-Arm rear cover label panel and on the back of the Workstation.
Description Indicates that the waste of electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed as
unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. Contact an authorized rep-
resentative of the manufacturer for information concerning the decommissioning of your
equipment.
Table 10-16
Label
10-8
Location Back of the right monitor.

Description Indicates that mercury is present in the monitors and they must be disposed of properly
per state, federal, and local regulations.
Table 10-17
Label
Location Back of right monitor on Workstation.

Description Describes agents found to be safe for cleaning liquid crystal displays.
10.2 Symbols
Tables 10-18 through 10-62 identify the locations and descriptions of symbols that may appear on
your system.
Table 10-18
Symbol
Location Side of X-ray tube housing.

Description Marks the approximate location of the X-ray tube focal spot projected on a straight
line at right angles to the central axis of the beam. This symbol can be used to deter-
mine the SID by measuring from the symbol to the surface of the image intensifier.
Table 10-19
Symbol
Location Back of the Workstation, near CB1.

Description Circuit Breaker: push to reset circuit breaker for power to the system.
Table 10-20
Symbol

Table 10-21
Symbol
10-9

Table 10-22
Symbol

Table 10-23
Symbol
Location As near as possible to all pinch points.

Description Identifies pinch points. Explained in 10.1.1 Pinch point labels on page 10-1.
Table 10-24
Symbol
Location As near as possible to all pinch points.

Description Identifies pinch points. Explained in 10.1.1 Pinch point labels on page 10-1.
Table 10-25
Symbol
Location 1. Front of C-Arm mainframe cover.

2. Back of Workstation, near I/O connectors.
3. On C-Arm flip-flop mechanism.
4. On the skin spacer.
10-10
Description 1. Indicates the receptacle for the interconnect cable.

2. Indicates that all peripheral equipment must be approved by GE OEC Medical
Systems, Inc.
3. Indicates that there is Anesthetic Proof information contained in the
Operator Manual. See the next page for an explanation on the Anesthetic
Proof symbol.
4. Indicates that International regulations specify that a minimum source-skin
distance be maintained, except for specific surgical applications. Some
medical imaging equipment may have a skin spacer attached in order to
meet this requirement.
WARNING: Removing the skin spacer may result in increased radi-

ation exposure to the patient. The rate of exposure
increases exponentially as the anatomy is positioned
closer to the X-ray tube. The skin spacer should only be
removed on the instructions of a physician. The skin
spacer should be reattached to the collimator assembly
immediately following the procedure.
Table 10-26
Symbol
Location Adjacent to the Equipotential terminals (one on Workstation, one on C-Arm).

Description Indicates the Equipotential terminal. These terminals allow connection between the
system and the equipotential bus bar of the facility.
Table 10-27
Symbol
Location As near as possible to foot crush points.

Description Identifies foot crush points. Explained in 10.1.1 Pinch point labels on page 10-1.
10-11
Table 10-28
Symbol
Location Above the C-Arm interconnect cable receptacle.

Description Indicates that the C-Arm mechanical subassemblies should be placed in their most
compact position before transporting or moving the system. See 2.3.6 Move the C-
Arm on page 2-28 for directions on moving the C-Arm.
Table 10-29
Symbol
Location On the C-Arm flip-flop mechanism housing.

Description The X-ray tube assembly, Image Intensifier, and mechanical C-Arm assembly
comply with the IEC 60601-1 Anesthetic Proof (AP) requirements.
Table 10-30
Symbol
Location C-Arm rear cover label panel and back of Workstation.

Description The system has been tested and certified by the Canadian Standards Association to
comply with applicable U.S. and Canadian Standards.
Table 10-31
Symbol

Description The system has been tested and certified by the German testing and certification
institute Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker (VDE).
10-12
Table 10-32
Symbol

Description See 1.6 Compliance information - China on page 1-14.
Table 10-33
Symbol
Location On footswitch, handswitch, and C-Arm control panel.

Description Indicates mode key used to toggle between standard fluoroscopy mode and the
vascular imaging mode when the C-Arm is connected to a Vascular or Cardiac
Workstation.
On nonvascular systems, an audible beep sounds to signify that this function is not
available.
Table 10-34
Symbol
Location Connector warning label.

Description Indicates hazards arising from dangerous voltages.
Table 10-35
Symbol
Location X-ray warning label and C-Arm X-ray On switch.

Description Indicates the emission of X-radiation.
Table 10-36
Symbol
10-13
Location Spot Film Label, HV Gen X-ray Control label, Image Intensifier label, Beam Limiting
Device Label, system nameplate/rating label (C-Arm and Workstation).
Description Indicates model/type of the system.
Table 10-37
Symbol
Description Indicates date of manufacture of the system.
Table 10-38
Symbol
Device Label.
Description Indicates part number of the component.
Table 10-39
Symbol
Description Indicates serial number of the component/system.
Table 10-40
Symbol
Location System nameplate/rating label (C-Arm).

Description Indicates the system is protected against electric shock by a protective earth-
ground connection.
Table 10-41
Symbol
Description See Medical device directive on page iii.
10-14
Table 10-42
Symbol
Location On handswitch and footswitch.

Description Indicates the exposure control used to initiate Fluoro imaging or enable Roadmap.
Table 10-43
Symbol
Location On handswitch and footswitch.

Description Indicates the exposure control that initiates HLF, DIG.SPOT, or Subtract.
Table 10-44
Symbol
Location Right side of the Image Intensifier tube.

Description Indicates the patient orientation relative to the image shown on screen.
Table 10-45
Symbol
Location On Fast Stop keys on back of C-Arm control panel.

Description Indicates keys that disable X-rays and motion.
Table 10-46
Symbol
Location On back of Workstation near power cord port.

Description Indicates the OFF position of the circuit breaker toggle switch (220 VAC systems
only).
Table 10-47
Symbol
Location On back of Workstation near power cord port.

Description Indicates the ON position of the circuit breaker toggle switch (220 VAC systems
only).
10-15
Table 10-48
Symbol
Location On power switch.

Description Indicates the power switch for the system.
Table 10-49
Symbol
Location Rear interface panel overlay.

Description Indicates the low resolution video output port for left monitor.
Table 10-50
Symbol

Description Indicates the high resolution video output port for left monitor.
Table 10-51
Symbol

Description Indicates the high resolution video output port for right monitor.
Table 10-52
Symbol

Description Indicates direct digital printer interface (DDPI).
Table 10-53
Symbol

Description Indicates parallel printer port.
10-16
Table 10-54
Symbol

Description Indicates relay closure outputs for such things as X-ray On and Room in Use lights,
and Power Injector operation. Relays on the External Interface PCB.
Table 10-55
Symbol
Location Power/cable connections area on C-Arm.

Description Indicates AC power is available to charge generator batteries.
Table 10-56
Symbol

Description Indicates port for handswitch cable.
Table 10-57
Symbol

Description Indicates port for footswitch cable.
Table 10-58
Symbol

Description Indicates port for remote user interface device.
Table 10-59
Symbol

Description Indicates ON position of X-ray key lock.
10-17
Table 10-60
Symbol

Description Indicates OFF position of X-ray key lock.
Table 10-61
Symbol
Description See Medical device directive on page iii.
Table 10-62
Symbol
Location On three pedal footswitch.

Description Identifies the footswitch pedal that initiates Digital Cine pulsed sequence.
10-18
11. Maintenance and storage

This section describes routine performance checks that you can perform to ensure that the System
is operating correctly. The performance checks listed are not intended to substitute for scheduled
periodic maintenance. If problems are found during these checks, contact a qualified service
engineer to troubleshoot and repair the system.
In addition to performance checks, safe cleaning practices are included and a description of periodic
maintenance that should be performed. All periodic maintenance should be performed by a GE OEC
Medical Systems, Inc. representative or a qualified service engineer.
Prior to performing any of the performance checks in this section, it is important that potential
hazards associated with these tasks are understood. Review the "Introduction and Safety" chapter
before proceeding.
WARNING: Circuits inside the equipment use voltages that are capable of causing serious
injury or death from electrical shock. Do not remove the covers or perform any
type of service task, except as specifically instructed here.
Move the system into a safe operating area prior to beginning these checks and observe all
radiation safety precautions. The performance checks should be performed as often as equipment
use and circumstances warrant.
Extensive use warrants increasing the frequency of performance checks. In addition, circumstances
such as accidents during transport or exposure to excessive fluids may warrant that performance
checks be performed to verify operation of the equipment.
l Performance checks
l Cleaning
l IR Remote Control
l Planned Maintenance
l Storage and Shipment
11.1 Performance checks

Complete these performance checks prior to using the GE OEC 9900 Elite system.
11.1.1 Mechanical performance check

1. Check the Wig-Wag brake operation. Check Wig-Wag for ease of movement (side to side
swing) without excessive play.
2. Check the Horizontal Cross-arm brake operation. Extend and retract the Horizontal Cross-
arm. Check for ease of movement without excessive play.
3. Check the Flip-Flop brake operation. Check the Flip Flop for ease of movement without
excessive play.
11-1
4. Check the C-Arm orbital rotation brake operation. Check orbital rotation of the C-Arm for
ease of movement without excessive play.
5. Check L-arm rotation on standard systems with 23 or 31 cm (9 or 12 inch) image intensifiers
and radial rotation on Super C-Arms.
a. On 23 or 31 cm (9 or 12 inch) image intensifier systems, check L-arm brake operation.
Move the L-arm and verify that no excessive mechanical drift occurs.
b. On Super C-Arms, check the radial rotation brake. Rotate the C-Arm radially verifying
that there is not any excessive mechanical drift.
6. Check the operation of the rear wheel pedal brakes.
7. Check for proper operation of the steering handle and control of the rear wheels. Check for
ease of movement without excessive play.
8. Check for proper control of the Workstation wheels. Check for ease of movement without
excessive play.
9. Check the brake pedal for ease of movement and proper control of the wheels without
excessive play.
10. Check the monitor latch. Make sure the monitors are securely latched and the latching
mechanism is not loose or has excessive wear.
11. Check movement of the monitor arm for ease of movement without excessive play. Make
sure that the monitors do not move after being positioned.
12. Check the monitor spring arm lock to ensure that the lever operates smoothly and locks the
monitor arm in position.
11.1.2 Electrical performance check

1. Inspect the high voltage cables for signs of wear and abrasion.
2. Inspect the footswitch and handswitch cables for signs of wear and abrasion.
3. Turn the system on and verify that the system successfully completes the power-up
sequence.
4. Raise the vertical column by pressing the switch located on top of the C-Arm's control panel
housing.
5. Inspect the Workstation AC power cable and high voltage cable. Look for signs of wear or
abrasion to the cable jackets.
6. Inspect the interconnect cable for sign of wear or abrasion, loose or missing connector pins,
and worn strain reliefs.
7. Check that the Workstation fans are functioning and that all vents are clear of obstruction.
11.1.3 Fast stop performance check

This check is performed as a matter of routine operator maintenance to ensure that the Fast Stop
11-2
safety feature is functioning properly. Perform this check as often as conditions such as removal
from long-term storage and exposure to fluids warrant it.
1. Press and hold one of the vertical column control switches and while motion is occurring
press either Fast Stop switch.
2. Verify that mechanical motion stops and a message stating that Fast Stop has been
activated displays on the C-Arm control panel display.
3. Press any X-ray switch and verify that X-rays are disabled.
4. Cycle the Workstation power switch to off and then on to restart the system.
NOTE: Images and annotations will be lost when the system is restarted unless you have saved
them. If you have saved images you can access them through the Workstation's Image
Directory function.
11.1.4 Fluoro mode performance check

WARNING: This procedure produces X-rays. Take the appropriate precautions.
1. Position the C-Arm so that the X-ray head is directly above the image intensifier.
2. Place a suitable test object on the face of the image intensifier tube.
3. Verify that auto mode is selected. The LED next to the AUTO key (generator grouping) on the
C-Arm control panel will be illuminated.
4. Press the X-ray On switch located on top of the control panel housing. Verify that a digitized
fluoro image of the object displays on the left monitor and that it remains there after the
exposure is terminated.
5. Connect the footswitch and handswitch and, while pressing a footswitch or handswitch X-
ray switch:
a. Verify operation of the C-Arm image orientation keys: rotation and image reversal.
b. Verify operation of the field size selection keys: NORM, MAG1 and MAG2.
c. Verify operation of the motorized collimation controls: collimator leaf rotation, iris
collimation, and leaf open/close.
d. On vascular systems, verify operation of the MODE switch, located on the footswitch
and handswitch.
11.1.5 Film mode performance check

WARNING: This procedure produces X-rays. Take the appropriate precautions.
11-3
1. Select film mode and enter the technique: 60 kVp @ 2.5 mAs.
2. Install the film cassette holder on the image intensifier and load a film cassette.
3. Press the footswitch. Listen for a whirring sound as the anode accelerates approximately 2
seconds before the X-ray On indicator lights.
4. Release the footswitch after you hear three beeps.
5. Develop the film and inspect the exposure.
11.2 Cleaning
CAUTION The C-Arm is not waterproof. Be careful not to spill or splash liquids where they can
enter electronic assemblies.
Always turn the System off and disconnect power before cleaning.
Clean the external connector area with dry cloths only. Do not use liquid cleaners on
this area.
1. Clean the covers and panels periodically with a damp cloth.

2. Keep the dark plastic bezel surrounding the touchscreen free from dirt. Use a mild detergent, if
necessary, to remove scuffs and stains.
3. Do not use any solvents which may damage or discolor paint finishes or plastic components.
4. Do not spray the monitors with cleaner or liquid.
5. Be careful not to drip liquids where they can enter electronic assemblies through panel or
cover seams..
WARNING: Water, soap, or other liquids, if allowed to drip into the equipment, can cause
electrical short circuits leading to electric shock and fire hazards.
WARNING: If liquids should accidentally spill into the Workstation electronics, DO NOT
connect the power cord to a power supply connection or turn the Workstation on
until the liquids have dried or evaporated completely.
11.2.1 Approved Cleaning Agents

NOTE: All cleaning agents approved for use on the Workstation are not approved for use on the
Workstation monitors. See Monitors, below, or the label on the rear of right monitor for a list of
approved monitor cleaning agents.
The following cleaning agents are approved for cleaning the Workstation and C-Arm.
l Virex II 256
l Precise® Hospital Foam Cleaner Disinfectant
11-4
l MadaCide-FD
l Bleach and water in a 1:25 mixture.
l Isopropyl alcohol
NOTE: Misty Clear Lemon 10 Disinfectant, Misty Multi-Purpose Disinfectant, and Misty Multi-Purpose
Disinfectant II are no longer approved cleaning agents.
Monitors
The following cleaning agents are approved for cleaning the Workstation monitors.
l MadaCide-FD
l Precise® Hospital Foam Cleaner Disinfectant
l 5.25% Sodium Hypochlorite diluted between 1:10 and 1:100 with water
l Isopropyl alcohol
11.3 IR Remote Control

Replace the IR remote control battery when the IR REMOTE BATTERY LOW message displays on
the Workstation. The remote control uses three alkaline AAA batteries.
NOTE: There are no user serviceable parts inside the main body of the IR remote control. Opening
that compartment voids the warranty.
11.3.1 To replace the batteries

1. Remove the screw that secures the battery cover on the back of the IR remote control.
2. Remove the old batteries.
3. Insert three AAA batteries. (Use care to observe the correct polarity as indicated by the +
symbols.)
4. Replace the cover.
5. Insert the battery cover screw, but avoid over-tightening.
Figure 11-1: IR Remote Battery Cover
11-5
11.4 Planned Maintenance

Planned maintenance should be performed annually. This maintenance should be performed by a
GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. certified service engineer. The following planned maintenance
schedule is recommended.
11.4.1 Annual Maintenance

Annual maintenance should be performed as described in the Planned Maintenance Procedure. This
procedure includes maintenance of the following items:
l Electrical performance including:
Antistatic Drag Wire
Interconnect cable and connector
High voltage (HV) cable
AC power cable
Ground continuity
Batteries
l Cooling fans, ventilation, and air filters
l Workstation and C-Arm control panels
l Manual movement of mechanical assemblies and brakes
l Electromechanical performance
l Safety interlock performance (Fast Stop circuit)
l Imaging chain performance including:
l Beam alignment
l Skin dose rate limits
l Image resolution
l Auto technique tracking
l IR remote functionality
l Functional operation of remaining features
11-6
11.5 Storage and Shipment

Follow these steps to store or ship the GE OEC 9900 Elite system.
11.5.1 Temporary storage (less than 60 days)

To prepare the C-Arm for storage, follow these steps:
1. Move all mechanical assemblies into their most compact position, set all locks and brakes and
remove all power. Store any accessories with the C-Arm.
2. Cover the C-Arm with a dust cover. See See 13. Technical specifications and references on
page 13-1 for the range of environmental conditions in which the C-Arm can be safely stored.
11.5.2 Long-term storage (60 days or longer) or shipment

To prepare the system for long term storage or shipment, observe the following recommendations:
1. Remove all power.
2. Move all mechanical assemblies into their most compact positions.
3. Set all locks and brakes.
4. Coil the interconnect cable and store it on the right Workstation handle. Coil the power cable
and store it on the left Workstation handle.
5. Wrap the image intensifier, X-ray tube assembly, high voltage cable, and the control panel
housing with bubble wrap.
6. Make sure the monitors are secured in the monitor latch. Place original packaging on
monitors for shipment.
7. Pack all accessories such as cassette holders and store them with the system.
8. Cover the Workstation, C-Arm, and accessories. Attach each to a solid supportive shipping
base and enclose in a protective container adequate for shipment or storage. See 13.
Technical specifications and references on page 13-1 for the range of environmental
conditions in which the C-Arm can be safely stored.
11.5.3 Transport checklist

Use this checklist to prepare the GE OEC 9900 Elite System for transport to another area for use or
for storage.
NOTE: See 2.5 System startup, shutdown, and restart on page 2-33 and 2.3 C-Arm overview and
setup on page 2-17 for detailed information on moving the Workstation and C-Arm.
NOTE: Two people should maintain control of the Workstation or C-Arm when moving up or down
an incline. Do not move the Workstation or C-Arm over inclines greater than 10°. Do not
move the Workstation or C-Arm up or down stairs or steps. Do not lock the Workstation or C-
Arm in place on an incline greater than 5°.
11-7
1. Disconnect power and interconnect cables.

2. Make sure all cables and connectors are properly stored on the Workstation and C-Arm.
3. Latch the Workstation monitors into transport position by facing them to the front and
locking them into the monitor latch.
4. On the C-Arm, lock all movable mechanical assembly brakes including: the C-Arm orbital
rotation brake; the flip flop brake; the wig wag brake; the L-arm and horizontal cross arm
brakes.
5. Make sure all handles on the Workstation and C-Arm are secure.
6. Make sure the brakes on the C-Arm and Workstation are working correctly and set for
transport prior to moving the system.
7. Make sure the steering handles on the C-Arm are operating correctly.
8. Move the C-Arm by unlocking the wheel brakes and pushing on the steering handles. Make
sure that the wheels roll smoothly.
9. Move the Workstation by placing the Workstation wheel brakes in transport position and
pushing on the Workstation handles. Make sure that the wheels roll smoothly.
10. Once you have reached your destination, apply the wheel brakes to the Workstation and
C-Arm.
NOTE: See 13. Technical specifications and references on page 13-1 for information on
environmental requirements for storage of the Workstation and C-Arm.
11-8
12. Troubleshooting and messages

This section describes messages that appear on the Workstation monitors and C-Arm control panel
display. Some of the messages are informational messages displayed to advise the user that the
system is operating correctly. Other messages display when the system fails during the start up
sequence or fails during system operation. Workstation and C-Arm failures may result in impaired
system operation or automatic system shutdown. The messages are listed in alphabetical order on
the following pages.
WARNING: Ignoring error and warning messages may result in equipment damage and per-
sonal injury.
l Error recovery
l Messages
12.1 Error recovery

WARNING: The system may fail at any time. Establish procedures for assuring patient and
operator safety in case of the loss of imaging or other Workstation or C-Arm
functions during an exam. Workstation and C-Arm functions and imaging may
be recovered using the following error recovery procedure.
12.1.1 Error recovery procedure

Perform the following error recovery procedure if you encounter problems during start-up or
operation.
1. Read the displayed message carefully.
Some messages only require the user to acknowledge the error by touching OK and allowing
the system to recover from the error automatically.
Other messages contain instructions to shutdown and restart the system. See 2.5 System
startup, shutdown, and restart on page 2-33 for information on properly shutting down and
restarting the system.
If shutting down and restarting the system fails to restore normal operation, proceed with
step 2.
2. Shut down the system, remove all power, and call for service.
12.1.2 Image freeze

If the image on the left monitor “freezes,” press the power switch to shut down the system, wait 10
seconds and press the power switch again. Should this condition persist, shut down the system and
call GE OEC service.
12-1
12.1.3 No X-ray
If the system fails to take X-rays, turn off the system following the shutdown procedure. Wait 10
seconds, and then turn on the system. Should this condition persist, shut down the system and call
GE OEC service.
12.1.4 No boot
Do not interrupt system power until the system has fully completed the boot cycle. If the system
fails to start up within 3 minutes, shut down the system, wait 10 seconds, and then press the power
switch again. If this condition persists, shut down the system and call GE OEC service.
12.1.5 C-Arm unexpected power loss or restart

Should the C-Arm unexpectedly lose power or restart, you should restart the Workstation to make
sure that the C-Arm and Workstation are in normal operating condition before continuing to
operate the C-Arm.
12.1.6 X-ray switch security error

A slow press of the X-ray switch on the C-Arm control panel may cause an X-ray switch security
error message to be displayed on the control panel display and on the left monitor of the
Workstation. Clear the error message and re-enable X-rays by pressing any C-Arm control panel
key. If the message recurs or persists, call your service representative.
Figure 12-1: C-Arm X-ray switch
12-2
12.2 Messages
See C-Arm control panel display on page 3-16 for information on location of C-Arm messages.
Message Displays Description

4 HOUR WARM- C-Arm This message displays if the system has been stored for more
UP REQUIRED - Control Panel than 60 days. A warm-up period is necessary for ion removal
PRESS ANY KEY from the image intensifier tube. Leave the system on with no
operation for 4 hours, and then press any C-Arm control panel
key to continue.
24 HOUR C-Arm This message displays if the system has been in storage for
RECHARGE Control Panel more than six months, and the batteries need recharging. X-
REQUIRED - rays are disabled. Leave the Workstation power cord plugged
X-RAYS DISABLED in, make sure the interconnect cable is properly connected,
and wait 24 hours before use. The system does not need to be
turned on.
A DIFFERENT C- Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when a different C-
ARM HAS BEEN Arm has been attached to the Workstation and the Work-
CONNECTED TO station has not been restarted. Turn the Workstation off, wait
THE WORK- ten seconds, and then restart the Workstation. You must
STATION Turn the restart the Workstation after connecting a different C-Arm.
Workstation off,
wait 10 seconds,
and then restart
the Workstation.
AC LINE CON- Right monitor This message displays if the intended operating AC line range
FIGURATION does not match the measured AC line or a configuration error
DOES NOT MATCH or hardware failure has occurred. The battery charger will be
MEASURED VOLT- disabled in this situation.
AGE Subsequent
X-ray shots will
eventually drain
the battery ren-
dering the system
unusable. Please
call service.
12-3

AC LINE VOLTAGE Right monitor This message displays when intended operating AC line range
NOT CON- has not been downloaded from RUS. The battery charger will
FIGURED Sub- be disabled in this situation.
sequent X-ray
shots will even-
tually drain the
battery rendering
the system unus-
able. Please call
service.
AC POWER LINE Right monitor This message displays when the Workstation detects an invalid
SENSOR ERROR AC line voltage. The battery charger will be disabled in this sit-
DETECTED. Sub- uation.
sequent X-ray
shots will even-
tually drain the
battery rendering
the system unus-
able. Please call
service.
AD CHANNEL # C-Arm The analog-to-digital channels are checked during system
FAIL - POWER Control Panel start-up. If a fault in the data conversion process is detected in
OFF. WAIT 10 SEC- any of the channels, the system will not operate and this mes-
ONDS. sage displays. Perform the error recovery steps; see 12.1.1
Error recovery procedure on page 12-1.
ALL EXISTING Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when an anno-
ANNOTATION tated image is "zoomed." Annotations will no longer match the
AND MEAS- enlarged image.
UREMENTS WILL
BE REMOVED
FROM THE IMAGE
Proceed?
ALL PATIENT Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when you use the
HEALTH INFOR- "Delete All Patient Information" option.
MATION AND
SAVED IMAGES
WILL BE DELETED
Proceed?
12-4

ANATOMICAL Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor. Some anatomical
PROFILES DIS- profiles are invalid. Those profiles will appear grayed out in the
ABLED Some Profile screens. To restore or correct invalid profiles, contact
anatomical pro- your Service Representative. The grayed out profiles are not
files are invalid. compatible with the Workstation software or are other wise
Those profiles will currently unavailable. You must call service to obtain com-
appear grayed patible profiles change the Workstation configuration to make
out in the Profile the profiles available
screens. To
restore or correct
invalid profiles,
contact your Serv-
ice Rep-
resentative.
ANODE IS HOT - Left monitor This message displays on the left monitor when an alarm
HLF DISABLED sounds, indicating that the anode temperature is at 80% of its
rated heat capacity or greater. The alarm may be disabled by
pressing the ALARM RESET key on the control panel. Con-
tinued use without cooling may damage the X-ray tube.
Although fluoroscopy is not prevented, you should wait for the
tube to cool before making another exposure. HLF and film
exposures are not allowed.
ANODE IS HOT - C-Arm This message alternates with the technique displayed and an
XX% Control Panel alarm sounds. The anode temperature is at 80% of its rated
heat capacity or greater. The alarm may be disabled by
pressing the ALARM RESET key on the control panel.
Continued use without cooling may damage the X-ray tube.
Although fluoroscopy is not prevented, you should wait for the
tube to cool before making another exposure. HLF and film
exposures are not allowed.
WARNING: When the ANODE IS HOT - XX% message dis-

plays, personnel should avoid bodily contact
with the X-ray tube. Do not allow the X-ray
tube housing to contact the patient.
ANODE IS WARM Left monitor This message displays on the left monitor when anode tem-
perature is at 70% of its rated heat capacity or greater. You
may continue with fluoroscopy, but discretion is advised.
12-5

ANODE IS WARM - C-Arm This message alternates with the technique displayed. Anode
XX% Control Panel temperature is at 70% of its rated heat capacity or greater.
You may continue with fluoroscopy, but discretion is advised.
WARNING: When the ANODE IS WARM - XX% message

displays personnel should prevent all bodily
contact with the X-ray tube.
ARMED C-Arm This message displays as the system prepares the technique
Control Panel for a film exposure. If the X-ray switch has not been pressed
after 60 seconds the message will be removed from the dis-
play.
BATTERY CHARGE C-Arm If the effective battery charge drops to between 70 to 40 per-
- XX% Control Panel cent, this message alternates with the technique displayed.
Fluoro, film and HLF exposures are still allowed. To charge the
batteries, leave the system plugged into an AC receptacle with
the interconnect cable in place between the C-Arm and the
Workstation. The Workstation power switch should be turned
to the off position. Normally, a full battery recharge requires
only a few hours. If the batteries are further discharged with-
out adequate recharge time, the effective charge may drop
below 70 percent.
BUMPER Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when you attach
ATTACHED (motorized the Collision Detection Assembly to a motorized C-Arm.
Bumper has been systems only)
attached to the
Image Intensifier.
BUMPER Right monitor This message displays on the right Workstation monitor when
REMOVED Bumper (motorized you remove the Collision Detection Assembly from a motorized
has been systems only) C-Arm. If the bumper is removed, the system limits motion
removed from the speed to 3° per second. If this message displays with the
Image Intensifier. bumper attached, call service.
CAMERA IRIS CAL C-Arm This message is displayed on the C-Arm control panel and
REQUIRED - PRESS Control Panel prompts the operator to calibrate the Camera Iris. Call your
ANY KEY service representative to perform a calibration.
CAMERA IRIS C-Arm This message is displayed on the C-Arm control panel and
ERROR Control Panel erases when the condition is cleared. The software has deter-
mined that the current camera iris position values do not
match the reference values stored in memory. Call your service
representative to perform a calibration.
12-6

CANCEL COPY Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the user
OPERATION? Yes touches Cancel on the Copy in Progress screen.
to Cancel or No to
continue.
CANNOT MAKE Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the Work-
NETWORK CON- station cannot connect to the network at startup. If you are
NECTION. Verify planning to use the network make sure the network cable is
that the Work- connected to the Workstation
station is con-
nected to the
network.
CHARGER FAILED C-Arm This message displays and the system will not operate if the
Control Panel battery charger fails at boot-up. Perform the error recovery
steps; see 12.1.1 Error recovery procedure on page 12-1.
If the battery charger failure occurs during operation, the
message will alternate with the technique displayed on the
control panel. Continued use will result in system failure. Call
your service representative as soon as possible.
CHARGER FAILED C-Arm This message displays when the battery charger fails at boot-
- POWER OFF. Control Panel up. The system will not operate. Perform the error recovery
WAIT 10 SEC- steps; see 12.1.1 Error recovery procedure on page 12-1. Call
ONDS. your service representative.
CLUTCH IS OPEN Left monitor This message displays on the left Workstation monitor and on
(motorized the C-Arm control panel. This means the clutch is released on a
systems only) motorized C-Arm and the C-Arm is left free to orbit. Normally
C-Arm Con- this is possible only when someone holds the clutch handle to
trol panel the rear. If this message displays with no one is touching the
clutch handle, call service.
COL IRIS C-Arm This message displays when the software has sensed that the
POTENTIOMETER Control Panel collimator iris potentiometer is not working and therefore the
ERROR - PRESS iris position cannot be determined. Press any key to continue.
ANY KEY Call your service representative as soon as possible.
COL IRIS TOO C-Arm This message displays when the collimator iris is larger than
LARGE Control Panel the control panel indicates, and alternates with the technique
displayed.
CAUTION Continuing system operation when the COL IRIS

TOO LARGE message displays may result in over-
exposing the patient due to a larger than indi-
cated field size. Complete the current procedure if
necessary, then call for service.
12-7

COL IRIS C-Arm This message displays when the iris collimator motor control
UNSTABLE Control Panel cannot maintain position tolerance. This message alternates
with the technique displayed on the control panel display. You
may continue to use the system, although the iris instability
may degrade the image at the edges of the X-ray field. Com-
plete the current procedure if necessary and then call your
service representative.
COLLIMATOR CAL C-Arm This message displays when the software has determined that
REQUIRED - PRESS Control Panel the current collimator iris or leave position values do not
ANY KEY match the reference values stored in memory. Press any key to
continue. Call your service representative as soon as possible.
COLLIMATOR C-Arm This message alternates with the technique displayed on the
STUCK Control Panel control panel display. The collimator iris motor is unable to
open or close the collimator iris. You may continue to use the
system, although you will not be able to adjust the collimator
iris. Complete the current procedure if necessary and then call
your service representative.
COLLISION Left monitor This message displays on the left Workstation monitor when a
DETECTED motorized system detects a loss of velocity or increased motor
current when the C-Arm is in motion. Orbital and rotational
motorized motion stops. This message goes away and motor-
ized movement is again enabled when the condition clears.
COM- C-Arm This message displays on the Control Panel when system com-
MUNICATION Control Panel munication has failed. The C-Arm is not allowed to take X-rays
FAILED and under these conditions. Wait for approximately one minute for
left monitor this condition to clear and if it does not, perform the error
recovery steps; see 12.1.1 Error recovery procedure on page
12-1. This message displays on the left monitor when a loss of
communication with the C-Arm is detected. The message
clears when communication is reestablished.
12-8

COM- Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when a loss of com-
MUNICATION munication with the C-Arm is detected during an exposure.
FAILED The com- Press one of the FAST STOP switches on C-Arm to disable X-
munication rays and then restart the system. If the message persists, call
between the Gen- for service.
erator and the
Workstation
failed. Press FAST
STOP switch to
disable X-rays.
Turn the system
off, wait ten sec-
onds, and then
restart the sys-
tem. If this mes-
sage persists, call
for service.
CONTACT Left monitor This message displays on the left monitor when any object con-
DETECTED tacts the Contact Detection Assembly on a motorized C-Arm
Image Intensifier. Any orbital or rotational motorized move-
ment underway stops. This message goes away and motorized
movement is again enabled when the condition clears.
CONTROL PANEL C-Arm This message displays when communication to the control
ERROR Control Panel panel has been lost, terminating system operation. Perform the
error recovery steps; see 12.1.1 Error recovery procedure on
page 12-1.
CORRUPTED Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when you access
IMAGES DELETED the Saved Exams screen from the Image Directory after cor-
Corrupted images rupted images were deleted at bootup. Corrupted images are
were detected at deleted to avoid problems with mixed images.
bootup and could
not be repaired.
These images
have been
deleted. This may
be the result of a
power loss or
improper shut-
down. If this mes-
sage persists, call
for service.
12-9

CURRENT Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when X-rays have
ANATOMICAL been disabled. Select a different profile from the Application
PROFILE DIS- screen. If this message persists, call for service. The current
ABLED The default anatomical profile has become corrupted. Try a different pro-
profile is unavail- file. If the message persists you'll need to call service.
able. X-rays are
disabled. Select a
different profile
from the Profile
screen. If this mes-
sage persists, call
for service.
DATA ERROR C-Arm This message displays when the corrupted software or data
Control Panel has been detected. X-rays are disabled. Perform the error recov-
ery steps; see 12.1.1 Error recovery procedure on page 12-1.
DELETE ALL COM- Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor after all patient
PLETE X-rays are information has been deleted. Images remain but have no iden-
disabled. Turn the tifying patient information. You must restart the system before
system off, wait X-rays can be taken.
10 seconds, and
then restart the
system.
DELETE ALL IN Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor while the system
PROGRESS Please performs a requested delete operation. Wait for the system to
wait complete the operation.
DICOM ERROR Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor. A DICOM device
Check the con- may return this error if a request was sent that does not fit the
figuration of the current configuration of the device. Check your requested oper-
DICOM device. ation to make sure it complies with the configuration of the
selected device.
DICOM Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the DICOM
SECONDARY Store server configuration will not allow a CINE run to be
CAPTURE CINE stored to the server. Try RF or XA for the modality of the DICOM
NOT SUPPORTED Store server configuration.
Press OK to save
other selected
images. Press
CANCEL to Abort
12-10

DICOM SERVER IS Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the selected
OUT OF DICOM server is busy. This a temporary condition caused by
RESOURCES - TRY currently high usage of the server. Resubmit your request after
AGAIN LATER This waiting for a period of time.
is probably a tem-
porary condition
caused by cur-
rently high usage
of the server. If
this message per-
sists, call for serv-
ice.
ENTITY ALREADY Right monitor This message displays when DICOM retrieves an image or
EXISTS The entity study that already exists on the system and allows you the
already exists on choice of overwriting the existing files or discarding the
the system. Do retrieved files.
you want to over-
write the existing
entity?
ERROR READING Right monitor Displays when the system encounters an error reading from a
DISK The disk may CD or DVD. Retry the operation or change disks.
be damaged or
may not be com-
patible with the
Workstation.
ERROR Right monitor This message displays when the PACS server has incorrect
RETRIEVING Workstation information. For example, it could set up the
IMAGES Check the wrong IP address, which could cause move requests to be sent
Workstation's to a different store server.
configuration in
the hospital PACS
system.
FAILED TO OPEN Right monitor This message displays when another user is attempting to
PORT Could not open a port already in use.
open port on the
firewall. Try set-
ting a different
port number.
12-11

FAST STOP C-Arm This message displays when the after a FAST STOP key has
ACTIVATED - Control Panel been pressed. You must cycle the Workstation power switch to
POWER OFF. WAIT off and then on to restart the system.
10 SECONDS.
If you did not press a FAST STOP key and this message
displays a hardware or software fault has occurred. Perform
the error recovery steps; see 12.1.1 Error recovery procedure
on page 12-1.
FILAMENT CAL C-Arm This message displays when the system has sensed that the
REQUIRED - PRESS Control Panel filaments have not been calibrated. It is possible to receive
ANY KEY multiple mA errors if this condition exists. Call your service
representative as soon as possible to perform a calibration.
WARNING: If the procedure is continued when the FIL-

AMENT CAL REQUIRED message displays, the
patient may receive a higher dose than that
indicated. Press any C-Arm control panel key
to continue with the procedure if necessary,
then call for service.
FILAMENT C-Arm This message displays when the filament current has been
REGULATOR FAIL- Control Panel sensed as out of tolerance. You may press any C-Arm control
URE - PRESS ANY panel key to continue. However, the resolution of future
KEY images may be degraded. Contact your service representative
as soon as possible.
WARNING: If the procedure is continued when the FIL-

AMENT REG FAILURE message displays, the
patient may receive a higher dose than that
indicated. Press any C-Arm control panel key
to continue with the procedure if necessary,
then call for service.
FILAMENT SELECT C-Arm This message displays when the filament size selected by soft-
ERROR - PRESS Control Panel ware does not match the current filament in the PIO hardware.
ANY KEY Press any C-Arm control panel key to continue. X-rays are dis-
abled while the message displays.
HIGH CAPACITY Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the CD/DVD
DISK FAILURE is not connected at bootup.
Drive has failed or
is not properly
installed. If this
message persists,
call for service.
12-12

HLF OVERTIME C-Arm This message displays when the HLF (High Level Fluoro) or Dig-
Control Panel ital Cine exposure has exceeded the preset time interval and
has been terminated. The time interval parameters are depend-
ant on the pulses per second selected. This safety precaution
discourages excessive continuous lengths of time in HLF mode.
This message remains displayed until the footswitch is
released.
HOUSING IS HOT - Left monitor This message is displayed on the left monitor and an alarm
HLF DISABLED sounds. The housing temperature is at 80% of its rated heat
capacity or greater. The alarm may be disabled by pressing
the ALARM RESET key on the control panel. Although fluor-
oscopy is not prevented, you should wait for the tube to cool
before making another exposure. HLF and film exposures are
not allowed at this temperature.
HOUSING IS HOT - C-Arm This message alternates with the technique displayed on the
XX% Control Panel control panel display and an alarm sounds. The housing
temperature is at 80% of its rated heat capacity or greater.
The alarm may be disabled by pressing the ALARM RESET key
on the control panel. Although fluoroscopy is not prevented,
you should wait for the tube to cool before making another
exposure. HLF and film exposures are not allowed at this
temperature.
CAUTION Continued use without cooling may damage the

X-ray tube. Although fluoroscopy is not pre-
vented, you should wait for the tube to cool
before making another exposure.
WARNING: When the HOUSING IS HOT - XX% message dis-

with the X-ray tube housing. Do not allow the
X-ray tube housing to contact the patient.
HOUSING IS Left monitor This message displays on the left monitor when the housing
WARM temperature is at 70% of its rated heat capacity or greater.
This message is displayed on the left monitor. You may con-
tinue with fluoroscopy, but discretion is advised.
12-13

HOUSING C-Arm This message displays when the housing temperature has
OVERHEATED Control Panel reached 100% of its rated capacity and the thermal cutoff
switch has activated (opened). Operation is terminated. Let the
housing cool.
CAUTION When the HOUSING OVERHEATED message

appears, the X-ray tube housing is extremely hot
and must be allowed to cool before taking more
exposures.
Avoid bodily contact with the X-ray tube housing.
Do not allow the X-ray tube housing to contact
the patient.
HOUSING Left monitor This message displays when the housing temperature has
OVERHEATED - reached 100% of its rated capacity and the thermal cutoff
X-RAYS DISABLED switch has activated (opened). Operation is terminated. Let the
housing cool.
HOUSING WARM - C-Arm This message displays when the housing temperature is at
XX% Control Panel 70% of its rated heat capacity or greater. This message
alternates with the technique displayed on the control panel
display. You may continue with fluoroscopy, but discretion is
advised.
WARNING: When the HOUSING WARM - XX% message dis-

with the X-ray tube. Do not allow the X-ray
tube housing to contact the patient.
HV GENERATOR C-Arm This message displays when the software has detected an
ERROR Control Panel error in the high voltage generator. The system automatically
shuts down, preventing operation. Perform the error recovery
HV REGISTER FAIL C-Arm This message displays when the software has detected a fail-
Control Panel ure in the high voltage register. The system automatically
shuts down, preventing operation. Perform the error recovery
IMAGE TOO BIG Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the Copy but-
TO COPY The size ton is pressed and a file to be stored or retrieved exceeds the
of a selected Cine DICOM standard limit of 4.29 GB.
exceeds the limits
specified in the
DICOM standard.
Deselect it and try
the copy again.
12-14

INSUFFICIENT Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when copy oper-
MEDIA CAPACITY ation cannot be performed on the current media type. Use
Deselect any higher capacity media. Displayed when a single image or Cine
images larger run won't fit on a single disk.
than media
capacity or use
higher capacity
media.
INTERLOCK C-Arm This message displays when the interlock circuit has failed dur-
FAILURE Control Panel ing system start-up. Restart the system and if the message dis-
plays again, call for service.
INVALID IP Right monitor Displayed when the user enters an invalid IP Address
IP address not
valid.
INVALID PORT Right monitor Displayed when an incorrect port entry was made to a remote
ENTRY server.
Port needs to be
in 1-65536 range.
INVALID PORT Right monitor Displayed when an incorrect port entry was made to a local
ENTRY server.
Port number
needs to be 104
or in 1025-49150
range.
JOYSTICK FAILURE Right monitor This message displays when a joystick failure is detected on
The system could (motorized the RUI. Shutdown the system, wait ten seconds, and restart
not communicate systems only) the system. If the problem persists, call service.
with the joystick.
Turn the system
off, wait 10 sec-
onds, then restart
the system. If this
message persists,
call for service.
JOYSTICK STUCK Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor of a motorized
(motorized system and on the C-Arm control panel when a stuck joystick
systems only) is detected.
and C-Arm
The following explanation also displays on the right monitor:
control panel
“The system could not communicate with the joystick. Turn the
system off, wait five seconds, then restart the system. If this
problem persists call service."
12-15

KEY STUCK - C-Arm This message displays when the a key press has been sensed
RELEASE, THEN Control Panel on the control panel during boot-up, possibly indicating a
PRESS ANY KEY TO stuck control panel key. Verify that there are not any objects
CONTINUE pressing against the control panel. After releasing the stuck
key, press any C-Arm control panel key to continue.
A malfunctioning control panel key may interfere with
operation if you attempt to continue. Contact service as soon
as possible.
KEY SWITCH IN C-Arm This message displays when the X-ray keyswitch located on
STANDBY - X-RAYS Control Panel the C-Arm is turned to the standby position. Turn the keys-
AND LIFT DIS- witch to the on position to operate the system. If the keyswitch
ABLED is already in the on position there may be a fault in the keys-
witch or software. In this case perform the error recovery
KV ON IN ERROR - C-Arm This message displays when the high voltage is being gen-
POWER OFF. WAIT Control Panel erated without an X-ray switch being activated, indicating a
10 SECONDS. fault with the high voltage generator. The system will not oper-
ate with this error. Perform the error recovery steps; see 12.1.1
LIFT SWITCH C-Arm This message displays briefly if the lift switch is pressed
STUCK - PRESS Control Panel continuously for 30 seconds. This may indicate a foreign object
ANY KEY is pressing against the switch or a faulty switch or lift circuit. If
there is no object pressing against the switch, perform the
page 12-1.
WARNING: In the event of uncommanded vertical column

movement, immediately move the C-Arm out
of the patient environment until the problem
has been corrected.
LINE POWER WAS Right monitor AC line power is lost on systems with a UPS. Message goes
LOST Shutdown away if power is restored before shutdown begins.
sequence begins
in 20 seconds. To
cancel, restore
Line Power.
LOGIN FAILED Right monitor This message displays when an invalid password is entered in
Please enter your the Login screen.
password again.
LOGOUT IN Right monitor This message displays after logout is confirmed and the system
PROGRESS is logging off the current user.
Proceed?
12-16

LOST Right monitor This message displays when the DICOM server ended the con-
CONNECTION TO nection before the operation was complete. Caused by a con-
THE DICOM nection error during a retrieve operation. Try the retrieve
SERVER The again. If the failure continues, there may be a problem at the
DICOM server server or with your connection to the network.
ended the
connection
unexpectedly
before the
completion of the
retrieve oper-
ation. Plese try
again to retrieve
the
complete infor-
mation.
MA ON IN ERROR - C-Arm This message displays when the X-ray current (tube current)
POWER OFF. WAIT Control Panel has been detected without an X-ray switch being activated,
10 SECONDS. indicating a fault with the X-ray generator. The system will not
operate with this error. Perform the error recovery steps; see
12.1.1 Error recovery procedure on page 12-1.
MA SENSOR FAIL C-Arm This message displays when the system has detected a failure
Control Panel in one of the mA sensors. This message will alternate with the
technique displayed on the control panel display. Perform the
page 12-1..
MEDIA IN DEVICE Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the user tries
FOR COPY OPER- to copy to a CD/DVD but the disk is not writable.
ATION NOT WRIT-
ABLE Press OK,
then insert writ-
able media, and
try again.
MOTION CAL Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor and on the C-Arm
(motorized control panel when a motorized C-Arm requires motion cal-
systems only) ibration.
and C-Arm
control panel
12-17

MOTION Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor and on the C-Arm
CALIBRATION (motorized control panel when a motorized C-Arm requires motion cal-
REQUIRED Motion systems only) ibration.
has not been cal- and C-Arm
ibrated. If this control panel
message persists,
call for service.
MOTION Left monitor This message displays on the left monitor when motorized
DISABLED motion has been disabled by the motion stop or when the RUI
is disconnected. Make sure that the C-Arm is not in contact
with the patient or table. If this message displays with the RUI
properly attached and with no motion engaged, call service.
MOTION ERROR Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor. The right monitor
Touch OK or press may also display a message that motion has been disabled.
the Alarm Reset Turn the system off, wait ten seconds, then restart the system.
key to continue. If If this problem persists, call service.
this message per-
ice.
MOTION FAILURE Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor. The right monitor
Turn the system (motorized then displays a message advising you to turn the system off,
off, wait 10 sec- systems only) wait ten seconds, then restart the system, and to call service if
onds, then restart the problem persists.
the system. If this
message persists,
call for service.
NEW DISK Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the current
NEEDED Insert an target disk doesn't have enough space top complete the copy
empty disk and operation. Switch disks and then finish the copy operation.
press OK to copy
remaining
images.
NEW PASSWORD Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor during a change
AND RETYPED password operation when the new password is not typed
PASSWORD DO exactly the same in both new password boxes. Retry the oper-
NOT MATCH Enter ation and make sure that you retype the password exactly the
the new pass- same both times.
words again.
Make sure the
retyped password
matches the new
password.
12-18

NEW PASSWORD Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the new pass-
TOO SHORT Enter word is not greater than 6 characters in length. Choose a new
a new password password of 6 characters or more and retry the operation.
at least six char-
acters in length.
NO DISK IN DRIVE Right monitor Insert disk. Displayed when the system attempts to read or
Insert disk. write to the CD/DVD drive and no disk is in the drive. Put a disk
in the drive and retry the operation.
NO MATCH Right monitor This message displays when a DICOM query results in no
FOUND images found. Retry the operation with different search crite-
Modify the search ria.
criteria.
NO MEDIA IN Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the user
DEVICE FOR COPY attempts to write data to a disk when there is no disk in the
OPERATION Press drive.
OK, then insert
writable media,
and try again.
NO RESPONSE - Right monitor This message displays when a DICOM server does not respond
SERVER TIMED within the timeout period specified for the Workstation. Retry
OUT Check the operation. You may need to increase the timeout for the
DICOM server Workstation.
configuration
NOT ENOUGH Right monitor This message displays when a DICOM retrieve operation
DISK SPACE TO returns more images than will fit in the DICOM retrieve cache.
RETRIEVE IMAGES You may need to clear files from the cache and then retry the
Please delete operation.
some images.
NOT ENOUGH Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor at the beginning of
SPACE ON THE a copy operation if the size of selected images is greater than
CURRENT DISK the space available on the target disk. You can copy the
Press OK to span images to multiple disks or return to the Image Directory and
the data over select fewer images to copy.
more than one
disk or CANCEL to
get back to Image
Directory.
12-19

OLD PASSWORD Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when you attempt
INCORRECT to change the current password, but don't enter the password
Please enter your correctly in the old password field. Retry the operation with the
old password correct password.
again.
OVERLOAD FAULT C-Arm The system has detected a possible fault in the high voltage
Control Panel regulator circuit or an HV arc "spit" has occurred. The first time
"Max # Spits" less one fault is detected the message will appear
briefly after an exposure.
No action required.
OVERLOAD FAULT C-Arm The system has detected a possible fault in the high voltage
- REBOOT Control Panel regulator circuit or an HV arc "spit" has occurred. X-rays are
REQUIRED disabled when the "Max # Spits" occurs a second time during
an exposure, and the message remains on the display.
Turn system off, wait 10 seconds, then restart the system. If
message persists, call service.
OVERVOLTAGE C-Arm This may indicate a fault in the high voltage regulator circuit or
FAULT Control Panel an X-ray generator failure has occurred. The first time the fault
is detected the message will appear briefly after an exposure.
No action required.
OVERVOLTAGE C-Arm This may indicate a fault in the high voltage regulator circuit or
FAULT - REBOOT Control Panel an X-ray generator failure has occurred. X-rays are disabled
REQUIRED the second time the fault is detected during an exposure and
the message remains on the display.
Turn system off, wait 10 seconds, then restart the system. If
message persists, call service.
PLEASE WAIT C-Arm This message may display briefly on the control panel when
Control Panel the system is updating generator data or performing internal
tests. The message should clear within moments. If the mes-
sage does not clear within 30 seconds to a minute, perform the
page 12-1.
PLEASE WAIT... Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the system is
Searching for busy performing a function. Time varies for the accom-
DICOM format plishment of each function. Displayed during internal system
files on media... processing. Wait for the process to end and then continue.
12-20

PLEASE WAIT.... Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the system is
Searching for busy performing a function. Time varies for the accom-
media... plishment of each function. Displayed during internal system
processing. Wait for the process to end and then continue.
PORT Right monitor Displayed when connection is made.
VERIFICATION
SUCCESSFUL!
PRECHARGE C-Arm This message displays when the contact relay has failed to
CIRCUIT TIMEOUT Control Panel close during the start-up process. This condition results in auto-
- POWER OFF. matic system shutdown. Perform the error recovery steps; see
WAIT 10 SEC- 12.1.1 Error recovery procedure on page 12-1.
ONDS.
PRECHARGE C-Arm This error displays either because CB1 is switched off during
VOLTAGE ERROR - Control Panel startup or because the precharge voltage was too high during
POWER OFF. WAIT the start-up process, resulting in an automatic system shut-
10 SECONDS. down. If the system was recently transported, switch on CB1,
as described in 2.5.1 Turn the system on on page 2-34. Other-
wise, perform the error recovery steps; see 12.1.1 Error recov-
ery procedure on page 12-1.
PRINTER ERROR Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the selected
Check the printer printer reports an error during printing. Check the printer and
error display and correct the error and retry the operation.
refer to the oper-
ating instructions
provided for the
printer for more
information.
PRINTER IS OUT Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the selected
OF FILM OR printer is out of paper or film. Add more paper or film and retry
PAPER Replace the operation.
film or paper.
RELEASED EARLY C-Arm During a film exposure, the X-ray switch was released before
Control Panel the desired mAs was reached. The exposure time may have
been too short for a good image. This message displays briefly
at the end of the terminated exposure. Using a new film in the
cassette, press the X-ray switch and allow enough time for the
system to terminate the exposure.
12-21

REMOTE Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the IR remote
CONTROL control reports that its batteries are too low for accurate use.
BATTERY IS LOW Replace the batteries. See 11.3.1 To replace the batteries on
Replace battery. page 11-5 for information on replacing the remote control bat-
teries.
REQUESTED Right monitor This message displays when an unexpected error occurs. A few
OPERATION possible causes are:
FAILED Please call
l DICOM Q/R application can not lock the database for
service if the prob-
saving retrieved images.
lem persists
l DICOM Q/R application fails to communicate with
media manager to carry out CD/DVD related operation.

ROOM DOOR C-Arm Displayed when the X-ray door switch is opened.
OPEN - CLOSE Control Panel
DOOR
RUI FAILURE The Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when a motorized
system could not C-Arm system fails to communicate with the RUI. First make
communicate sure the RUI is plugged into the C-Arm. If the RUI is plugged in,
with the remote follow the instructions that appear on the right monitor.
user interface.
Turn the system
off, wait 10
seconds, then
restart the
system. If this
message persists,
call for service.
RUI KEY STUCK Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor and on the C-Arm
Remove any (motorized control panel when a stuck button is detected on a motorized
objects that may systems only) C-Arm system.
be in contact with and C-Arm
the RUI buttons. control panel
Turn the system
off, wait ten
seconds, then
restart the
system. If this
problem persists,
call service.
RUNNING C-Arm This message occurs during system calibrations like Filament
CALIBRATION Control Panel calibration.
12-22

SATURATION C-Arm This message displays when a fault in the high voltage reg-
FAULT - POWER Control Panel ulator circuit has occurred. The system will not operate with
OFF. WAIT 10 this error. Perform the error recovery steps; see 12.1.1 Error
SECONDS. recovery procedure on page 12-1.
SAVE OPERATION Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the Save key
FAILED System is pressed and the save operation fails to complete suc-
failed to complete cessfully. Try the operation again. If the message persists, call
the requested for service.
Save operation.
Please try again.
If the message
persists, call for
service.
SCHEDULED EXAM Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the user
LIST IS FULL New touches the NEW EXAM button on the Patient Information
patient infor- screen when the scheduled exam list is already full.
mation will not
You may take X-rays for patient and save in Saved Exams.
appear in the
scheduled exam
list.
Search in Prog- Right monitor Displayed when the user does a search against a DICOM server
ress Please Wait and the result is not received immediately.
Searching for Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the user
external video selects Endoscope on the Additional Apps screen.
source... Press
Additional Appli-
cations key to
cancel
SHUTDOWN IN Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the system is
PROGRESS shutting down. Once this message displays, the user cannot
abort the shutdown process.
SHUTDOWN IN Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the system is
PROGRESS The shutting down. Once this message displays, the user cannot
UPS battery is abort the shutdown process. Leave the Workstation plugged in
low: Immediate for several hours to charge the UPS battery. If this message
shutdown in prog- persists, call for service.
ress.
STATOR NOT ON - C-Arm This message displays when the X-ray tube stator is not on,
POWER OFF. WAIT Control Panel and the tube’s anode cannot rotate. The system will not oper-
10 SECONDS. ate with this error. Perform the error recovery steps; see 12.1.1
12-23

SYSTEM ERROR Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when:
The Workstation
l The Workstation detects an unrecoverable error.
is fully functional
but X-rays are l Frame sync is lost for more than ten seconds.
disabled. To l The system is unable to recover from a Frame Sync Error
enable X-rays displayed on the left monitor.
turn the system
off, wait ten Touching OK clears the message and allows use of the
seconds, then Workstation but X-rays remain disabled until the system is
restart the restarted. To restart the system turn the Workstation off, wait
system. If this 10 seconds, and then restart the Workstation. If this message
message persists, persists, call for service.
call for service.
SYSTEM ERROR Left monitor This message displays on the left monitor when:
DETECTED X-rays
are disabled. Turn
the system off, l Frame sync is lost for more than ten seconds.
wait 10 seconds, l The system is unable to recover from a Frame Sync Error
and then restart displayed on the left monitor.
the system. If this
message persists,
call for service.
SYSTEM ERROR Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when:
DETECTED X-rays
are disabled. Turn
the system off, l Frame sync is lost for more than ten seconds.
wait 10 seconds, l The system is unable to recover from a Frame Sync Error
and then restart displayed on the left monitor.
the system. If this
message persists,
call for service.
SYSTEM ERROR - Bottom of left This message displays on the left monitor when the Work-
X-RAYS DISABLED monitor station GIB or FFB detect no frame syncs, or too many frame
syncs. If the error was detected just once, the message dis-
plays for 2 seconds and then disappears. The system attempts
to recover from this error automatically. If it is unable to
recover within 5 seconds, a System Error message displays on
the right monitor.
12-24

SYSTEM FAILED TO Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the system
CONNECT TO cannot connect to the desired server because of a wrong IP
DICOM SERVER address or port number. Check the IP address and port
Verify the target number for the desired server and retry the operation.
server is on line,
and its IP address
and port number
are configured
properly on the
system. If this
message persists,
call for service.
SYSTEM FAILED TO Right monitor Displayed when the system cannot connect to the desired
CONNECT TO server because of a wrong AE Title. Check the AE title of the
DICOM SERVER desired server and retry the operation.
Verify the AE title
and/or Query
Information
Model for the tar-
get server are con-
figured properly
on the Work-
station.
TEMP. SENSOR C-Arm This message displays when the X-ray tube’s heat sensing ele-
FAIL Control Panel ment is defective. You may continue using the system, but
there is a danger that the X-ray tube may overheat during use
without further warnings being given. Call your service rep-
resentative.
THE C-ARM HAS Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the C-Arm
BEEN RECON- that was previously connected to the Workstation is recon-
NECTED TO THE nected without restarting the Workstation.
WORKSTATION
The following pro-
cedure is rec-
ommended: Turn
the Workstation
off, wait 10 sec-
onds, and then
restart the Work-
station.
12-25

THE CINE DISK IS Right monitor This message displays at startup if the Cine disk fails to initialize
NOT AVAILABLE correctly. Turn the Workstation off, wait 10 seconds, and then
Turn the Work- restart the Workstation.
station off, wait
10 seconds, and
then restart the
Workstation. If
this message per-
ice.
THE CURRENT Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when a single
CINE RUN WILL exposure gets within 30 seconds of filling the entire Cine disk
FILL THE CINE allocation on the system.
DISK IN APPROX-
IMATELY 30 SEC-
ONDS Cine
Acquisition will
stop when the cur-
rent run has filled
the disk.
THE CURRENT SES- Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when several Cine
SION CINE RUNS runs for a single patient have been run and filled the time avail-
WILL BE OVER- able for Cine acquisition. Displayed when less than 30 seconds
WRITTEN IN 30 of Cine time remains before the current patient's Cine runs
SECONDS The old- begin to be overwritten.
est previous runs
of the current ses-
sion will be over-
written first.
THE DICOM Right monitor Displayed when the system successfully connects to the
SERVER VERIFIED DICOM server in response to a verify request invoked from the
SUCCESSFULLY DICOM PRINT DEFINITION, DICOM STORE DEFINITION, or
Press OK to con- DICOM QUERY DEFINITION screen.
tinue.
THE DISK IN THE Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when an error
REMOVABLE occurs writing to a CD or DVD disk.
MEDIA DEVICE
CANNOT BE
WRITTEN TO
Insert a writable
disk and press OK
or Cancel to exit.
12-26

THE LAST IMAGE Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the user
IS BIGGER IN SIZE selects (with the Ctrl key) a Cine that is bigger in size than the
THAN THE CUR- current media's capacity.
RENT MEDIA
CAPACITY Copy
operation will fail
until the image is
deselected or a
higher capacity
media is used.
THE SELECTED Right monitor This message displays when a function is selected that is not
FUNCTION IS NOT available on the current model of Workstation.
AVAILABLE ON
THIS MODEL Press
OK to continue.
THIS DICOM Right monitor This message displays when the system successfully connects
SERVER VERIFIED to a DICOM server and a verify request is sent from a DICOM
SUCCESSFULLY definition screen.
Press OK to con-
tinue.
This study con- Right monitor Displayed when a study containing color images is loaded in
tains color the Study Viewer.
images. Not all
viewer functions
will be available.
TOO MANY Right monitor This message displays when a DICOM query results in too
MATCHES FOUND many results. Limit the Query parameters and retry the oper-
Modify the search ation.
criteria.
Transmission Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when log files have
complete. Reboot been sent to GE On-Line center.
to restore system
function.
Transmitting files. Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor after user selects
Please wait. . . the button to send log files to GE On-Line center.
12-27

UNIQUE ID FIELD Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when a field on the
DOES NOT MATCH second entry line on the Service screen does not match its cor-
One or more responding field on the first entry line.
fields between the
first and second
Unique ID entry
fields do not
match. Check the
fields and try
again.
UNIQUE ID FIELD Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when a field on the
INCORRECT One Service screen is entered incorrectly.
or more Unique ID
entry fields are
incorrect. Check
the fields and try
again.
UNKNOWN Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when an unknown
ERROR RESPONSE error is detected in the media.
RECEIVED FROM
REMOVABLE
MEDIA Current
removable media
operation will be
canceled. If this
message persists,
call for service
VERIFY FAILED The Right monitor Displayed when the verify process is unsuccessful (echo failed).
Verify Operation
failed.
WAIT C-Arm This message displays when the battery charge is below 40%.
Control Panel
WARNING, HIGH C-Arm This message displays when an error has been detected in the
KV - PRESS ANY Control Panel kV loop. The actual kVp is higher than that indicated on the
KEY control panel display and is not within specified tolerances.
WARNING: Continuing with the procedure when the

WARNING, HIGH KV message has been dis-
played may subject the patient to a higher
dose than that indicated. Press any C-Arm con-
trol panel key to continue with the procedure.
12-28

WARNING, HIGH C-Arm This message displays when a calibration error has been
MA - PRESS ANY Control Panel detected. The actual mA is higher than that indicated on the
WARNING: Continuing with the procedure when the

WARNING, HIGH MA message has been dis-
played may subject the patient to a higher
dose than that indicated. Press any C-Arm con-
trol panel key to continue with the procedure.
WARNING, LOW C-Arm This message displays when an error has been detected in the
KV - PRESS ANY Control Panel kV loop. The actual kVp is lower than that indicated on the con-
KEY trol panel display and is not within specified tolerances. Lower
kVp may result in poor image quality. Press any C-Arm control
panel key to continue.
WARNING, LOW C-Arm This message displays when a calibration error has been
MA - PRESS ANY Control Panel detected. The actual mA is lower than that indicated on the
Lower mA may result in poor image quality. Press any C-Arm
control panel key to continue.
WARNING! X-RAY Right monitor This message displays when the system senses that the tem-
HOUSING TEM- perature sensor in the housing has failed.
PERATURE SEN-
SOR FAILURE
Temperature infor-
mation unavail-
able. If this
message persists,
call for service
WORKSTATION Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when the
AND GENERATOR Workstation determines during startup that the Workstation
ARE NOT software and the generator software are not compatible, or
COMPATIBLE when a motorized C-Arm is connected to a non-motorized
Connect the Workstation. Connect the C-Arm to a compatible Workstation.
Workstation to a
compatible
Generator or use
it as an
independent
Workstation. If
this message
persists, call for
service.
12-29

WORKSTATION Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when a connection
UPS COM- between the Workstation and UPS is disrupted. This error is
MUNICATION detected at startup.
FAILURE Turn the
Workstation off,
wait 10 seconds,
and then restart
the Workstation.
If this message
persists, call for
service.
WORKSTATION Right monitor This message displays on the right monitor when com-
UPS FAILURE Turn munication between the UPS and Workstation is established
the Workstation but the UPS reports an error other than battery low. This error
off, wait 10 sec- is detected at startup.
onds, and then
restart the Work-
station. If this mes-
sage persists, call
for service.
X-RAY OVERTIME - C-Arm This message displays when the film shot has continued
PRESS ANY KEY Control Panel beyond the time required to achieve the correct exposure and
software has terminated the exposure. Press any control panel
key to continue.
WARNING: When the X-ray OVERTIME message displays

the patient may have received a higher dose
than expected and continued film exposures
may result in a higher than expected dose and
longer exposure times.
X-RAY SWITCH C-Arm This message displays on the Control Panel when a mismatch
SECURITY ERROR Control Panel between the handswitch or footswitch and a security line has
and left been sensed. System operation is terminated. Call your service
monitor representative. The message displays on the left monitor when
an X-ray switch security error is detected by the C-Arm. The
message is cleared when the error on the C-Arm is cleared
X-RAY SWITCH Left monitor Displayed on the left monitor when an X-ray switch security
SECURITY ERROR error is detected by the C-Arm. The message is cleared when
the error on the C-Arm is cleared.
12-30

X-RAY SWITCH C-Arm This message displays when a mismatch between the hand-
SECURITY ERROR Control Panel switch or footswitch and a security line has been sensed or if a
– PRESS ANY KEY slow press of the C-Arm X-ray switch has occurred. System
operation is terminated. Press any key on the C-Arm control
panel to clear the error message and re-enable X-rays. If the
error persists, call your service representative.
X-RAY SWITCH C-Arm This message displays when one of the X-ray exposure
STUCK Control Panel switches has been detected as enabled during the boot
sequence. Verify that switches are not being enabled by a for-
eign object. Or disconnect the handswitch and/or footswitch
and attempt restarting the system. If the system restarts, the
disconnected device may contain a fault requiring service. If
the message persists, there is an internal fault that is pre-
venting system operation. Call your service representative.
X-RAYS DISABLED C-Arm This message displays on the C-Arm control panel when the
Control Panel Workstation needs to disable X-rays or when the C-Arm
detects a problem with receiving the frame synchronization sig-
nal.
X-RAYS DISABLED C-Arm Displayed when X-ray generation subsystem is shut down due
– REBOOT Control Panel to the detection of an active X-ray generation input signal dur-
REQUIRED ing bootup.
X-RAYS TEM- Left monitor This message displays on the left monitor during an FFB
PORARILY DIS- reboot. The message is cleared when the FFB recovers from its
ABLED reboot.
12-31
12-32
13. Technical specifications and references

The policy of GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. is one of continual product development and
improvement. For this reason, GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. reserves the right to change the
operating characteristics and specifications of newer products at any time, without prior notice,
and without incurring any obligation relating to previously manufactured items.
The specifications listed are limited to general performance and physical data. Specifications of
optional equipment provided by other manufacturers are given in the applicable manuals provided
with those options.
GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. will make available, on request, circuit diagrams, component part lists,
descriptions, calibration instructions, or other information which will assist properly trained and
qualified technicians to repair those parts of the system which are designated as repairable.
This section includes the following information:
l Classification type
l Environmental conditions
l X-ray source specifications
l Radiographic tables
l Scatter radiation
l C-Arm specifications
l Workstation specifications
l Power requirements
l Dimensions
l Communication Center contact information
l Material safety data sheets
13-1
13.1 Classification type

As defined by IEC 60601-1:
l Class I Equipment type protection against electric shock
l Type B degree of protection against electric shock (C-Arm)
l IPXO (ordinary) protection against ingress of liquids
l Ordinary protection against ingress of water
l Anesthetic Proof Continuous Operation. (See 13.7 C-Arm specifications on page 13-13 for the
fluoroscopic and film mode duty cycle specifications.)
l Category AP Equipment (C-Arm extension only)
l Mode of operation is continuous (standby) and intermittent (maximum)
13.2 Environmental conditions

The following environmental specifications are applicable to both the C-Arm and Workstation
subsystems.
Ambient operating +10 to +35° C
temperature +50 to +95° F
Short-term Storage and -10 to +55° C
Transportation (< 2 days) +14 to +131° F
Extended Storage and 0 to + 40° C
Transportation (> 2 days) +32 to + 104° F
Altitude Operating: 10000 ft. (3048 meters) maximum
Storage and transport: 15000 ft (4572 meters)
Humidity Operating: 20% - 80%, non-condensing
Storage and transport: 20% - 80%, non-condensing
Shock and Vibration 1G at 5-200 Hz for 2 hours
CAUTION At initial setup or when removing from storage, stabilize for 24 hours at ambient
temperature and humidity before applying power.
Failure to observe this warning will result in damage to equipment.
13-2
13.3 X-ray source specifications

13.3.1 X-ray source assembly
Type Varian RAD-99B (rotating anode) in ORIIIB housing
Focal Spot Dual, 0.3 and 0.6 (per IEC 60336)
Target Diameter 3.1 inches (80mm)
Target Material Tungsten-rhenium molybdenum
Target Angle 10°
Maximum Voltage Anode to Cathode = 125 kV
Anode to Ground = 62.5 kV
Cathode to Ground = 62.5 kV
Maximum Filament Current Focus 0.3: 4.1 A
Focus 0.6: 5 A
Maximum Filament Voltage Focus 0.3: 7.8 V
Focus 0.6: 11 V
Nominal Anode Input Focus 0.3: 8.3 kW
Focus 0.6: 22.5 kW
Continuous Maximum Input 1000 W
Maximum Continuous Heat Dis- 82000 HU/min
sipation
Speed up time for Anode 1-2 seconds
Braking time for Anode N/A
Leakage Radiation Less than 100 mR/hr (0.88 mGy/hr)
Cooling Method for X-ray Tube Convection cooling (optional passive cooling or optional active cool-
Assembly ing).
Weight of X-ray Tube Assembly 43 lbs
Inherent Filtration 0.7mm Al minimum (at 75 kVp) per IEC 60522
Total Filtration Additional filtration is added to the beam from the collimator assembly
and cover for a total of 6.3mm Al minimum (at 75 kVp).
Anode Heat Storage Capacity 300000 HU per IEC 60613
Anode Maximum Cooling Rate 85 kHU/minute. See 13.3.5 Heating and cooling chart - anode on page
13-7
Housing Heat Storage Capacity 1600000 HU
Housing Cooling Rate 15 kHU/minute. See 13.3.4 Heating and cooling charts - tube housing
on page 13-6
Housing Cooling Rate (with optional 22.5 kHU/minute.
passive cooling kit)
Housing Cooling Rate (with optional 31 kHU/minute.
active cooling kit)
Leakage Technique Factors 125 kVp and 1.5 mA
13-3
X-ray Tube Rating 125 kVp maximum

Max. Symmetrical Radiation Field 100 cm from focal spot equals 224 mm;
measured on X-axis (for 9 inch sys- 30 cm from focal spot equals 67 mm
tems)
Max. Symmetrical Radiation Field 100 cm from focal spot equals 296 mm;
measured on X-axis (for 12 inch sys- 30 cm from focal spot equals 88 mm
tems)
Focal Spot to Image Intensifier Input 100 cm
(SID)
13.3.2 Dose Area Product

The calculated dose area product is a measure of radiation emitted by the X-ray tube. This does not
represent the radiation absorbed by the patient. The table below shows a measure of accuracy for
field size.
The DAP specification for accuracy is ± 50%, based on the IEC 60601-2-43. This is for reference only
and does not imply compliance with the entire IEC 60601-2-43 standard but only the accuracy
specification of the standard.
Iris and shutter collimated fields are at the image receptor plane (scatter grid surface). Collimated
fields less than 5 cm at the surface of the image receptor may result in significantly greater error.
Collimated fields less than 8 cm at the tabletop surface may result in significantly greater error.
The table below shows a measure of accuracy for field size at the X-ray source side of the tabletop
surface.
Table 13-1: Overall accuracy
Accuracy Lateral Shutter Field Longitudinal Shutter Field
± 30% >14 cm >14 cm
± 45% >8 cm >8 cm
NOTE: Both the lateral and longitudinal positions must be greater than the specified field sizes for the
given accuracy specification to apply.
13-4
13.3.3 Tube rating charts

The following charts and data describe tube characteristics when operated with three-phase full-
wave rectification, a reasonable approximation to the high frequency generator with minimal ripple.
Radiographic ratings (50 Hertz)
Figure 13-1: 50 Hertz radiographic rating charts
Radiographic ratings (60 Hertz)
Figure 13-2: 60 Hertz radiographic rating charts
13-5
13.3.4 Heating and cooling charts - tube housing
Figure 13-3: Standard cooling

A - Sustained operation at 440 watts (kV.mA = total watts)
reaches maximum heat units (1600 kHu) in 1 hour.
B - Sustained operation at 300 Watts.
C - Sustained operation at 220 Watts.
D - Cooling rate once maximum is reached.
Figure 13-4: Cooling with passive cooling kit (fan only)

A - Sustained operation at 500 watts (kV.mA = total watts)
reaches maximum heat units (1600 kHu) in 1 hour.
B - Sustained operation at 300 Watts.
C - Sustained operation at 220 Watts.
D - Cooling rate once maximum is reached.
13-6
13.3.5 Heating and cooling chart - anode
Figure 13-5: Anode heating and cooling curves
Figure 13-6: Anode heating and cooling chart
13-7
13.4 Radiographic tables

13.4.1 Radiographic mA as a function of kV and mAs
The radiographic mA tables on these pages list the mA and spot size that will be used by the system
to obtain the desired mAs (mA x time) product during a film exposure. Focal spot size is as defined in
IEC 60336.
Technique mA Focal spot Technique mA Focal spot
used* used used* used
kV mAs kV mAs
50 to 52 1.0 to 100 45 0.3 63 to 67 110 to 300 65 0.6
50 to 52 110 to 300 75 0.6 68 to 72 1.0 to 100 60 0.3
53 to 57 1.0 to 100 45 0.3 68 to 72 110 to 300 60 0.6
53 to 57 110 to 300 75 0.6 73 to 77 1.0 to 100 55 0.3
58 to 62 1.0 to 100 50 0.3 73 to 77 110 to 300 55 0.6
58 to 62 110 to 300 70 0.6 78 to 82 1.0 to 100 50 0.3
63 to 67 1.0 to 100 55 0.3 78 to 82 110 to 300 52 0.6
*In 0.3 mode (< 100 mAs) the minimum exposure length is 200 mS. Low mAs selections, mAs values smaller than
"used mA" divided by 5, will result in lower mA than is shown in the table. The mA value can be calculated by mul-
tiplying the mAs value by 5.
83 to 87 1.0 to 90 50 0.3 98 to 102 110 to 300 40 0.6
83 to 87 91 to 100 40 0.3 103 to 107 1.0 to 80 40 0.3

83 to 87 110 to 300 50 0.6 103 to 107 81 to 100 30 0.3
88 to 92 1.0 to 100 45 0.3 108 to 112 1.0 to 60 38 0.3
88 to 92 110 to 300 45 0.6 108 to 112 61 to 100 30 0.3
93 to 97 1.0 to 50 45 0.3 113 to 117 1.0 to 50 36 0.3
93 to 97 51 to 100 40 0.3 113 to 117 51 to 100 30 0.3
93 to 97 110 to 300 45 0.6 118 to 120 1.0 to 40 35 0.3

98 to 102 1.0 to 35 42 0.3 118 to 120 41 to 100 30 0.3
98 to 102 36 to 100 40 0.3
13.4.2 Measurement basis for technique factors

l kVp - The peak value of high voltage generator output in the interval after a 20 mS delay
period to the end of the exposure.
l mA - The time average of the current flow into the high voltage cable/X-ray tube assembly,
beginning at the point where kVp crosses the 35 kVp level.
l Time - Measurement of exposure time begins when the kVp crosses the 35 kVp level (80% of
kVp selected).
l mAs - The time integral of mA as defined above.
13-8
13.5 Focal spot specifications

13.5.1 Focal spot (0.3) per IEC 60336
Mode mA range mAs kVp Pulse rate (pps) Pulse width
range range (mS)
Manual / 0.2 - 10* N/A 40 - 120 N/A N/A
Auto
Fluoroscopy
High Level 0.2 - 20 N/A 40 - 120 N/A N/A
Fluoro
Continuous
Pulsed Man- 0.2 - 10* N/A 40 - 120 60Hz: 1, 2, 3.75, (7.5, 15) 50, (25)
ual / Auto
50Hz: 1, 2.083, 4.167, (6.25,
Fluoroscopy
12.5) hyp
Pulsed Auto 0.2 - 40 N/A 40 - 120 60Hz: 1, 2, 3.75, (7.5, 15) 50, (25)
Fluorography
50Hz: 1, 2.083, 4.167, (6.25,
12.5)
Radiographic See 13.4.1 1 - 100 50 - 120 N/A N/A
Radiographic
mA as a func-
tion of kV and
mAs on page
13-8.
Digital Spot 1.0 - 75 N/A 40 - 120 N/A 60Hz: 66 - 133
50Hz: 80 - 160
* In manual mode, the maximum system tube current is 10mA . In automatic and pulse modes, the
maximum mA may be lower.
13.5.2 Focal spot (0.6) per IEC 60336

Mode mA range mAs kVp Pulse rate (pps) Pulse width
range range (mS)
Pulsed 0.2 - 150 N/A 40 - 120 60Hz: 15, 30 10
Digital Cine
50Hz: 12.5, 25
Radiographic N/A 110 - 300 50 - 120 N/A N/A
13-9
13.6 Scatter radiation

13.6.1 9 Inch (22.8 cm) image intensifier
Conditions:
l MDH 1015 X-ray monitor
l 10 x 5-6 ion chamber (entrance exposure only)
l 10 x 5-180 ion chamber (scatter exposure only)
l ANSI abdomen phantom (30.5cm x 30.5cm x 17.78cm Lucite)
Horizontal plane
The following illustration shows measurement points in a plane perpendicular to the beam axis at a
height indicated by reference point C1. C1 is the 30 inch SSD, and is illustrated in the Vertical Plane
illustration, below. The measurement points are 25 cm apart. The table following the illustration
shows expected scatter radiation at each point.
Figure 13-7: Overhead view of C-Arm and imaging table

Table 13-2: 9 inch I.I. air Kerma scatter rates – Horizontal plane
Technique: Fluoroscopic 73 kVp @ 2.4 mA / Entrance Exposure Rate: (Reference C1)

Measurement point Entrance exposure rate Dose rate
H1 598 mR/hr 5.22 mGy/hr
H3 56 mR/hrx 1.16 mGy/hr
S1 523 mR/hr 4.56 mGy/hr
13-10

Vertical plane
The following illustration shows measurement points in a plane through the beam axis at a height
indicated by reference point C1, which represents the 30 inch SSD. The measurement points are 25
cm apart. The table following the illustration shows expected scatter radiation at these points.
Figure 13-8: Side view of C-Arm and imaging table

Table 13-3: 9 inch I.I. air Kerma scatter rates – Vertical plane

T1 Too close to phantom for measurement
T2 72 mR/hr 0.62 mGy/hr
C1 1.03 R/min 0.008 Gy/min
B1 Too close to phantom for measurement
B2 328 mR/hr 2.86 mGy/hr
13-11
13.6.2 12 Inch (30.5 cm) image intensifier

Conditions:
l MDH 1015 X-ray Monitor
l 10 x 5-6 Ion Chamber (entrance exposure only)
l 10 x 5-180 Ion Chamber (scatter exposure only)
l ANSI Abdomen Phantom (30.5cm x 30.5cm x 17.78cm Lucite)
Horizontal plane
The following illustration shows measurement points in a plane perpendicular to the beam axis at a
height indicated by reference point C1. C1 is the 30 inch SSD, and is illustrated in the Vertical Plane
illustration, below. The measurement points are 25 cm apart. The table following the illustration
shows expected scatter radiation at each point.
Figure 13-9: Overhead view of C-Arm and imaging table

Table 13-4: 12-inch I.I. air Kerma scatter rates – Horizontal plane

H1 1080 mR/hrr 9.42 mGy/h
13-12
Vertical plane
The following illustration shows measurement points in a plane through the beam axis at a height
indicated by reference point C1, which represents the 30 inch SSD. The measurement points are 25
cm apart. The table following the illustration shows expected scatter radiation at these points.
Figure 13-10: Side view of C-Arm and imaging table

Table 13-5: 12 inch I.I. air Kerma scatter rates – Vertical plane

T1 Too close to phantom for measurement
C1 0.93 R/min 0.008 Gy/min
B1 Too close to phantom for measurement
B3 B3 248 mR/hr 2.16 mGy/hr
13.7 C-Arm specifications

13.7.1 C-Arm camera output video signal
Hi-res 1k x 1k pixel, 1260 lines/frame @ 30Hz, 1320 lines/frame @ 25Hz.
13.7.2 C-Arm collimation

Fluoroscopy
Nominal diameter circle for 9/6/4 inch image intensifier system
23 cm (9 inch)
15 cm (6 inch)
13-13
11 cm (4.5 inch)
Nominal diameter circle for 12/9/6 inch image intensifier system

31 cm (12 inch)
23 cm (9 inch)
15 cm (6 inch)
Continuously adjustable to an area less than 5 cm x 5 cm, measured at the image
receptor plane (image intensifier input surface).
Radiography
Nominal diameter circle 9 inch image intensifier system
23 cm (9 inch)
Nominal diameter circle 12 inch image intensifier system

31 cm (12 inch)
Continuously adjustable to an area less than 5 cm x 5 cm, measured at the image
receptor plane (image intensifier input surface).
13.7.3 C-Arm generator specifications

The following information is provided in accordance with IEC 60601-2-7.
Nominal kVp @ maximum mA

Film mode: 57 kVp @ 75 mA
Normal Mode: 120 kVp @ 10 mA
HLF Fluoro: 120 kVp @ 20 mA
Pulsed Fluorography: 99 kVp @ 40 mA
Digital Cine: 100 kVp @ 150 mA
Nominal mA @ maximum kVp

Film mode: 35 mA @ 120 kVp
Normal Mode: 10 mA @ 120 kVp
HLF Fluoro: 20 mA @ 120 kVp
Pulsed Fluorography: 33 mA @ 120 kVp
Digital Cine: 125 mA @ 120 kVp
Maximum output power

Film mode: 4.4 kW @ 97 kVp, 45 mA
13-14
Pulsed Fluorography: 4.0 kW @ 120 kVp, 33 mA

Digital Cine: 15.0 kW @ 100 kVp, 150 mA; 10 mS pulsed @ 30 or 25 pps
Nominal output power film mode: 4.2 kW @ 100 kVp, 42 mA for 0.2 second exposure
Lowest mAs setting film mode: 1.0 mAs (independent of kVp)
Nominal shortest exposure time film mode: 0.2 second
13.7.4 C-Arm generator operating parameters

Type: Switched design, 60 kHz nominal operating frequency
kVp Accuracy: ± (5% or 3 kVp) greater of the two
mA Accuracy: ± (10% + 0.1 mA)
mAs Accuracy: ± (10% + 0.2 mAs)
Time Accuracy: ± 10%
Linearity: Film mode linearity < 0.08
Reproducibility: C.O.V. < 0.04
Focal Spot: 0.3 and 0.6 per IEC 60336
Fluoroscopy Duty Cycle: 70 kVp @ 2.0 mA continuous
Film Mode Duty Cycle: 97 kVp @ 45 mA, 6.7 seconds (300 mAs)
Once per 5 min (2.2 %) continuous
Once per minute (1.1 %) for 30 exposures
Pulse Width Accuracy ± (10 % + 1 mS)
(Digital Cine and Pulsed):
13.8 Workstation specifications

13.8.1 Workstation video signal
Composite video, EIA RS170A 60 Hz, 525 line, [International CCIR 50 Hz, 625 line] TTL Logic.
13-15
13.8.2 Workstation external connections
Figure 13-11: Workstation external connections

1- Left Monitor Standard Video NTSC / EIA 170 or CCIR monochrome composite video
output (standard resolution).
2- Left Monitor Fast Scan high resolution (1kx1k) monochrome composite video.
3- Right Monitor Fast Scan high resolution (1kx1k) monochrome composite video.
4- DVI-OUT/Right monitor video connector (DVI-I) that outputs right monitor video sig-
nal in analog format (GE OEC 980X980).
5- Room Control Connector (Input/Output - Switch/relay control for Injector, Room,
Door - see Figure 13-12: Input/Output relay connection on Workstation on page
13-16).
6- DICOM /Ethernet network connector (RJ45).
7- Field Service Port
The GE OEC Workstation can provide a signal to an approved injector through the Room Control
connector. This signal is sent when the injection icon displays during a procedure. A custom cable
will need to be constructed or obtained from an approved injector manufacturer or GE OEC.
Figure 13-12 shows a diagram of the pin numbers on the external connection that controls the
injection signal.
Figure 13-12: Input/Output relay connection on Workstation

Pin 1 and 6 Power Contrast Injection Connector output. Isolated relay contacts normally open.
Contacts close to provide a signal to the contrast media injector.
These relays are capable of switching 24V DC or 24V AC at a current of up to 2 amps. All other
13-16
switches are currently undefined.

Call Technical Support for a list of approved injectors that work with the GE OEC Workstation. See
13.11 Communication Center contact information on page 13-26 for phone numbers.
13.8.3 CD/DVD-R/RW drive

Supported formats DVD single layer CD-ROM
DVD-R (3.9 GB / 4.7 GB ) CD-R
DVD-R multi-session CD-RW
DVD+R
DVD-RW
DVD+RW
Write speeds DVD+R DL: 2.4X max CD-R: 48X max
DVD+R: 16X max CD-RW: 24X max
DVD+RW: 4X max
DVD-R: 8X max
DVD-RW: 4X max
Read speeds DVD-ROM: 16X max CD-ROM: 48X max
Random access times DVD-ROM: 105-160 ms CD-ROM: 110-140 ms
Data transfer rates DVD Family: 16X (21600 KB/sec) max CD Family: 48X (7200 KB/sec) max
Features Buffer Under Run Protection
13.9 Power requirements

Before power is connected to the system, the operator must be certain that the power outlet has
been approved, as indicated below, for the current, voltage, and line regulation requirements of the
system.
CAUTION A dedicated AC power line is recommended to avoid conflicts with the power require-
ments of other equipment.
The system operating voltage is changeable. If the operating voltage requires changing, this change
must be made by a GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. service technician, or by qualified technical service
personnel.
Line Frequency: 60/50 Hz
100 VAC (± 10%): 20 Amps
110/120 VAC (± 10%): 15 Amps or 20 Amps (Model Dependent)
200/220/230/240 VAC (± 10%): 10 Amps
Technique factors at maximum line current condition: Peak power demand is determined by the
battery charger current limit and all accessories and features currently installed. The system uses
Battery Buffered power for X-ray Generation, as such Technique factors minimally affects the
maximum line current, and line current is generally independent of the technique.
13-17
Line regulation: 10% at nominal voltage at maximum radiographic exposure. Line regulation is
based on measurements made at the input (primary winding) of the isolation transformer under
standby conditions and at maximum radiographic exposure by the following equation:
Line regulation = 100 (Vn - Vi)/Vi
Where Vn = no load voltage (standby), and Vi = loaded voltage (maximum radiographic exposure).
System maximum continuous power dissipation: 5600 BTU/Hr.
Workstation maximum continuous power dissipation: 2100 BTU/Hr.
C-Arm maximum continuous power dissipation: 3500 BTU/Hr.
13.9.1 C-Arm interconnect cable

The C-Arm obtains AC power from an interconnect cable attached to the Workstation. The power is
isolated single phase. Power for C-Arm is included in Workstation power requirements.
NOTE: The interconnect cable provides video and communication signal interface, in addition to
power.
13-18
13.9.2 I/O interfaces

ROOM Interface Port Output: +24VAC Max relay closures
ROOM Interface Port Input: External Relay contact closure
Footswitch: 5 VDC 30 mA current source*
Handswitch: 5 VDC 30 mA current source*
Standard Video: 1 VAC peak-to-peak (p-p)*
Fast Scan Video: 1 VAC p-p*
Printer: 25-pin parallel interface*
ARCNET: +/- 5VAC*
DICOM: Ethernet interface
*Maximum non-destructive voltages that can be connected to signal I/O ports: 7 Volts DC
13.9.3 Connector output voltages

l Footswitch: 5 VDC 30 mA current source
l Handswitch: 5 VDC 30 mA current source
l Standard Video: 2 VAC point to point (p-p)
l Fast Scan Video: 2 VAC p-p
l Printer: centronix interface
l Direct Digital Printer Interface: centronix interface
l RS-232 (COM1): 9-pin connector
l DICOM: Ethernet interface
l ARCNET: +/- 5VAC
Given for three-phase, full-wave rectification, a reasonable approximation to the high frequency
generator with minimal ripple.
13-19
13.10 Dimensions
13.10.1 9 inch standard C-Arm
13-20
13.10.2 12 inch standard C-Arm
13-21
13.10.3 9 inch super C-Arm
13-22
13.10.4 9 inch Motorized C-Arm
13-23
13.10.5 12 inch Motorized C-Arm
13-24
13.10.6 Workstation
13.10.7 Film cassette

9 inch image intensifier 12 inch image intensifier
Metric 24 cm x 30 cm 35 cm x 35 cm
Standard 10 inch x 12 inch 14 inch x 14 inch
13-25
13.11 Communication Center contact information

13.11.1 Ordering disposable and accessory items
GE OEC Medical Systems offers a wide variety of film and sterile drapes to support your surgery
equipment.
13.11.2 Service contact information

Phone
1. Call the number that corresponds to your geographical location.
US: 800-874-7378
Canada: 800 668-0732
For China, see 1.6.1 After-sales service agency (中国境内售后服务机构 ) on page 1-14
All other locations: Contact your local sales representative.
2. Establish an account with the customer service representative.
3. Place your order.
Fax
If you have a catalog and a GE Fax Order form, complete the form and fax it to 801-355-8114. If you
do not have a catalog, and would like one you can obtain them by dialing the number listed for your
geographical location.
On-line
You can order disposables and accessories on the GE Healthcare web site from any geographical
location but prior to ordering you must register on-line to open an account. Registration is free.
1. Go to www.gehealthcare.com/usen/index.html.
2. Register to open an account.
NOTE: Record your user name and password for future account access.
3. Log in using the user name and password that you established when you registered.
4. Browse through the online catalog and locate the OEC Supplies that you want to purchase.
NOTE: If you have difficulties, dial the telephone number listed previously for your geographical loca-
tion or contact your local sales representative.
You may also call these numbers to order circuit diagrams, component part lists, calibration
instructions, arrange training or obtain other information which will assist qualified service
engineers to repair the system.
13-26
13.11.3 Optional equipment

The following accessories have been tested with, and are known to work with the C-Arm.
l Laser aimer
l Film cassette holder
The following accessories have been tested with, and are known to work with the Workstation:
l Instant film/paper printer
l Thermal printers
l VCR
l Laser camera interface
l DICOM 3.0 interface
Call the Communication Center to order optional equipment.
13.11.4 Replacement items

The following replacement items can be ordered:
l Film
l Printer paper
l Sterile drapes and covers
l External video cable kit
l DVD media
To receive more information on optional equipment or replacement items, call the Communication
Center.
13.12 Material safety data sheets

Manufacturer’s material safety data sheets are available from the manufacturer upon request.
Contact the following manufacturers with regard to the materials listed:
l Dow Corning R 5 Compound (Silicone)-Dow Corning Corporation, South Saginaw Road,
Midland MI 48686, ( 517) 496-8306.
l Shell Diala R Oil Ax (Oil MSDS No. 60030-5)-Shell, Inc., Product Safety and Compliance, PO Box
4320, Houston, TX 77210, (713) 473-9461.
l Panasonic Sealed Lead Acid Battery-Matsushita Industrial Battery Co., Ltd, Battery Storage
Division, 11-66 Honsyuku-Cho, Chigasaki, Kanagawa, Japan, (0467) 51-1121.
l Sealed Lead Acid Battery-Hawker Energy Products, Inc., 1050 South Broadway, PO Box 5887,
Denver, CO., 80217, (303) 744-4806.
13-27
13-28
Index
Index C
C-Arm
A Camera output video signal 13-13
Collimation 13-13
Access modes 5-2
Components 2-18
Additional functions and options 9-1
Control Panel 3-17
After-sales service agency - China 1-14
Control panel display 3-16
Air kerma 5-29
Controls 3-16
Air kerma rate 5-29
Dimensions
Annual maintenance 11-6
12-inch Motorized 13-24
Anode warm and hot thresholds 9-29
12-inch Standard 13-21
Archive images 8-17
9-inch Motorized 13-23
Clear storage device queue 8-22
9-inch Standard 13-20
Configure Copy To... device 8-19
9-inch Super 13-22
Copy from an archive device 8-22
Draping 2-29
Copy multiple patients to one disk 8-24
Flip-Flop rotation 2-22
Copy options 8-20
Flip-Flop rotation brake 2-22
Copy to archive device 8-21
Generator operating parameters 13-15
Save As... options 8-20
Generator specifications 13-14
Select a storage device 8-18
Identification 2-17
Audible X-ray indication 5-6
Measurement basis
Audio
for technique factors 13-8
Configuration
Moving 2-28
Screen 3-9
Orbital rotation 2-19
Audio configuration 3-9
Orbital rotation brake 2-20
Audio setup 2-7
Overview 2-17
B Positioning 2-19
Setup 2-17
Blank key 1-14, 3-8
Sleep mode 3-24
Brake
Specifications 13-13
C-Arm orbital rotation 2-20
Standby 3-23
Super C-Arm orbital rotation 2-21
Steering handle 2-28
Burns
X-rays off 3-23
Contact 1-7
C-Arm and RUI orientation 3-31
Buttons 3-29
C-Arm wheel brakes 2-27
C-Arm Functions 3-28
Callibrate Image 7-5
Fast stop 3-26
Cardiac imaging 5-25
Image acquisition 3-28
Digital pulse Cine 5-28
Image handling 3-29
Pulse rates 5-26
Image orientation 3-28
CD/DVD-R/RW Drive 13-17
Motion stop 3-26
China
Motorized C-Arm 3-25
After-sales service agency 1-14
Movement 3-27
Compliance information 1-14
Orientation 3-27
Pollution control information 1-15
Workstation operation 3-30
SFDA Certification Information 1-14
Cine
Acquire - ON/OFF 6-3
Activate disk 6-2
I-1
Index
Adjust mask 6-12 Film 3-21

Apply peak opacification 6-11 kVp 3-20
Change acquisition rate 6-4 Low dose 3-21
Mini cine playback 6-13 mA/mAs 3-20
Options 6-1 Pulse 3-21
Post-processing subtraction 6-11 Handswitch 3-14
Review 6-5 Image intensifier field size 3-19
Roadmap mask 6-12 Image orientation 3-17
Select runs from cine screen 6-7 Reverse image 3-18
Set cues 6-9 Rotate image 3-18
Set mask 6-8 Manual
Store frame 6-8 Contrast/Brightness 3-20
Viewing options 6-10 Metal Rejection 3-20
Classification type 13-2 Remote Workstation operation 3-18
Cleaning agents 11-4 Mode 3-19
C-Arm 11-4 Save 3-18
Monitors 11-5 Swap 3-18
Workstation 11-4 Smart Metal 3-20
Cleaning the System 11-4 X-ray on switch 3-23
Clear copy queue 8-17 Cooling efficiency 1-7
Comments Copy to a new study 8-6
Delete 7-3 Create prints 8-14
Place on image 7-3 Clear copy queue 8-17
Compliance information - China 1-14 Print 8-16
Configure network 2-7 Print dose summary 8-17
Connector output voltages 13-19 Print patient summary 8-17
Contact detection 3-31 Select device 8-15
Contact information 13-26 Select layout 8-15
FAX 13-26 Crop Image 7-4
On-line 13-26
Phone 13-26 D
Service 13-26 Data security 1-14
Continued compliance 1-1 Default imaging profile setup 2-5
Contraindications for use 1-2 Delete all 2-7
Control panel display 3-16 Delete comments 7-3
Controls Delete markers 7-2
Alarm reset 3-22 Delete measurements 7-8
Auto Diacritic keys 3-3
Contrast/Brightness 3-20 DICOM
AutoHisto 3-20 Annotate image 8-26
Collimator 3-19 Clear storage device queue 9-19
Iris Open/Close 3-20 Configuration screen 9-5
Leaf Open/Close 3-19 Configure 9-2
Leaf Rotation 3-19 Copy archived Cine run 9-19
Contrast/brightness 3-20 Copy from CD/DVD to 9-19
Fast stop switches 3-22 Export image 8-28
Footswitch 3-14 Flip and rotate 8-26
Generator 3-20 Image Retrieve Server 9-14
Auto technique 3-21 Inverted window 8-26
I-2
Index
Magnifying glass 8-26

Make hardcopy 9-16 E
Network configuration 9-4 Electrical fire 1-4
Network connection 9-1 Electrical performance check 11-2
Operation 9-16 Electrical shock 1-3
Overlays 9-8 Electromagnetic compatibility 1-7, 1-7
Portable viewer 8-28 Degradation 1-12
Print 9-16 Electromagnetic emission 1-8
Print Servers 9-9 Electromagnetic immunity
Query/Retrieve Option 9-19 Electromagnetic environments 1-9
Reset image 8-28 Immunity tests 1-9
Retrieve 9-19 and compliance levels 1-10
Retrieve images 9-21 RF 1-10
Search 9-20 Limits management 1-12
Setup 9-1 Separation distances 1-12
Setup configurations 9-3 Electromagnetic tests and compliance 1-8
Store servers list 9-6 Environmental conditions 13-2
Store/Archive Images 9-17 Equipment
Using viewer 8-28 Malfunction 1-12
View 9-22 Stability, transport, and positioning 1-5
Viewer control bar 8-29 Error recovery 12-1
Viewing images 8-25 Image freeze 12-1
Worklist Query Server 9-12 No boot 12-2
Zoom 8-26 No X-ray 12-2
DICOM setup 2-5 Procedure 12-1
Digital Pulse Cine 5-23 European Union representative 1-3
Digital Spot image 5-10 Exams
Dimensions 13-20 Saved 4-9
Film cassette 13-25 Access Images 4-9
Motorized C-Arm Access Patient Information 4-11
12-inch 13-24 Scheduled 4-5
9-inch 13-23 Exams List 4-6
Standard C-Arm Filter 4-7
12-inch 13-21 Select patient from 4-5
9-inch 13-20 Set up 4-5
Super C-Arm Update Schedule 4-7
9-inch 13-22 Explosion 1-4
Workstation 13-25 Exposure control
Display annotation screen 7-1 Automatic 5-1
Dose area product 5-30 Manual 5-1
Specification 13-4 Exposure timer 5-31
Dose summary 5-31 Extended exposure feature 3-13
Create image for current patient 8-14 External connections 2-13
Create image for saved patient 8-14 External devices 1-13
Review 8-12
Save information 8-13 F
Dosimetry display 5-29 Fast stop performance check 11-2
Dosimetry on X-ray image screen 5-31 Fast stop switches 3-26
Draping 2-29, 2-30 Fast Stop switches 3-22
I-3
Index
Film Mode
Status Bar 5-3 I
Film mode performance check 11-3 I/O interfaces 13-19
Flip-Flop Image annotation 7-1
Rotation 2-22 Callibration 7-5
Rotation Brake 2-22 Comments 7-3
Fluoro imaging 5-9 Add 7-3
Fluoro Imaging Delete 7-3
Digital Spot 5-10 Crop 7-4
Fluoro Mode 5-9 Display screen 7-1
High Level Fluoro (HLF) 5-10 Markers 7-2
Producing an image 5-9 Delete 7-2
Pulsed X-ray 5-11 Place 7-2
Fluoro mode performance check 11-3 Measure 7-6
Focal spot specifications 13-9 Distance 7-6
Footswitch 3-14 Stenosis 7-7
Mode or Model mismatch 3-14 Measurements
Function keys 3-11 Delete 7-8
Additional Applications key 3-11 Image aquisition buttons 3-28
Image Annotation key 3-11 Image directory 8-1
Image Directory key 3-11 Damaged thumbnails 8-3
Logout key 3-11 Review Cine runs 8-4
Patient Information key 3-11 Image Directory
Setup key 3-11 Screen 8-2
Switch Applications key 3-11 Image handling buttons 3-29
Image processing keys 3-3
G Auto 3-7
GE OEC responsibilities 1-2 Blank 3-8
Operating and safety practices 1-2 Contrast/Brightness 3-7
X-ray equipment certification 1-2 Enhance 3-3
General Safety 1-2 Negate 3-6
Ground Fault 1-6 Noise filter 3-4
Save 3-8
H Swap 3-8
Handswitch 3-14 Zoom 3-5
Heat Management 9-28 Imaging
Anode warm and hot thresholds 9-29 Access mode 5-2
Performance improvement with 9-28 Anatomical Profile 5-8
Heating and cooling charts Cardiac 5-25
Anode 13-7 Exposure control 5-1
Tube housing 13-6 Fluoro 5-9
High Level Fluoro (HLF) 5-10 Footswitches and modes 5-6
Producing an image 5-10 Mode display 5-3
HIPAA security measures 1-14 Mode groups 5-1
Horizontal cross-arm 2-26 Mode pairs 5-4
Brake 2-26 Mode screen 5-2
Horizontal movement Modes summary 5-5
Manual 3-34 Saving images 5-7
Set up modes 5-4
I-4
Index
Status Bar 5-3 Measurements 7-6, 7-8

Switch mode pairs 5-4 Delete 7-8
Vascular 5-12 Distance 7-6
X-ray Switch Mode Setup 5-4 Stenosis 7-7
Immunity tests Mechanical performance check 11-1
ESD 1-9 Mechanical Safety
Power frequency 1-9 Burns 1-7
Surge 1-9 Medical device directive iii
Transient/burst 1-9 Medrad Mark V ProVis Injector 9-24
Voltage variation 1-9 Auto inject synchronization 9-25
Implosion 1-5 Connect to Workstation 9-25
Improperly attached equipment 1-3 Intended use 9-24
Ingress of fluids 1-7 Proper injector use 9-24
Intended use 1-2 Messages 12-3
IR remote control 11-5 Mode groups 5-1
Batteries Mode pairs 5-4
Removing 11-5 Switching 3-15
Replacing 11-5 Modes summary 5-5
Monitors 2-11
J Motion stop button 3-26
Joystick 3-27 Motorized C-Arm 2-30
Buttons 3-25
K Remote User Interface (RUI) 3-25
Keyboard 3-1 Controls 3-24
Keys Function buttons 3-28
Cursor movement 3-2 Image orientation buttons 3-28
Diacritic keys 3-3 Joystick 3-27
Text entry 3-2 Manual movement 3-34
Movement and operation 3-31
L Orbital movement 3-33
L-arm Orientation buttons 3-27
Rotation 2-22 Rotational movement 3-32
Rotation brake 2-23 Rotational speed 3-31
Labels 10-1, 10-3 Safety 3-24
Pinch points 10-1 Setup 2-31
Left-handed touchpad use 3-9 Unexpected C-Arm power loss 12-2
Login 2-1 Vertical movement 3-33
Logout 2-1 Workstation function buttons 3-29
Long-term Storage 11-7 Motorized mechanical movement 1-5
Mouse
M Acceleration 3-9
Manual horizontal movement 3-34 Configuration 3-9
Manual movement 3-34 Screen 3-9
Manual orbital movement 3-34 Setup 2-7
Markers 7-2 Movement buttons 3-27
Delete 7-2 Moving the system 11-7
Place on image 7-2 Multiple switch presses 3-12
Material safety data sheets 13-27
I-5
Index
Post-Processing
O Brightness 8-9
Operating and safety practices 1-2 Contrast 8-10
Operator qualifications 1-1 Enhancement 8-11
Optional equipment 13-27 Optimize fluoro images 8-8
Orbital movement Procedure 8-8
Manual 3-34 Power loss 2-45
Orbital rotation Power requirements 13-17
Brake C-Arm interconnect cable 13-18
C-Arm 2-20 Connector output voltages 13-19
Super-C-Arm 2-21 Print dose summary 8-17
C-Arm 2-19 Print patient summary 8-17
Super C-Arm 2-21 Pulsed X-ray 5-11
Ordering disposable Change rate 5-12
and accessory items 13-26 Enable 5-11
Owner responsibilities 1-1
Continued compliance 1-1 R
Contraindications for use 1-2 Radiation control 3-17
Intended use 1-2 Radiation protection 1-6
Operator qualifications 1-1 Radiation Safety 1-6
System compatibility 1-1 Protection 1-6
Unauthorized modifications 1-1 Skin spacer 1-6
Source-to-skin distance 1-6
P Radiographic film 9-26
Password 1-14 Make a film exposure 9-26
Password setup 2-6 Prearm for film exposure 9-28
Patient environment Radiographic tables 13-8
Outside United States 1-13 mA as function of kV and mAs 13-8
United States 1-13 Remote control 3-10
Patient Information Screen 4-1 Batteries
Change Current Patient 4-2 Removing 11-5
Edit information 4-4 Replacing 11-5
Enter Patient Information 4-3 Screen 3-10
Select Current Patient 4-2 Replacement items 13-27
Patient information setup 2-7 Restarting the System 2-43
Patient privacy and security 1-14 Retrieve a saved exam 8-4
Peak opacification 6-11 Image review 8-6
Performance checks 11-1 Review Cine 6-5
Electrical 11-2 Review Cine runs 8-4
Fast stop 11-2 Review dose information 8-12
Film mode 11-3 Review patient information 8-12
Fluoro mode 11-3 Revision history ii
Mechanical 11-1 RF immunity tests 1-10
Performance criteria 1-7 Roadmap imaging 5-20
Pinch points 10-1 Clearing current mask 5-22
Place comments on image 7-3 Clearing mask 5-22
Place markers on image 7-2 Mask from subtraction Cine run 5-23
Planned Maintenance 11-6 Phase 1 5-21
Pollution control information - China 1-15 Phase 2 5-21
I-6
Index
Procedure 5-21 Imaging 5-3

Selecting mask 5-22 Storing the System 11-7, 11-7
Sequence of events 5-20 Subtraction imaging 5-17
Use a saved mask 5-22 Adjusting mask 5-19
Landmarking 5-20
S Registration 5-19
Safety 1-1 Procedure 5-18
Electrical fire 1-4 Sequence of events 5-17
Electrical shock 1-3 Super C-Arm
Equipment stability, transport, and posi- Orbital rotation 2-21
tioning 1-5
Orbital rotation brake 2-21
Ground fault 1-6
Radial rotation 2-24
Hazard alert definitions 1-3
Radial rotation brake 2-24
Implosion 1-5
Symbols 10-9
Improperly attached equipment 1-3
System
Motorized mechanical movement 1-5
Failure to start normally 2-34
Radiation 1-6
Locked up 2-45
Safety hazard alerts 1-3
Normal startup procedure 2-36
Saved exams
Operation 3-1
Retrieve 8-4
Restart 2-43, 2-45
Saving images 5-7
Shut down / turn off 2-41, 2-42, 2-44
Scatter radiation 13-10
Shutdown checklist 2-42
12-Inch (30.5 cm) II 13-12
Start up / Turn on 2-34, 2-40
9-Inch (22.8 cm) II 13-10
Startup checklist 2-40
Security setup 2-5
Unresponsive 2-45
Service-only anatomical profile 2-5
System compatibility 1-1
Set time and date 2-4
Setup screen 2-2 T
Setup Workstation screen 2-3
Temporary storage 11-7
SFDA certification information - China 1-14
Time and date screen 2-4
Shipment 11-7
Touchpad 3-8
Shutting down the System 2-41, 2-42
Configuration 3-9
Sile system check 2-38
Screen 3-9
Skin spacer 1-6, 2-28
Setup 2-7
Attaching 2-28
Transport checklist 11-7
Removing 2-28
Tube rating charts 13-5
Software Setup 2-2
Source-to-skin distance 1-6 U
Specifications
Unauthorized modifications 1-1
C-Arm 13-13
Uninterruptible power supply 2-44, 2-44
Dose area product 13-4
Use near other equipment 1-12
Workstation 13-15
X-ray source assembly 13-3 V
Standby 3-23
Vascular imaging 5-12
Standby or X-rays Off 1-14
Change pulse rate 5-15
Starting up the System 2-34, 2-40
Cine acquisition 5-25
Static magnetic field limits 1-12
Digital pulse cine 5-23
Status Bar
Mode groups 5-14
Film mode 5-3
Mode screen 5-13
I-7
Index
Subtraction 5-17 Security setup 2-5

Vascular systems 5-15 Service-only anatomical profile 2-5
Vascular Imaging Service screen 2-5
X-ray switch setup 5-13 Set time and date 2-4
Vertical column Setup 2-3, 2-10
Operation 2-24 Setup screen 2-2
Switches 2-25 Software setup 2-2
View external video 2-15 Specifications 13-15
Visual X-ray indication 5-6 Touchpad 3-8
Touchpad setup 2-7
W Touchscreen controls 3-11
Wheel brakes 2-27 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 3-13
Wig-Wag 2-26 UPS operation 3-13
Brake 2-27 Video signal 13-15
Workstation
Anatomical profile 5-8 X
Audio setup 2-7 X-ray cooling kit
Brake pedal 2-11 Draping 2-30
C-Arm setp screen 2-9 X-ray equipment certification 1-2
CD/DVD-R/RW Drive 13-17 X-ray indication
Configure network 2-7 Audible 5-6
Controls 3-1 Visual 5-6
Cursor movement and text-entry 3-1 X-ray on switch 3-23
Default imaging profile setup 2-5 X-ray switch mode setup
Delete all 2-7 Fluoro imaging 5-4
DICOM setup 2-5 X-ray switch security error 12-2
Dimensions 13-25 X-ray switch setup 5-7
External connections 2-13, 13-16 X-rays off 3-23
External video 2-15
First-time Setup 2-1
Function keys 3-11
Additional Applications key 3-11
Image Annotation key 3-11
Image Directory key 3-11
Logout key 3-11
Patient Information key 3-11
Setup key 3-11
Switch Applications key 3-11
Imaging mode screen 5-2
Immediate shutdown 2-44
Keyboard 3-1
Login 2-1
Monitors 2-11
Mouse setup 2-7
Move the Workstation 2-16
Operation buttons 3-30
Overview 2-1
Password setup 2-6
Patient information setup 2-7
I-8

9900 Operator Manual English - UM - 5397644-1EN - 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

9900 Operator Manual English - UM - 5397644-1EN - 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

9900 Operator Manual English - UM - 5397644-1EN - 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Healthcare

GE OEC 9900 Operator Manual

GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. GE Medical Systems SCS

Medical device directive

This page intentionally left blank.

1.6.1 After-sales service agency (中国境内售后服务机构) 1-14

3.2 C-Arm controls 3-16

5.5 Fluoro imaging 5-9

7.3.1 Place comments on an image 7-3

8.7.4 Copy options 8-20

11.1.2 Electrical performance check 11-2

13.7.1 C-Arm camera output video signal 13-13

1.1 Owner responsibilities

1.1.1 System compatibility

1.1.2 Operator qualifications

1.1.3 Continued compliance

1.1.4 Unauthorized modifications

equipment unless directed by a qualified GE OEC representative.

1.2 GE OEC responsibilities

1.2.1 Intended use

1.2.2 Contraindications for use

1.2.3 X-ray equipment certification

1.2.4 After-sale operating and safety practices

1.3 General Safety

1.3.1 Safety hazard alerts

Alert Circumstances for Use

1.3.2 Improperly attached equipment

1.3.3 Electrical shock

patients and to avoid system malfunction.

1.3.4 Electrical fire

1.3.7 Equipment stability, transport, and positioning

1.3.8 Motorized mechanical movement

1.3.9 Ground fault

1.4 Radiation safety

1.4.2 Ingress of fluids

1.4.3 Cooling efficiency

1.4.5 Performance criteria

1.4.6 Electromagnetic compatibility

l Emission Compliance level and limits (Table 1-2).

Emissions Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment

1.4.7 Immunity tests

Immunity test IEC 60601-1-2 Compliance level Electromagnetic environment

1.4.8 RF immunity tests

Immunity IEC 60601-1-2 Compliance Electromagnetic

NOTE: These are guidelines. Actual conditions may vary.

1.4.9 Separation distances

NOTE: These are guidelines. Actual conditions may vary.

Degraded electromagnetic compatibility

System use in the vicinity of other equipments

Static magnetic field limits

1.4.10 Equipment malfunction

1.4.11 External devices

1.4.12 Patient environment

Figure 1-1: US patient environment

above the floor.

Figure 1-2: Patient environment outside US

1.5 Patient Privacy and Data Security

1.6.1 After-sales service agency (中国境内售后服务机构 )